Home

Lucent Technologies Answering Machine 107970212 User's Manual

1. SAMPLE Night Service Button 503 NightSve mn Template instructions Outgoing Call Restriction Button 114 EER e f desired write in line number dial code feature or auto dial number Wake Up Service Button 115 Wake S e If desired write in Line Ringing Imm Del or No from Form B2 ler ID Inspect F 17 ID Inspect D l noaea 5 Te pae T sata Restriction ler ID Name Display F 16 ID Name f Out Iri r No from Eorm Bal Not Disturb F 01 DND Privacy F 07 Priv VMS Cover F 15 VMSCover g Voice Interrupt on Busy Talk Back F 18 VIOB Account Code Entry F 12 ACE Ll C L__ _ Background Music F 19 Music Call Forwarding Call Follow Me F 11 XX Xx CF XX_XX Park I XX Park 4 ales AKA uto Dia Call Pickup I 6 XX Pickup XX button for Conference Drop F 06 Drop es Contact Closure 1 F 41 2 Button with 0O Contact Closure 2 F 42 lights is g Direct Line Pickup Active Line I 68 mended But Direct Line Pickup Idle Line I 8 DLPI not required Exclusive Hold F 02 ExHold 3 theta u Fax Management I XX FAX XX be pro Group Calling Ring Page I1 7 G or 1 7 G GCall g grammed i Group Hunt Ring Signal 1 77 G or 1 77 G Hunt g button Night DND VMM sgs PU Gpo 4 v g g o You can ae Intercom Autodial I XX or I XX Ext XX e O SVG 0 Last Number Redial F 05 LNR extension Loudspeaker Paging 170 Loudspk ony or both g 01 Oo 02 Manual Signaling
2. VMS Cover F 15 VMSCover E Voice Interrupt on Busy Talk Back F 18 VIOB PARTNER 18D only Account Code Entry F 127 ACE Oo Background Music F 19 Music Call Forwarding Call Follow Me F 11 XX XX CF XX XX Call Pickup I 6 XX Pickup XX Auto Dial button for Conference Drop F 06 Drop each Contact Closure 1 F 41 CC1 Spun QO Contact Closure 2 F 42 CC2 he i E Direct Line Pickup Active Line I 68 DLPA recom O Direct Line Pickup Idle Line I 8 DLPI elie Exclusive Hold F 02 ExHold 3 Extension O PNR O ry 7 Fax Management I XX FAX XX Tit can Group Calling Ring Page I 7 G or I 7 G GCall g grammed Q 0 Group Hunt Ring Signal 77 G or 1 77 G Hunt g aS ao Dial 01 02 Group Pickup 1 66 G P U Grp 3 4 You can o o Intercom Autodial I XX or 1 XX Ext XX program the g g IMM Last Number Redial F 05 INR grgination oudspeaker Paging I 70 Loudspk only or both Manual Signaling F 13 XX or F 13 XX MS XX ne imate pi acom o Intercom Message Light Off F 10 XX MsgOft XX and Ext Message Light On F 09 XX MsgOn XX Aon O UJ Recall F 03 Recall 5 You can Save Number Redial F 04 SNR program the Simultaneous Paging I 70 SPage ee Specify Automatic Line Selection Station Lock F 21 Lock i Identify extensions programmed as shown 11 Touch Tone Enable F 08 TT EN V Voice Mail Messages Button I 777 VMMsgs 777 Y Voice Mailbox Transfer F 14 V
3. TRANSFER RETURN EXTENSION DIAL 306 DIAL the extension number DIAL 10 the receptionist s extension PRESS _Next Item to program the next extension V Factory Setting J Button with Lights Required TO USE A SPECIFIC PROCEDURE DIAL and three digit procedure code Example L5 LQ L5 for Hunt Group Extensions TO CYCLE THROUGH SYSTEM PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES PRESS Next Procedure or rev Procedure GROUP CALL DISTRIBUTION DIAL 206 PRESS _Z for the VMS Hunt Group DIAL a line number DIAL 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned 3 VMS Line Cover PRESS Next Item to program another line LINE COVERAGE EXTENSION DIAL 208 DIAL a line number DIAL an extension number PRESS Next Item to program another ine PRESS Remove to unassign ownershi VMS HUNT DELAY DIAL 506 DIAL 1 ImmediateY 2 Delayed VMS HUNT SCHEDULE DIAL 507 DIAL 1 Always 2 Day Only 3 Night Only TO CYCLE THROUGH AVAILABLE SETTINGS PRESS _Next Data or Prev Data TO RETURN TO FACTORY SETTINGS PRESS _Remove AUTOMATIC VMS COVER DIAL 310 DIAL an extension number DIAL 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned PRESS _Next Item to program another extension VMS COVER RINGS DIAL 117 DIAL one digit 1 9 for the number of rings before the call is sent to the voice messaging system V 3 rings NIGHT SERVICE BUTTONG DIAL 503 DIAL 1 Assig
4. Direct Line Pickup Active Line I 68 Direct Line Pickup Idle Line I 8 Exclusive Hold F 02 Fax Management I XX Group Calling Ring Page I 7 G or 1 7 G Group Hunt Ring Signal I 77 G or 1 77G Group Pickup I 66 G Intercom Ext Intercom Autodial I XX or 1 XX Message Light Off F 10 XX MsgOff XX For PARTNER II systems in Hybrid mode only if pool 880 is assigned these two Message Light On F 09 XX MsgOn XX buttons are associated with this pool Recall f Saa f Save Number Redial F 04 Specify Automatic Line Selection Simultaneous Paging 70 SPage Identify extensions programmed as shown Station Lock F 21 Lock Touch Tone Enable F 08 TT EN Voice Mail Messages Button I 777 VMMsgs 777 i i er F 14 PAGE 7 of 8 paunbay G31 PARTNER ll system only Requires Auto Dial button for each extension Button with lights is recom mended but not required Extension number can be pro grammed as Auto Dial button You can program the origination extension only or both the origination and destination extension You can program the extension number F Feature button G Group I Left Intercom button XX Extension Form C8 MLS 6 Phone Make as many copies as you need Use template and or checklist For additional instructions see page 8 Lucent Technologies Bell Labs Inn
5. Ifthe Automated Attendant Service transfers a call to a Hunt Group or Calling Group and all members in the group are busy members are either on the phone or have Do Not Disturb on the call is transferred to the receptionist s extension When callers transfer to a busy group they hear Music On Hold tones ringing or silence depending on how the communications system is set up until the receptionist answers If the Automated Attendant Service transfers a call to a Calling Group and the call is not answered the call is transferred to the receptionist s extension after the programmed number of transfer return rings The call will not be sent to the voice mailbox If the Automated Attendant Service transfers a call to a Hunt Group that has only one available member and that member does not answer the call the call is transferred to the receptionist s extension after the programmed number of transfer return rings The call will not be sent to the voice mailbox Calling Groups are not available on all systems Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system 5 7 Syston Management Language You can choose the Language Mode either Monolingual or Bilingual and the Language s used by that mode see Figure 5 1 Monolingual Mode supports a single System Language that callers hear when they call in to the voice messaging system Bilingual Mode supports two languages a Primary Language and a Secondary L
6. Solve problems Chapter 6 provides information to help you identify and correct problems you may have with the voice messaging system If you are the System Manager refer to the appropriate chapters to help you Learn about the voice messaging system Chapter 1 describes the voice messaging system s features and services Learn about programming Chapter 3 offers general programming information for both the communications system and the voice messaging system Manage the voice messaging system Chapter 5 provides instructions for changing system settings to accommodate the changing needs of the business It also offers guidelines for setting up and using the receptionist s extension Solve problems Chapter 6 provides information to help you identify and correct problems you may have with the voice messaging system After you are experienced with the system use the Table of Contents or Index to locate the information you need This guide contains some information about communications system features as well as voice messaging system features For detailed information about a specific communications system feature refer to the Programming and Use guide for the communications system xiii About This Guide Product Safety Statements Product safety statements are identified in this guide by a A A CAUTION Indicates the presence of a hazard that will or can cause minor personal injury or properl
7. Each of these features is explained briefly below For more information about these communications system features see the Programming and Use guide for your communications system Group Call Distribution This feature lets you specify the outside lines for which you want Automated Attendant Service coverage You can specify some or all of your lines VMS Hunt Schedule This feature determines when the communications system is to route calls to the Automated Attendant Service VMS Hunt Schedule works in conjunction with the communication system s Night Service feature so that the voice messaging system can play the appropriate menu prompt In other words the menu prompt the caller hears depends on the VMS Hunt Schedule setting you select and the status of the Night Service button at the receptionist s extension You can choose one of the following VMS Hunt Schedule settings a Always factory setting Routes outside calls to Automated Attendant Service all the time When Night Service is off the Day Menu Prompt plays when Night Service is on the Night Menu Prompt plays a Day Only Routes outside calls to Automated Attendant Service only when Night Service is off The Day Menu Prompt plays Night Only Routes outside calls to Automated Attendant Service only when Night Service is on The Night Menu Prompt plays Overview VMS Hunt Delay This option specifies either immediate or delayed call handling see Figure 1 2
8. If the Power LED is not lit power down the control unit reseat the PARTNER MAIL VS module and power up the control unit m f the module is working properly after one minute the problem is solved If the module still does not work properly go to Possible Cause 3 Troubleshooting Possible Cause 3 The PARTNER MAIL VS may not be programmed correctly What to do Refer to Figure 2 1 in Chapter 2 to determine the extension numbers that are associated with the PARTNER MAIL VS module Then use Hunt Group Extensions 505 to verify that the VMS extensions are assigned to Hunt Group 7 f Hunt Group 7 does not have the correct VMS extensions assign the correct extension numbers f Hunt Group 7 has the correct VMS extensions call for help Message Light Does Not Turn Off Possible Cause There are messages in the mailbox The message light stays on if there are any new unretrieved messages in the mailbox What to do Retrieve or delete all new messages from the mailbox Outcalling Is Delayed Possible Cause 1 There is heavy call traffic and Outcalling volume on the mail system The Outcalling port is also used in call handling If your system performs heavy Outcalling or has heavy call volume the port may frequently be unavailable for Outcalling What to do You may need more ports if you have a 2 port system or you may need to reduce the number of subscribers who have Outcalling privileges Outcalling toa D
9. In addition the voice messaging system offers a built in Tutor feature which is discussed in the 1 2 Overview Tutor Feature Tutor is an on line help feature that allows users to easily access and listen to information about commonly used communications system features Any user can access the Tutor users do not have to be voice messaging system subscribers Tutor provides information about the following subjects System phone features such as ringing patterns volume control speakerphone display buttons and lights Various types of internal calls including group paging calls voice interrupt on busy calls and hands free answer on intercom calls m System features such as Conference Transfer Auto Dialing Personal Speed Dialing Last Number Redial and Save Number Redial To access the Tutor menu users simply make a call to the voice messaging system The system plays Welcome to PARTNER MAIL VS Pleas nter extension and Otherwise to access PARTNER Tutor press 4 When users dial x 4 they hear instructions for using Tutor followed by a list of topics and subtopics The user can then enter the topic and subtopic numbers of their choice Refer to Using the Tutor Feature in Chapter 5 for a list of topic and subtopic numbers Instruction labels which are designed for placement in the handset cradle on the base of the system phone are shipped with the voice messaging sys
10. Vera can use the Do Not Disturb button to send callers to the general mailbox without ringing the extension first The Voice Mail Messages button allows Vera to call Voice Mail Service with one touch The Voice Mailbox Transfer button allows Vera to transfer callers directly to another subscriber s mailbox without ringing the extension first The second indicates the buttons programmed on the phone at extension 11 Do Not Disturb Voice Mail Messages and Voice Mailbox Transfer Case Studies CS Form C3 PARTNER 18 Phone m identifies the buttons programmed on the PARTNER 18 phones VMS Form 1 VMS Form 2 VMS Form 3 F 24 at extensions 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 and 19 Voice Mail Messages and Voice Mailbox Transfer Language Mode The check mark in the Bilingual box indicates that the system allows outside callers to choose between two languages Primary Language The check mark in the Latin American Spanish box indicates that the system answers outside calls in Spanish The check mark in the U S English box for Secondary Language indicates that the system can play messages and prompts in English when callers press x 1 Subscriber Name In this column the names listed for mailboxes 10 through 19 indicate that all employees have mailboxes English in the Mailbox Language column for extensions 13 16 and 19 indicates the subscribers at those extensions prefer to listen to prompts and messages in English w
11. 4 6 Initial Programming Bilingual Mode To change the Language Mode and the Primary and Secondary Languages as specified on te o Oo ON OO RA WwW PP k 11 12 If necessary access the Programming Main Menu If you are already at the Programming Main Menu skip to Step 2 a Press Intercom z z z or the programmed VMMsgs button b Press 9 2 c Enter the Mailbox Password and press d Press 9 Press 1 for Language Press 1 for Language Mode Press 2 for Bilingual Mode Press 2 for System Language Press 1 for Primary Language or 2 for Secondary Language Press 6 to modify the language Enter the number corresponding to the language specified on Press 9 to confirm your selection To modify the other language press x and repeat Steps 6 through 9 Otherwise skip this step Press x z to return to the Programming Main Menu Continue with the next section Automated Attendant Service Initial Programming Automated Attendant Service Before you begin locate Forms and 5 for the voice messaging system If the system is set for Bilingual Mode also locate Forms BBA land Bait Automated Attendant Service is not to be used skip to Voice Mail Service Otherwise to program Automated Attendant Service m f the system is set for Monolingual Mode use the procedures below a f the system is set for Bilingual
12. Buttons on which lines are assigned for the extension light up to show the current Line Ringing setting remaining buttons can be programmed with Auto Dial numbers or features VMS COVER PRESS a programmable button with lights PRESS Feature 1 L5 DO NOT DISTURB PRESS a programmable button with lights PRESS Feature 0 1 Button with Lights Required TO PROGRAM ANOTHER FEATURE AT THE SAME EXTENSION After you program one feature continue with the instructions in the box for the next feature TO CHANGE SETTINGS FOR ANOTHER EXTENSION PRESS Central Tel Program DIAL the new extension s number VOICE MAILBOX TRANSFER PRESS a programmable button PRESS Feature 1 4 TO ERASE A FEATURE OR AUTO DIAL BUTTON PRESS the programmed button PRESS Mic TO END CENTRALIZED TELEPHONE PROGRAMMING PRESS Feature 10 0 VOICE MAIL MESSAGES AUTO DIAL BUTTON PRESS a programmable button PRESS left Intercom DIAL AA Some systems allow programming from extension 11 Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system T In some countries the procedure code for Transfer Return Extension is 309 Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system tt In some countries the procedure code for Group Call Distribution is 205 Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system
13. N lt xS lt CHHDOVSZ A B Cc D E F G H J K L M Numbers blank 11 Note Only 12 characters display on MLS model phones Lucent Technologies Bell Labs Innovations O Form B1 System Extensions May be used if Ext Name Display is checked on Page 2 of 4 Write 2 Digit Code for Each Character To Be Displayed See Table at Right Note Only 12 characters display on MLS model phones Character Codes Letters 21 22 TACT TOMmMVIOIOAS I w A Numbers blank 11 0 00 10 20 30 AUN N 62 O 63 P 71 Q 72 R 73 S 74 T 81 U 82 V 83 w 91 X 92 Y 93 Z 94 5 50 6 60 7 70 8 80 9 90 PAGE 4 of 4 Form B2 Customized Extension Settings Lucent Technologies Bell Labs Innovations Required if you want to change extension settings from defaults for PARTNER II System and PARTNER Plus System For additional instructions see pages 6 and 7 Identify Extension Settings Identify Line Ringing CTP Option Identify Restrictions Permissions Identify if Different than Default If Different than Default If Different than Defaults Group Assignments A m pags Hybrid Mode Q g E3 2 Only Write line numbers or pool access codes in each Write line numbers or pool access codes ig
14. extension number Recall F 03 Save Number Redial F 04 Simultaneous Paging I 70 Station Lock F 21 Touch Tone Enable F 08 TT EN Voice Mail Messages Button I 777 VMMsgs 777 Voice Mailbox Transfer F 14 VMBox F Feature button G Group I Left Intercom button XX Extension Form C8 MLS 6 Phone Lucent Technologies Bell Labs Innovations Make as many copies as you need Use template and or checklist For additional instructions see pages 8 through 13 Check Desired Features Also write in extension or group number SAMPLE Do Not Disturb F 01 DND Privacy F 07 Template Instructions Priv e If desired write in line number dial code feature or auto dial number e If desired write in Line Ringing Imm Del or No from Form B2 e If desired write in Line Access Restriction painbey aJl VMS Cover F 15 VMSCover Voice Interrupt on Busy Talk Back F 18 VIOB Out In or No from Account Code Entry F 12 ACE Background Music F 19 Music Call Forwarding Call Follow Me F 11 XX XX CF XX XX Call Park I XX Park Call Pickup I 6 XX Pickup XX Conference Drop F 06 Drop Contact Closure 1 F 41 CCI Contact Closure 2 F 42 CC2 Direct Line Pickup Active Line I 68 DLPA Intercom Intercom Direct Line Pickup Idle Line 18 DEFI 0O i Exclus
15. 5 48 Update Form 2 for the voice messaging system to show the languages assigned to mailboxes then use the updated form while performing the following procedure To modify a mailbox s language 1 Access the Programming Main Menu a Press Intercom Z Z z or the programmed VMMsgs button b Press 9 9 c Enter the Password and press d Press 9 The system plays the system programming options Press 4 to program mailboxes The system tells you how many mailboxes currently exist and how many are allowed then Pleas nter the mailbox number followed by or press for the next mailbox Enter the number of the mailbox whose language you want to modify followed by The system plays Mailbox XX exists To reinitialize the password press 3 To reinitialize the mailbox press 4 To administer Outcalling press 5 To program the Mailbox Language press 6 To delete the mailbox press D If finished with this mailbox press or press for the next mailbox Press 6 The system plays To play Mailbox Language press 2 To modify Mailbox Language press 6 If finished press Press 6 The system plays the current Mailbox Language then prompts you to enter the number corresponding to the desired language Enter the number corresponding to the language you want to use for this mailbox The system plays For LANGUAGE where LANGUAGE is the curren
16. A line can be assigned coverage as described in this section orit can be assigned Automated Attendant Service coverage a single line cannot be assigned both types of coverage In some countries the procedure code for Group Call Distribution is 205 Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system f Line Coverage Extension 208 and VMS Cover Rings 117 are not available on all systems Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system System Management VMS Line Coverage If you specify VMS Line Coverage for any system lines you must assign an owner to the covered lines to prevent the system from transferring callers who call in on those lines to the receptionist s extension This section provides instructions on how to Use Line Ownership see Figure 5 6 to scan assign modify and delete current assignments for VMS Line Coverage Use Group Call Distribution to specify new lines for VMS Line Coverage Programming Main Menu ro 9p Line Ownership Press 6 Scan Line Assign Line Modify Line Delete Line Ownership Ownership Ownership Ownership Press 2 Press 4 Press 6 Press 3 Figure 5 6 Line Ownership System Management Scanning Line Ownership To review the current owners of outside lines 1 Access the Programming Main Menu a Press intercom z z z or the programmed VMMsgs button b Press 2 2 c Enter
17. BILINGUAL MODE PRESS 1 for Day Menu PRESS 6 to modify ENTER a Selector Code _1 through 9 PRESS 9 to modify PRESS _1 for Selector Code Transfer ENTER an extension Hunt Group or Calling Group number and _ To program another Selector Code for Selector Code Transfer repeat PRESS x to approve PRESS _7 to record the Day Menu Prompt in the Primary Language PRESS _1 after recording PRESS x L to approve PRESS 2 to record the Day Menu Prompt in the Secondary Language PRESS _1 after recording PRESS x L to approve PRESS to approve all changes TO REPLAY A MENU PRESS x 4 TO RETURN TO A PREVIOUS MENU PRESS Lx L Automated Attendant REFER to Forms 3 3A 3B 14 4A 5 and 5A PRESS 3 to program Automated Attendant Service TO MODIFY ANNOUNCEMENT BILINGUAL MODE PRESS _1 for Day Menu PRESS 6 to modify ENTER a Selector Code 1 through 9 PRESS _9 to confirm PRESS 3 to play the Announcement recorded for the Selector Code ENTER an Announcement number PRESS 1 to record the Announcement in the Primary Language PRESS _7 after recording PRESS x L to approve PRESS 2 to record the Announcement in the Secondary Language PRESS 1 after recording PRESS x L to approve PRESS Lx L to move up a menu level PRESS x L to move up another menu level PRESS _ to approve all changes Bail TO CHANGE SELECTOR CODE TRANS
18. Initial Programming Allowed Phone Numbers If Outcalling is permitted an Allowed Phone Number List 407 can be created to identify numbers to which Outcalling is allowed Creating an Allowed Phone Number List Check communications system Planning Form D to see if an Allowed Phone Number List is needed for Outcalling If so continue with the procedures in this section otherwise skip to ie herrea gt NOTE If the PARTNER MAIL VS extensions were restricted to Inside Only using Outgoing Call Restriction 401 Outcalling will not work unless an Allowed Phone Number List is created and assigned Outcalls can be made only to the numbers included in the list To create a list of Allowed Phone Numbers 1 Press 4 2 z Atthe List Number prompt enter the list number 1 4 Atthe Entry prompt select a list entry 01 10 Atthe Data prompt enter the first number To save the number in memory you must press Enter O oa A O P At this point To change the number you just entered press Remove and repeat Steps 4 and 5 To delete the number you just entered press Remove To enter other numbers in this list press Next Item and repeat Steps 4 and 5 Assigning the Allowed Phone Number List The Allowed Phone Number List that was created for Outcalling should be assigned to the extension s that are connected to the Outcalling port To assign the Allowed Phone Number
19. Languages Supported Dimensions and Weights approx Electrical Specifications Processors Specifications The PARTNER MAIL VS system is supported on the following PARTNER Plus PARTNER II PARTNER Advanced and PARTNER 48 communications systems In most countries Release 3 1 or later of PARTNER Plus PARTNER ll and PARTNER 48 and Release 1 0 of PARTNER Advanced Communications System In United Kingdom Release 2 0 or later of PARTNER Plus and PARTNER 48 U S English United Kingdom English Latin American Spanish Canadian French Default Mode Monolingual Default Languages Monolingual Mode U S English Bilingual Mode U S English primary Latin American Spanish secondary PARTNER MAIL VS 11 D x 17 H x 1 5 W or 27 9 x 43 2 x 3 8 cm 4 3 Ibs or 2 0 kgs Mailbox Exp Card 3 4 D x 2 1 H x 0 2 W or 8 6 x 5 3 x 0 5 cm 07 lbs or 32 grams 15 Watts 52 BTU hour during normal and maximum power consumption Maximum current 0 13 Amps Battery backup compatible 68000 microprocessor 256Kbytes RAM 512Kbytes ROM Voice encoding method Regular Pulse Excitation Long Term Prediction RPE LTP Linear Predictive Coder Digital Signal Processor DSP 16 bit specications Environmental Requirements Control Unit Electrical Requirements Safety Requirements Mount on a wall at least 2 feet 0 6 meters from the floor wall mounting required Locate within 5 feet 1 5 mete
20. PRESS 1 after recording PRESS x L to approve TO MODIFY THE NIGHT MENU PROMPT BILINGUAL MODE PRESS 2 for Night Menu PRESS 6 to modify PRESS 1 to record the Night Menu Prompt in the Primary Language PRESS _1 after recording PRESS x to approve PRESS 2 to record the Night Menu Prompt in the Secondary Language PRESS _1 after recording PRESS x L to approve PRESS to approve all changes TO RETURN TO A PREVIOUS MENU PRESS x L Mailboxes REFER to Form 2 PRESS _4 to program Mailboxes TO PLAY A MAILBOX S STATUS ENTER a mailbox number and 4 or PRESS for the first mailbox PRESS to play the next existing mailbox s status TO DELETE A MAILBOX ENTER a mailbox number and PRESS x 3 to delete the mailbox PRESS 9 to confirm TO CREATE A MAILBOX ENTER the new mailbox number and _ PRESS 4 to create the new mailbo TO REINITIALIZE A PASSWORD ENTER a mailbox number and PRESS 3 to reset the password to 1234 TO REINITIALIZE A MAILBOX ENTER the mailbox number and PRESS 4 to reinitialize the mailbox PRESS 9 to confirm TO MODIFY A MAILBOX S LANGUAGE ENTER the mailbox number and 4 PRESS 6 to program Language PRESS 6 to modify ENTER the number of the desired language PRESS 9 to confirm TO ASSIGN REMOVE OUTCALLING FOR A MAILBOX ENTER the mailbox number and _ PRESS 5 to administer O
21. a 4 ports 20 mailboxes requires a Mailbox Expansion Card a 4 ports 40 mailboxes requires a Mailbox Expansion Card Figures 2 1 ana 2 2 in Chapter 2 show the possible extension numbers for all configurations Upgrading Your Voice Mail System If you are upgrading your voice mail system with the addition of a Mailbox Expansion Card when you return power to the system the appropriate number of mailboxes is activated For example if you are upgrading to a 4 port 20 mailbox configuration the first 20 mailboxes are activated And previously existing programming including existing mailbox assignment information personal greetings and passwords is saved You do not need to reprogram the system however you should Delete any unused mailboxes and create new ones following the procedures in Voice Mail Service later in this chapter gt NOTE Numbering of existing mailboxes should be detailed on Form 2 for the voice messaging system You can also play existing mailbox numbers and receive information on the number of existing mailboxes as well as the maximum mailbox capacity for the current system configuration At the Programming Main Menu press 4 to receive the message indicating how many mailboxes currently exist and how many are allowed For more information see Checking a Mailbox s Status in Chapter 5 For 4 port configurations Add two extensions to the VMS Hunt Group Extension Hunt Group 7
22. grammed as Auto Dial button You can program the origination extension only or both the origination and destination extension You can program the extension number F Feature button G Group I Left Intercom button XX Extension Form C7 MLS 12 Phone L cent Technologies Make as many copies as you need Use template and or checklist ell Labs Innovations N es 3 r For additional instructions see page 8 Check Desired Features Also write in extension or group number SAMPLE Template Instructions e If desired write in line number pool access code dial code feature or auto dial number Night Service Button 503 NightSve If desired write in Line Ringing Imm Del or No from Form B2 Outgoing Call Restriction Button 114 OCR If desired write in Line Access Restriction or Pool Access Restriction Wake Up Service Button 115 Wake Out In or No from Caller ID Inspect F 17 ID Inspect Caller ID Name Display F 16 ID Name DND Do Not Disturb F 01 Privacy F 07 Priv VMS Cover F 15 VMSCover Voice Interrupt on Busy Talk Back F 18 VIOB Account Code Entry F 12 ACE Music Background Music F 19 O oO Backup Failure Alarm F 58 Backup O L Call Forwarding Call Follow Me F 11 XX XX CF XX XX A a Call Park I XX Park Call Pickup I 6 XX Pickup XX Conference Drop F 06 Drop Contact Closure 1 F 41
23. z 5 Atthe Extension prompt enter the first PARTNER MAIL VS extension number specified on Press Next Data until the display reads 1 Assigned 7 Press Next Item or Prev item until the next PARTNER MAIL VS extension number specified on displays 8 Press Next Data until the display reads 1 Assigned 9 If additional PARTNER MAIL VS extensions are shown on repeat Steps 7 and 8 for each one 10 Continue with Transfer Return Extensions on the next page O Some systems also allow programming from extension 11 Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system Initial Erogramming Transfer Return Extensions For extensions associated with the voice mail system unit use the following procedure If the voice mail system transfers a call to an extension that has no Voice Mail coverage or if Voice Mail coverage is Off and that extension does not answer the communications system transfers the call to the Transfer Return Extension For extensions that do not have Voice Mail coverage this procedure ensures that unanswered calls transferred by the voice mail system return to the designated extension where they will ring until they are answered To assign extension 10 as the transfer return extension for the PARTNER MAIL VS extensions specified on 1 Press 3 o s 2 Atthe Extension prompt enter the first PARTNER MAIL VS extension number specified on 3 Atthe
24. 58 82 i wl oleae ze rola zo so0 suave valk Lines Outgoing Incoming No Access deg 1 8 1 8 1 4 eal Evl nav Av NAV Av Nav Naw immediate v ay oming Not Assigned only only NAV NAV NAV 1 Write S for Spanish or F for French 6 Write group number 1 4 Assignments 2 Use Line Assignment 301 to remove lines from or assign lines to exten 7 Write group number 1 4 If a loudspeaker is connected and Simultaneous Paging is desired v Default i sions put appropriate extensions in Calling Group 1 Also see Form C Simultaneous Paging A Assigned or Active 3 Write IN for Inside Only or LOC for Local Only to indicate restrictions for all 8 Write group number 1 6 E English outgoing calls onal lines 9 Check off the same PARTNER MAIL or PARTNER MAIL VS extensions indicated on Form B1 NA Not Assigned or Not Active 4 Write list number 1 8 Also see Form D Disallowed Phone Number Lists NR No Restriction 404 CTP Centralized Telephone Programming 5 Write list number 1 8 Also see Form D Allowed Phone Number Lists 407 went Egcaotares Form C1 PARTNER 34D Phone Make as many copies as you need Use template and or checklist For additional instructions see pages 8 through 13 Check Desired Features Also write in extension or group number PAGE 1of8
25. 7 7p Enter Login Press DEHE Enter Mailbox Password accom 1 2 31 AEAEE GETE D Select Programming Main Menu em OD Line Automated Mailboxes o i Attendant Press _4 wnership Press _3 Press 6 Language Press _1 Language Day Menu Mailbox Number Scan Line Mode Press 1 Enter Number Ownership Press _1 L Press _2 Monolingual ii a Assign Li Mode Bilingual Ownershi Press 1 Mode Press _4 Bilingual Play Primary Play Day Modify Line Mode Day Prompt Prompt Reinitialize Create Ownership Press 2 Press 21 1 J 1 Press 2 1 Password Mailbox Press 6 Press _3 Press _4 System Play Secondary Play Menu Delete Line Language Day Prompt Definition amp Annc Reinitialize Ownership Press _2 Press 2 111121 Press _2 21 1 Mailbox Press 3 Press _4 Play Menu Modify Menu Definition amp Annc Definition and or Press _2 2 Day Prompt Press 6 Yes Bilingual Mode Administer Outcalling Press _5 System Reset Save All Press 9181917 1317113118 Play Primary Play System Modify Menu Language Language Definition and or Program Mailbox Press 1 JL 21 Press _2 Primary Day Prompt Language Press 6 Press _6 Play Secondary Modify System Language Language Night Menu Press 2 2 Press 6 Press 2 Modify Pr
26. After you delete a mailbox you can reassign that mailbox to another subscriber s extension using the Creating a Mailbox procedure Remember that mailbox numbers and extension numbers are the same You can also assign available mailboxes to extensions that do not have phones connected to them so that guests employees who work off premises most of the time such as salespeople can access messages while on the road See Guest Mailboxes on the next page for details After initial installation you have default mailboxes for a predetermined number of extensions When you reassign mailboxes you can use any mailbox in your system s dial plan The dial plan is the maximum number of extensions supported by your system This means on a PARTNER Plus system you can create mailboxes for extensions 11 through 33 on a PARTNER Advanced Communications System you can create mailboxes for extensions 11 through 41 on the 5 slot carrier on a PARTNER II or PARTNER 48 system you can create mailboxes for extensions 11 through 57 Note that the mailbox at extension 10 cannot be deleted Figures 5 4 and 5 5 shows the dial plan for each system PARTNER Plus Control Unit or PARTNER II or PARTNER 48 PARTNER II or PARTNER 48 Primary Carrier Expansion Carrier Line Line Jacks Jacks Extension Extension Jacks acks 206 Modules 206 Modules Figure 5 4 Dial Plan for PARTNER Plus PARTNER II and PARTNER 48 5 39 System Management
27. F 13 XX or F 13 XX MS XX origination i 5 MsgOff XX and a F IMM Message Light Off F 10 XX g a sion Message Light On F 09 XX MsgOn XX extension Recall F 03 Recall 5 You can g Intercom Intercom Save Number Redial F 04 ae a Simultaneous Paging I 70 SPage number oO Station Lock F 21 Lock Touch Tone Enable F 08 WEN Y Voice Mail Messages Button I 777 VMMsgs 777 Specify Automatic Line Selection A M M aC v Voice Mailbox Transfer F 14 VMBox Identify extensions programmed as shown _LO F Feature button G Group I Left Intercom button XX Extension Lucent Technologies Bell Labs Innovations x Template Instructions e If desired write in line number dial code feature or auto dial number e If desired write in Line Ringing Imm Del or No from Form B2 If desired write in Line Access Restriction Out In or No from Form C3 PARTNER 18 18D Phone fors Make as many copies as you need Use template and or checklist For additional instructions see pages 8 through 13 Check Desired Features Also write in extension or group number Night Service Button 503 Outgoing Call Restriction Button 114 OCR Wake Up Service Button 115 Wake Caller ID Inspect F 17 ID Inspect Caller ID Name Display F 16 ID Name Vv Do Not Disturb F 01 DND Privacy F 07 Priv SAMPLE paunbay 037
28. For example For directions to our office press 4 It is recommended that you keep the number of menu options to 5 or less to avoid confusing the caller Completing this Form Write the message that you want callers to hear when they call during normal business hours including the instructions to the caller for selecting menu options Suggested options include m Remain on the line for assistance a Dial 0 for assistance m To hear this menu again dial 4 Recording the Day Menu Prompt m To record the Day Menu Prompt dial 3 from the Programming Main Menu Form 5 Night Menu Prompt System Language or Primary Language mm ee Required if VMS Hunt Schedule is set to Night Only or Always Gracias por llamar a Software M xico For English press star one Nuestro horario de oficina es de 9 00 a 14 30 horas y de 16 00 a 18 00 horas Si usted tiene tel fono de tonos y conoce el n mero de la extension a la que desea llamar marquel ahora De lo contrario espere y deje un mensaje con la operadora General Information If Selector Code 9 is left as the default the prompt should E aN a OOE AAN instruct callers to press 9 to leave a message with the The Night Menu Prompt plays to callers when the VMS Hunt receptionist Schedule is set to Night Only or Always and Night Service is on The Night Menu Prompt and the Day Menu Prompt use the It is recommended that you ke
29. Immediate factory setting The Automated Attendant Service answers outside calls on the second ring and plays the Day or Night Menu Prompt The receptionist can act as backup Callers using rotary phones or callers requesting assistance can be transferred to the receptionist s extension a Delayed The Automated Attendant Service answers outside calls after the fourth ring This delay gives the receptionist time to answer the call The VMS Hunt Delay setting you select is used for both day and night operation Immediate Call Handling Incoming Calls Control Unit PARTNER MAIL VS Receptionist answers on backs up the second ring PARTNER MAIL VS Delayed Call Handling Incoming Calls Control Unit Receptionist PARTNER MAIL VS answers incoming picks up unanswered calls calls on the fourth ring Figure 1 2 Immediate and Delayed Call Handling 1 9 Overview Transfer Return Extension For extensions associated with the mail system unit this option specifies how unanswered calls are transferred by the voice mail system If the mail system transfers a call to an extension that has no Voice Mail coverage or if Voice Mail coverage is Off and that extension does not answer the communications system transfers the call to the Transfer Return Extension For extensions that do not have Voice Mail coverage this option can be programmed to ensure that unanswered calls transferred by the mail system return to the designated extensio
30. Item_10 ASA and Form C Automatic System Answer Button 111 column Lucent Technologies Bell Labs Innovations Form A System Configuration 4 5 Required for PARTNER Il System and PARTNER Plus System For additional instructions see page 3 9 System Settings Write response on line for each item Receptionist answers calls during business hours Write Yes or No Number of Lines 104 By default 2 lines per 206 module and 4 lines per 400 module are assigned to each extension or to pool 880 in PARTNER II Hybrid Mode Write number if different from default Transfer Return Rings 105 By default a transferred call rings 4 times before going to the transfer return extension Write number 0 9 0 no return if different from default Outside Conference Denial 109 By default a conference call can include 2 outside parties Write No if 2 outside parties are not allowed Call Coverage Rings 116 PARTNER II only By default a covered call rings 2 times before going to the covering extention Write number 1 9 if different from default VMS Cover Rings 117 By default a call rings 3 times before going to the user s mailbox Write number 1 9 if different from default Ring on Transfer 119 By default the caller hears ringing when the call is transferred Write NA if music on hold or silence is desired Toll Call Prefix 402 By default 0 or 1 must be dialed bef
31. Manager If the Power LED is not lit power down the control unit reseat the PARTNER MAIL VS module and power up the control unit m If the module is working properly after one minute the problem is solved a f the module still does not work properly go to Possible Cause 3 Possible Cause 3 The PARTNER MAIL VS may not be programmed correctly What to do Refer to Figure 2 1 in Chapter 2 to determine the extension numbers that are associated with the PARTNER MAIL VS module Then use Hunt Group Extensions 505 to verify that the VMS extensions are assigned to Hunt Group 7 f Hunt Group 7 does not have the correct VMS extensions assign the correct extension numbers f Hunt Group 7 has the correct VMS extensions call for help In the continental U S help is available at 1 800 628 2888 Outside the continental U S call your Lucent Technologies Representative or local Authorized Dealer 6 2 Troubleshooting Outside Callers Hear Silence Tones or Ringing During Transfer Possible Cause Music On Hold is not set up for the system What to do See Music On Hold 602 in the Programming and Use guide for the communications system System Does Not Answer Immediately Possible Cause 1 Automated Attendant Service is programmed for Delayed call handling What to do If you do not want Delayed call handling program the communications system s VMS Hunt Delay feature for Immediate call handling Possible Cau
32. Play Menu Definition and Announcement Press _2 2 Play Primary Play Secondary Announcement Announcement Press 1 Press 2 Figure 5 2 Automated Attendant Service Menu 5 19 Scio Manageme tt If you need to change current programming for the Automated Attendant Service you can use the instructions presented in this section For example a f you want to change the transfer options available for outside callers use Modifying the Menu Definition Day Menu Prompt and Announcements and Modifying the Night Menu Prompt for either Monolingual Mode or Bilingual Mode to update the options prompts and or Announcements callers hear If you add a line to the system that requires Automated Attendant Service use Group Call Distribution to include the new line f you want to change the way Automated Attendant Service handles calls use VMS Hunt Delay and or VMS Hunt Schedule Menu Definition Prompt and Announcements When the Automated Attendant Service answers a call the caller hears a menu prompt that requests the caller to press one or more buttons on the dialpad to transfer to a specific extension or group of extensions or to hear an Announcement After the caller presses the button s the system transfers the call to the appropriate extension or group and the caller hears Music On Hold tones ringing or silence or an Announcement depending on how the communicatio
33. These additional extensions correspond to the middle two extensions For example if you are upgrading from two to four ports extensions 18 and 19 would be added to extensions 20 and 21 You must perform this task to ensure that the system functions properly See Initial System Stap earlen in this chapter for specific instructions on how to assign the additional VMS Hunt Group Extensions Initial Programming Initial Communications System Setup You must perform the first two procedures for every installation The procedure for Outgoing Call Restriction is strongly recommended to ensure system security For the following procedures you need to know the extension numbers associated with the PARTNER MAIL VS system module Figures 2 1 and 2 2 in Chapter 2 show the possible extension numbers For the extension numbers appropriate to this installation locate Form B1 of the System Planner for the communications system VMS Hunt Group Extensions You must use this procedure to assign the extensions associated with the voice messaging system module to Hunt Group 7 This Hunt Group which is called the VMS Hunt Group is used exclusively for the voice messaging system To assign the PARTNER MAIL VS extensions specified on Form B1 to Hunt Group 7 1 At extension 10 press Feature 0 2 System Program System Program Enter the System Password if required 2 3 Press 5 0 4 4 Atthe Group prompt press
34. You may need to obtain more lines if the problem occurs frequently Possible Cause 3 The message was received outside the hours programmed in the subscriber s Outcalling Schedule or the Outcalling period was ended What to do This is standard operation Outcalling is performed only during the hours specified by the subscriber s Outcalling Schedule Outcalling will be done only for message received during the Outcalling period Possible Cause 4 Outcalling may not be turned on What to do Have the mailbox owner verify that Outcalling is turned on The System Manager should also verify that the Outcalling privilege is assigned peuple hooting Language Cannot Switch Between Primary and Secondary Languages Possible Cause The system is set for Monolingual Mode What to do Refer to Modifying the Language Mode in Chapter 5 to determine the system s Language Mode Cannot Understand Language Prompts Possible Cause Either a language you do not understand was inadvertently chosen while programming or you do not understand the factory set language What to do To change the language to one you understand do one of the following a lf the system is set for Monolingual Mode a Press intercom Z Z Z b Press 9 9 c Enter the System Manager s Mailbox Password d Press 9 1 2 6 e Press the number corresponding to the desired language f Press 9 m lf the system is set for Bilin
35. communications system s Music On Hold feature When Music On Hold is Active and an audio source is connected to the system callers waiting to be transferred hear music or recorded material If Music On Hold is Not Active callers hear tones ringing or silence depending on how the communications system is set up while they are being transferred For more information see Music On Hold and Ring on Transfer in the Programming and Use guide for the communications system Call Answer Service This service offers callers the following options when they reach an extension that is unable to answer their call m If the system is in Bilingual Mode press x 1 while listening to the personal greeting to switch between the Primary and Secondary Languages a Leave a detailed confidential message in the called party s mailbox Press a to transfer to the receptionist s extension for assistance Press x a to transfer to another system extension Callers can press o or x 8 before during or after leaving a message gt NOTE Until subscribers record a personal greeting for their mailbox outside callers hear this factory set message in either the System Language Monolingual Mode or the Primary Language Bilingual Mode Extension XX is not available To leave a message wait for the tone After recording hang up or press 1 for more options Overview Communications System Features Affecting Call Answer
36. enter the number of the extension specified in the VMS Mail column 6 Repeat Steps 4 and 5 for each VMS Mail line for which an extension number is written on Form A 7 Continue with the next section Automatic VMS Cover Automatic VMS Cover Check Form B2 to see if Automatic VMS Cover is assigned to any extensions If it is follow the procedure below If not skip to VMS Cover Rings To change the Automatic VMS Cover setting for an extension to Assigned as indicated on 1 2 Press 3 1 0 Enter the number of the first extension to which Automatic VMS Cover is to be assigned Press Next Data until the display reads 1 Assigned 4 To program another extension press Next Item or Prev Item until the extension number shows on the display Press Next Data until the display reads 1 Assigned Repeat Steps 4 and 5 for each extension to which Automatic VMS Cover is to be assigned Continue with VMS Cover Rings below Extension Line Coverage 208 is not available on all systems Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system 4 25 Initial Programming VMS Cover Rings Check Form A Page 2 to see if VMS Cover Rings 117 is different from the factory setting of 3 If it is follow the procedure below beginning with Step 1 If not skip to Step 3 of the procedure below To change the number of times calls ring before they are sent to the voice me
37. 1 2 2 2 i Installation This chapter provides instructions for installing the voice messaging system s hardware in the communications system s control unit Before You Start Refer to Appendix Alto verify that you have the appropriate voice messaging system and communications system hardware Then Make sure the communications system control unit processor module s and line extension modules have been installed Make sure this installation meets the environmental and electrical requirements listed in Appendix Alof this guide Installation Installing the PARTNER MAIL VS Module To install the voice messaging system module in the communications system s control unit 1 Turn off power to the communications system s control unit either pull out the main circuit breaker on the upper right rear corner of the control unit or move the on off switch to the off position or remove the power cord from the AC outlet A CAUTION Failure to turn off power may damage the control unit and or the voice messaging system 2 Install the voice messaging system module in the first available slot to the right of the last installed 206 or 400 module Do not install the voice messaging system module in the first slot of the PARTNER Plus system control unit or the PARTNER II or PARTNER 48 system primary carrier see gt NOTE The voice messaging system module should always be installed after the 206 and
38. 1 Button with lights is recommended but not required 2 PARTNER II system only 3 You can program the origination extension only or both the origination and destination extension Extension number can be programmed as Auto Dial button You can program the extension number Specify Automatic Line Selection Identify extensions programmed as shown as Form D Number Lists KA Lucent Technologies O Required if identifies External Hotlines or if Bell Labs Innovations see pages 14 and 15 Disallowed Phone Number Lists 404 identifies Disallowed or Allowed List Assignments For additional instructions Emergency Phone Number List 406 Write Emergency Phone Numbers that can be Required only if Disallowed List Assignment 405 is specified on Form B2 daad kon any phone hat has acoess 10 ah Write the telephone numbers that users are prevented from dialing outside line regardless of assigned restrictions List 1 List 2 List 3 List 4 Telephone Numbef Person Place 01 01 01 02 02 02 03 03 03 04 04 04 05 05 05 06 06 06 07 07 07 08 08 08 09 09 09 10 10 10 Allowed Phone Number Lists 407 External Hotline 311 Required if External Hotline 311 Required only if Allowed List Assignment 408 is specified on Form B2 is checked T i Write the telephone numbers that users can dial regardless of assigned restrictions Write Extension Ja
39. 1 for Selector Code Transfer Press 3 for Announcement Press 5 for Direct Extension Transfer factory default setting 8 Do one of the following If you chose Selector Code Transfer in Step 7 enter the extension Hunt Group or Calling Group number specified in Column C of Form 3 This value corresponds to the Selector Code entered in Step 5 Then press Go to Step 10 If you chose Announcement in Step 7 enter the Announcement number 1 or 2 specified in Column C of Form 3A This value corresponds to the Selector Code entered in Step 5 Go to Step 9 9 To record an Announcement lift the handset press 1 and record the Announcement from Press 1 after recording 4 11 Initial Programming 4 12 10 11 12 16 17 21 22 Repeat Steps 5 through 8 for each Selector Code for which there is information in Column C Press x to approve your entries and finish modifying the Menu Definition At this point do one of the following If you do not want to record a Day Menu Prompt or Announcement press to approve the Menu Definition and go to Step 22 If you want to record the Day Menu Prompt in the Primary Language continue with Step 13 If you want to record the Announcement in the Secondary Language return to Step 17 If you want to record the Day Menu Prompt or Announcement in the Secondary Language skip to Step 17 Lift the h
40. 18D only VMS Cover F 15 VMSCover Voice Interrupt on Busy Talk Back F 18 VIOB Account Code Entry F 12 ACE Background Music F 19 Music PARTNER Backup Failure Alarm F 58 Backup II system F GFXXXX OY Call Forwarding Call Follow Me F 11 XX XX Requires Call Park I XX Park Auto Dial r button for Call Pickup I 6 XX Pickup XX each Conference Drop F 06 Drop eas Contact Closure 1 F 41 cC1 lights is Direct Line Pickup Active Line I 68 DLPA ended a Direct Line Pickup Idle Line I 8 DLPI not required Exclusive Hold F 02 ExHold 4 Extension Fax Management I XX FAX XX braid Call Group Calling Ring Page I7 G or 1 7 G GCall g grammed Group Hunt Ring Signal I 77 G or 1 77 G Huntg as Auto Dial Group Pickup I 66 G P U Grp 9 5 You can Intercom Autodial I XX or I XX Ext XX program the Last Number Redial F 05 ENE Synaion Loudspeaker Paging I 70 Loudspk only or both Manual Signaling F 13 XX or F 13 XX MS XX naio Message Light Off F 10 XX MsgOff XX and Message Light On F 09 XX Msgon XX detension Recall F 03 Recall 6 You can Save Number Redial F 04 SNR program the Simultaneous Paging I 70 SPage number Station Lock F 21 Lock Touch Tone Enable F 08 TT EN Specify Automatic Line Selection Voice Mail Messages Button 1 777 VMMsgs 777 Identify extensions programmed as shown Voice Mailbox Transfer F 14 VMBox
41. 3 Write the Telephone Numbers in order customer desires Telephone numbers in this column represent Software Mexico s four lines VMS AA In this column checks for Lines 01 02 03 and 04 indicate that unanswered calls on those lines go to the Automated Attendant Service of the PARTNER MAIL VS system CS Form A Page 2 of 3 System Settings a Receptionist answers calls during business hours No on this line indicates that Vera will backup the voice messaging system Music on Hold 602 The blank line indicates that a Music on Hold device is installed a Ring on Transfer 119 NA written in the space provided indicates that music or recorded messages will be played while calls are being transferred Line Coverage VMS Hunt Delay 506 The blank line indicates that the Automated Attendant Service answers outside calls immediately VMS Hunt Schedule 507 The absence of any check mark indicates that the Automated Attendant Service picks up unanswered calls during business hours and after hours This setting is the default F 22 Case Studies CS Form B1 Page 1 of 3 Write Name Description In this column the names listed for extensions 10 through 19 and 22 and 23 identify the extension assignments Identify Telephone Attached to this Extension Checks in these columns specify the type of telephone each person or location has VMS in the Write Name Description column and chec
42. 3 for Automated Attendant The system plays To program the Day Menu press 1 For the Night Menu press 2 If finished press 3 Press i The system plays To play the menu press 2 to modify the menu press 6 If finished press 4 Press 6 The system plays Pleas nter a selector code from 1 to 9 When finished modifying the Menu Definition press 5 If you want to modify only the Day Menu Prompt or Announcement go to Step 10 Otherwise continue with Step 6 System Management 6 Enter a Selector Code from 1 through 9 The system plays the current Selector Code Action or Announcement number and Announcement then asks Do you want to make a modification Press 9 to confirm or 6 to cancel 7 Press 9 to confirm that you want to modify this Selector Code 8 At this point do one of the following If you want to return the Selector Code to the factory setting Direct Extension Transfer for Selector Code 1 through 8 and transfer to receptionist s mailbox for Selector Code 9 press 5 Repeat Steps 6 through 8 for each Selector Code you want to modify Go to Step 10 If you want to assign a different extension or group to the Selector Code press 1 then enter the desired extension or group number followed by Repeat Steps 6 through 8 for each Selector Code you want to modify Go to Step 10 If you want to change an Announcement press 3 Go to Step 9 9 Ente
43. 37 Wake Up Service Button 115 Wake 2 Caller ID Inspect F 17 ID Inspect Caller ID Name Display F 16 ID Name f3 Do Not Disturb F 01 DND Privacy F 07 Priv S VMS Cover F 15 VMSCover Voice Interrupt on Busy Talk Back F 18 VIOB PARTNER 18D only Account Code Entry F 12 ACE Background Music F 19 Music Call Forwarding Call Follow Me F 11 XX XX 2 CF XX XX Call Park I XX Park Requires Call Pickup 1 6 XX Pickup XX A ba Conference Drop F 06 Drop each Contact Closure 1 F 41 CC1 AA Contact Closure 2 F 42 cce2 lights is Direct Line Pickup Active Line I 68 DLPA recam al Direct Line Pickup Idle Line I 8 DEPI not required Exclusive Hold F 02 ExHold Extension Fax Management I XX FAX XX re vce Group Calling Ring Page 17 G or 1 7 G GCall g grammed Group Hunt Ring Signal 1 77 G or 1 77 G EI eae De Group Pickup I 66 G P U Grp g You can Intercom Autodial I XX or I XX Ext XX program the Last Number Redial F 05 LNR Sisneidn Loudspeaker Paging I 70 Loudspk only or both Manual Signaling F 13 XX or F 13 XX MS XX a haion MsgOff XX and 10 MsgOn xX Extension Recall F 03 Recall 5 You can Save Number Redial F 04 SNR program the Simultaneous Paging I 70 SPage oats Station Lock F 21 Lock Touch Tone Enable F 08 TT EN Y Voice Mail Messages Button I 777 VMMsgs 777 VMBox Form C3 PARTNER 18 18D Phone Lucent Technologies Bell Labs Innovations S Make as many copies as you
44. 6 Keep in mind that there are no group mailboxes Form 5A Night Menu Prompt Secondary Language TO O O l Required for Bilingual Mode only if VMS Hunt Schedule is set to Night Only or Always General Information m The Night Menu Prompt plays to callers when the VMS Hunt Schedule is set to Night Only or Always and Night Service is on The Night Menu Prompt and the Day Menu Prompt use the same Menu Definition m The Night Menu Prompt should contain a welcome and a list of menu options m The welcome should introduce the company For example You have reached the Any Travel Agency Our hours are 9 AM to 5 PM Monday through Friday m Let callers know they can switch back to the Primary Language For example For English press 1 The menu options should contain instructions that correspond to the Menu Definition set up on If callers can dial extension numbers Direct Extension Transfer the prompt should instruct callers to dial the extension number For example If you know the extension of the person you want to reach dial it now and leave a message If callers can dial a single digit to transfer to an extension or group Selector Code Transfer the prompt should provide instructions such as To leave a message for Pat press 6 Keep in mind that there are no group mailboxes Good Evening Thank you for calling Software Mexico Our business hours are from 7 00 to 2 3
45. During System Programming the normal functions of several buttons on the phone at extension 10 or 11 if available change For example left intercom becomes System Program which is the button used to enter programming mode To identify these buttons while programming place the appropriate programming overlay provided with the system over the dialpad of the phone at extension 10 or 11 Use the following special buttons while programming m Next Procedure and Prev Procedure cycle forward and backward through the programming procedures m Next Item and Prev item cycle forward and backward through a procedure s parameters A parameter is typically an outside line an extension or a telephone list entry m Next Data and Prev Data cycle forward and backward through the valid list entries These buttons work only for fixed data such as a line or extension number They do not work for variable data such as date time password telephone numbers or doorphone assignments m Remove returns the current setting to the factory setting Enter ends an entry of variable length such as a telephone number in an Allowed Phone Number List m System Program starts the System Programming process m Central Tel Program starts the Centralized Telephone Programming process that is customizing individual telephones from extension 10 or 11 if available m Feature when followed by o o ente
46. Extension 10 Extension 11 or both can have an Intercom Autodialer For additional instructions see page 9 Lucent Technologies Bell Labs Innovations N o oo S i oo no 8 R Template Instructions e The numbers in the lower right corner for each button represent the default extension assignments If you change them write in the SAMPLE new assignments e If desired write in Intercom Ring Ext XX or Voice Signal ExtVS XX or Manual Signal Ring MS XX or Voice Signal MSVS XX e f desired write in user name for this extension 12 24 o o T Q NI 25 Extensions programmed as shown circle choices 10 11 D D l 26 ojo o 6 amp 27 o m ODIO OTOL a 16 28 0o Q Bea bso e 29 18 20 dooa ag ool oi 3 oo yO 0 a N Form C3 PARTNER 18 18D Phone Lucent Technologies Bell Labs Innovations i Make as many copies as you need Use template and or checklist For additional instructions see pages 8 through 13 SAMPLE Template Instructions e If desired write in line number dial code feature or auto dial number If desired write in Line Ringing Imm Del or No from Form B2 e If desired write in Line Access Restriction Out In or No from PARTNER 18D only Intercom Intercom Specify Automatic Line Selection Identify extensions programmed as shown Check Desired Features Also write in extension or grou
47. External Hotline 311 is checked on Write Extension Jack number specified on and the corresponding telephone number to be assigned to Personal Speed Dial Code 80 for that extension Telephone Number NOTE An External Hotline phone is a standard phone that dials the specified telephone number when the handset is lifted A Form D Number Lists KA Lucent Technologies YA Required only if Forced Account Code Verification is desired For additional instructions see page 15 Forced Account Code List 409 Entry Account Code up to 6 digits Write Description Account Code up to 6 digits Write Description Entry Account Code up to 6 digits Write Description 1 Valid entries are 0 9 write for wildcard press Hold to program eee Form E System Speed Dial Numbers 4c See S Optional for PARTNER Advanced Communications System For additional instructions see page 16 To Dial On system phones press Feature 3 digit code On standard phones press 3 digit code while receiving intercom dial tone Code Name Company Telephone Number Name Company Telephone Number Telephone Number 600 a e 602 6
48. F Feature button G Group I Left Intercom button XX Extension Form C4 PARTNER 6 Phone Bell Labs Innovations Make as many copies as you need Use template and or checklist For additional instructions see page 8 Check Desired Features Also write in extension or group number SAMPLE Template Instructions Do Not Disturb F 01 DND Privacy F 07 Priv VMS Cover F 15 VMSCover Voice Interrupt on Busy Talk Back F 18 VIOB Account Code Entry F 12 ACE Background Music F 19 Music Call Coverage F 20 XX XX y Cover XX XX Call Forwarding Call Follow Me F 11 XX XX CF XX XX Call Park I XX Call Pickup I 6 XX Conference Drop F 06 Direct Line Pickup Active Line I 68 Direct Line Pickup ldle Line I 8 Exclusive Hold F 02 Fax Management I XX Group Calling Ring Page I 7 G or 1 7 G Group Hunt Ring SignakI 77 G or I 77 G Group Pickup I 66 G e If desired write in line number pool access code dial code feature or auto dial number e If desired write in Line Ringing Imm Del or No from Form B2 If desired write in Line Access Restriction or Pool Access Restriction Out In or No from Form B2 Intercom Intercom Lil _ O 0o p nb y az Ext Intercom Autodial I XX or I XX Last Number Redial F 05 Loudspeaker Paging I 70 For PARTNER II systems in Hybrid mode only if pool 880 is assigned these two Man
49. I 8 not required Exclusive Hold F 02 ExHold 3 cla Fax Management I XX FAX XX Bane can Group Calling Ring Page I 7 G or 1 7 G GCall g grammed i Group Hunt Ring Signal I 77 G or I 77 G Hunt g AAEN la Group Pickup I 66 G P U Grp 9 4 You can Intercom Autodial I XX or I XX Ext XX program the origination Last Number Redial F 05 LNR extension Loudspeaker Paging I 70 Loudspk fe or both Manual Signaling F 13 XX or F 13 XX origination Message Light Off F 10 XX MsgOff XX and 9 z destination Message Light On F 09 XX MsgOn XX extension Recall F 03 Recall 5 You can gt program the SA Number nenial F 04 SNR extension Simultaneous Paging I 70 number Station Lock F 21 Touch Tone Enable F 08 v Voice Mail Messages Button I 777 VMMsgs 777 V Voice Mailbox Transfer F 14 VMBox F Feature button G Group I Left Intercom buttom XX Extension Form 1 Language VA Language Mode O Monolingual M Bilingual O U S English O U K English O Latin American Spanish O Canadian French O Other specifiy Bilingual Mode Primary Language O U S English CLU K English W Latin American Spanish O Canadian French C Other specify Billingual Mode Secondary Language U S English D U K English O Latin American Spanish O Canadian French O Other specify General Information m Factory defaults are identified by the Y symbol
50. Mailbox Outcalling Assigned Completing this Form Mailbox To assign a mailbox to an extension other than the factory default cross out the factory default and write in the extension to be used m For PARTNER PLUS use an extension number from 11 33 m For PARTNER Advanced Communications System use an extension number from 11 41 m For PARTNER II or PARTNER 48 use an extension number from 11 57 To mark an unused mailbox for deletion without assigning an extension cross out the factory default subscriber Name For every mailbox in use write the name of the mailbox subscriber Mailbox Language For each mailbox that requires a language different from the System Language or Primary Language indicated on Form 1 write the name of the language in this space Supported languages are listed on Form 1 Outcalling Assigned For each mailbox in use indicate whether Outcalling is assigned Programming Mailboxes You can change a mailbox assignment by deleting an existing mailbox and creating a new one m To program mailboxes dial 4 from the Programming Main menu Form 3 Menu Definition Required for Automated Attendant Service Q Description Selector Range of Extensions Ext or Group for Code for Direct Extension Selector Code Transfer Transfer or Announcement Shop a e Amoucement f A Anoucement Sd PC e General Information m Factory defaults are identified by the s
51. Mode use the procedures later in this chapter Monolingual Mode 4 8 Menu Definition Day Menu Prompt and Announcements To define the Automated Attendant Service menu as specified on Form 3 and to record the Day Menu Prompt specified on Form 4 and Automated Attendant Announcement s specified on Form 3A follow this procedure It is important to understand that you must approve each element that is the Menu Definition the Day Menu Prompt and any Announcements as well as save all of these entries in Step 15 If you exit at any point before saving your approved entries your entries will be lost This procedure is designed to ensure that callers do not hear the incomplete menu while you are in the process of building modifying it 1 If necessary access the Programming Main Menu If you are already at the Programming Main Menu skip to Step 2 a Press intercom Z Z Z or the programmed VMMsgs button b Press 9 9 c Enter the Mailbox Password and press d Press 9 Press 3 for Automated Attendant Press 1 for Day Menu Press 6 to modify the Menu Definition and or Day Menu Prompt ao fF WwW PD Enter a Selector Code for which information is specified in Column C of Form 3 If Column C is empty skip to Step 10 Press 9 to confirm that you are modifying this Selector Code action O 7 Do one of the following Press 1 for Selector Code Transfer Press 3
52. P U Grp g Intercom Autodial I XX or I XX Ext XX Last Number Redial F 05 LNR Loudspeaker Paging I 70 Loudspk Manual Signaling F 13 XX or F 13 XX MS XX Message Light Off F 10 XX MsgOff XX Message Light On F 09 XX MsgOn XX Recall F 03 Recall Save Number Redial F 04 SNR Simultaneous Pagin I 70 SPage Station Lock F 21 Lock Touch Tone Enable F 08 TT EN Y Voice Mail Messages Button I 777 VMMsgs 777 Y Voice Mailbox Transfer F 14 VMBox ne Ob KI PAGE 3of8 pauinbay 077 Requires Auto Dial button for each extension 2 Button with lights is recom mended but not required 3 Extension number can be pro grammed as Auto Dial button 4 You can program the origination extension only or both the origination and destination extension 5 You can program the extension number F Feature button G Group I Left Intercom button XX Extension Lucent Technologies Bell Labs Innovtions Form C7 MLS 12 12D Phone rae Make as many copies as you need Use template and or checklist For additional instructions see pages 8 through 13 Check Desired Features Also write in extension or group number SAMPLE Night Service Button 503 na of Template Instructions Outgoing Call Restriction Button 114 2 e If desired write in line number dial code featu
53. PARTNER ACS 2 Slot Carrier i Line Jacks l aa Line Jacks and ES aja a K ho sin Extension KI fN Jacks Extension p haf Jacks 1 cI 14 sj KI hek PARTNER ACS 5 Slot Carrier Line Jacks Extension Extension Jacks Jacks Extension Jacks 206 Modules Figure 5 5 Dial Plan for PARTNER Advanced Communications Systems Keep in mind that the modules you have installed in your carrier may differ from these figures and will determine the number of extension jacks to which you can connect phones Guest Mailboxes You can assign available mailboxes to extensions in the dial plan that do not have phones connected to them Guest mailboxes are useful for employees who work off premises most of the time Guest mailboxes provide all the benefits of a regular mailbox including Outcalling privileges except the subscriber does not receive visual indication of a message deposited in the mailbox since there is no phone and therefore no message waiting light associated with the mailbox Guests can call the voice messaging system from any touch tone phone to retrieve their messages 5 40 System Management Review the following notes before you program guest mailboxes a If you have empty slots in the carrier you can assign guest mailboxes to those extensions in the dial plan that correspond to the empty slot s When you assign guest mailboxes it is recommended that you start assignments from the high
54. Privacy F 07 VMS Cover F 15 dc VIOB Requires Auto Dial button for Call Park I XX eae extension Call Pickup I 6 XX Button with Conference Drop F 06 lights is Contact Closure 1 F 41 mended but Contact Closure 2 F 42 not required Direct Line Pickup Active Line I 68 Extension i number can Direct Line Pickup Idle Line 1 8 be pro Exclusive Hold F 02 grammed as Auto Dial button L7 G or 1 7 G You can program the origination extension only or both the origina tion and destination extension Manual Signaling F 13 XX or F 13 XX You can Message Light Off F 10 XX MsgOff XX program the gt extension Message Light On F 09 XX MsgOn XX ba Recall F 03 Recall mber R Gorl1 77 G Intercom SE Specify Automatic Line Selection Identify extensions programmed as shown Station Lock F 21 Touch Tone Enable F 08 VMMsgs 777 Voice Mail Messages Button I 777 VMBox Voice Mailbox Transfer F 14 F Feature button G Group I Left Intercom button XX Extension Lucent Technologies Bell Labs Innovations x Form C7 MLS 12 12D Phone Make as many copies as you need Use template and or checklist For additional instructions see pages 8 through 13 Check Desired Features Also write in extension or group number SAMPLE Night Service Button 503 Template Instructions e f desired write i
55. S el Es zla 758 33 28 2B S2l a2 SLIZ Se jals S g 62 s8a Oa loa Taja wl owls slale 2 alg Q Hla laa 2 2386 238 s ro Lines Outgoing incoming vey Beia iaiT y EVI NAV AV INAV lav nav NAV Immediate Y Delayed o Ring Not Assigned only only o Access NAV NAV NAV 10 AE AE A A RN RO ANN Sd EOE 11 m A eee eed eee ee 12 PO a A A E l a e o 13 m N R 14 a E 15 M A 16 m A CO 17 m DL a ee ey ee 18 19 l 20 21 l 22 i 23 l 24 l 25 l 26 27 l 1 Write S for Spanish or F for French 2 Use Line Assignment 301 to remove lines from or assign lines to extensions 3 Write IN for inside Only or LOC for Local Only to indicate restrictions for all outgoing calls on all lines 4 Write list number 1 8 Also see Form D Disallowed Phone Number Lists 404 5 Write list number 1 8 Also see Form D Allowed Phone Number Lists 407 ND Write group number 1 4 Assignments Write group number 1 4 If a loudspeaker is connected and Simultaneous Paging is desired v Default put appropriate extensions in Calling Group 1 Also see Form C Simultaneous Paging A Assigned or Active Write group number 1 6 E English Check off the same PARTNER MAIL or PARTNER MAIL VS extensions indicated on Form B1 NA Not Assigned or Not Active NR No Restriction CTP Centralized Telephone Programming Form B2 Customized Extension Settings RA L
56. Service Call Answer Service works with the following communications system features VMS Extension Coverage Do Not Disturb m Line Coverage m Voice Mailbox Transfer Each of these features is explained briefly below For more information on these communications system features see the Programming and Use guide for your communications system VMS Extension Coverage VMS Extension Coverage may be either automatic or manual Automatic VMS Coverage When the communications system s Automatic VMS Cover feature is Assigned for an extension intercom and transferred callers can leave messages or transfer to another extension when the called person does not answer by the fourth ring or by the number of rings specified with the communications system s VMS Cover Rings 117 feature The system greets the caller with the subscriber s personal greeting or with the system greeting if a personal greeting is not recorded If the system is in Bilingual Mode and the subscriber recorded a personal greeting in two languages the caller can switch between the two languages by pressing x 2 Manual VMS Coverage Regardless of the Automatic VMS Cover setting the communications system allows subscribers to press a programmed button to turn voice mail coverage on and off at their extension To make this possible the VMS Cover feature must be programmed on a button with lights on the subscriber s system phone Do Not Disturb The
57. Standard phone is recommended Write extension number of corresponding alert extension or 70 for loud speaker paging system in next column Required for PARTNER II System extensions 34 through 57 PAGE Form B1 System Extensions 2 o4 For additional instructions see page 5 identify Auxiliary Equipment Attached to this Extension 1 Alert Extensions 606 for Doo Alert Extensions 606 a phone 1 tor Doorphone 2 FAX Machine Extension 60 Doorphone 1 604 Doorphone 2 605 8 for Hotline PARTNER MAIL PARTNER MAIL VS 8 Answering Machine PassageWay Also write Transfer Return Ext No 306 on this form usual Group Assignments VMS Only AA Extension 607 9 Write in Other Equipment Write Transfer Return Ext No 306 ly extension 10 Also see Form B2 Identify To prevent other extensions from interrupting calls assign Automatic Extension Privacy 304 on Check corresponding alert extensions in next column To prevent outside calls remove all outside lines see Lines Pools Not Assigned on Form B2 Also write Transfer Return Ext No 306 on this form O Form B1 System Extensions Lucent Technologies May be used if Ext Name Display is checked on Form B1 Bell Labs Innovations Page 7 of 4 Character Codes Ext Jack Write 2 Digit Code for Each Character To Be Displayed See Table at Right
58. Wake Up Service Button 115 a Template Instructions e If desired write in line number dial code feature or auto dial number e If desired write in Line Ringing Imm Del or No from Form B2 Fn irad write in Line Ringing Imm D yoru Fou Caller ID Inspect F 17 ID Inspect pai If desired write in Line Access Restriction Caller ID N DNF DN D Out In or No from Form B2 aller ame Display F 16 Name 2 Do Not Disturb F 01 DND S Privacy F 07 Priv amp VMS Cover F 15 VMSCover Voice Interrupt on Busy Talk Back F 18 Account Code Entry F 12 ACE Background Music F 19 Music Call Forwarding Call Follow Me F 11 XX XX CF XX XX Call Park I XX Park 4 Requires Call Pickup I 6 XX Pickup XX Auto Dial button for Conference Drop F 06 Drop each Contact Closure 1 F 41 CC1 extension Contact Closure 2 F 42 cc2 oe ith Direct Line Pickup Active Line I 68 DLPA recom P 3 7 mended but Direct Line Pickup ldle Line I 8 DLPI not required Exclusive Hold F 02 ExHold 3 Extension Fax Management I XX FAX XX maer can Group Calling Ring Page I 7 G or I 7 G GCall g gaMm d Group Hunt Ring Signa I 77 G or 1 77 G Hunt g s Dial Group Pickup I 66 G P U Grp g You can Intercom Autodial I XX or I XX Ext XX program the i origination Last Number Redial F 05 LNR extensi Int Int Loudspeaker Pagi
59. a choice of a standard business hours location announcement or a frequently updated announcement featuring special offers Allows callers to leave a private message if the called party does not answer or is busy on another call or to transfer to another system extension or the receptionist s extension for assistance 1 1 Overview Allows subscribers to retrieve messages from any touch tone phone on the premises or from a remote location And the system informs subscribers how many of these messages are new and how many are old previously saved messages Allows subscribers to forward messages with comment to one or more mailboxes on the system Allows System Managers to implement the language that subscribers choose for their own mailbox use Allows subscribers to have the system outcall a specific telephone or pager number according to a predefine schedule whenever a new message is received Note that this feature is available to subscribers only when it is administered for them by their System Manager Provides after hours service in addition to daytime service gt NOTE Outcalling Automated Attendant Announcements and Message Forward features are introduced with this new release of PARTNER MAIL VS The ability to expand the standard 2 port 10 mailbox configuration to any one of three other configurations with the installation of the appropriate Mailbox Expansion Card is also a new feature of Release 4
60. a personal greeting and change the factory set password for their mailboxes a Stan Sally and the coaches should turn on Outcalling and enter an Outcalling number and schedule m The clerk should record a general business greeting for the mailbox at extension 10 and change the factory set password for that mailbox Case Studies F 8 Lucent Technologies Bell Labs Innovations O Form A System Configuration Required for PARTNER Advanced Communications System For additional instructions see page 2 1 Customer Billing Name 6 Features Customer is most interested in most important first Tennis Land 4 Clay Court Anytown NJ 2 Installation Address 3 Contact Name iI P k Phone aliy Tarker 708 555 4567 4 Person to be Trained Phone Alternate Trainee s Name Phone PARTNER MAIL VS Sally Parker 908 555 4567 y o 5 Sold by Q Lucent Technologies Sales Force Salesperson s Name Phone Q Dealer Marisol Colon 908 555 1718 7 System Lines Write Line Coverage You can select one per line R if Line Write the Telephone Numbers Rotary AA T VMS Hunt VMS Write User s Name for Personal Check if Identify other Local Telephone Jack in order customer desires Dial 1 AA Group Mail or Owned Line or Identify Equipment Caller ID Company Subscription Services No list personal and dedicated lines last Pulse 607 1 206 write no 206 for Dedicated Line Service e g R
61. any mailbox A CAUTION Before you assign mailboxes Outcalling privileges you should consider the several system performance and security issues If the privilege is assigned to a majority of users and their message traffic is heavy system performance could be adversely affected Outcalling attempts could be delayed in rare instances an Outcall may not be performed if it is delayed beyond the scheduled Outcalling period Additionally there are no restrictions on the Outcalling numbers entered by subscribers Therefore it is strongly recommended that you limit the number of subscribers who have the Outcalling privilege And call restrictions should be used for the communications system See Outgoing Call Restriction earlier in this chapter for details To enable the Outcalling feature for a mailbox as specified on Form 2 1 If necessary access the Programming Main Menu If you are already at the Programming Main Menu skip to Step 2 a Press intercom Zz Zz z or the programmed VMMsgs button b Press 9 2 c Enter the Mailoox Password and press d Press 9 N Press 4 for Mailboxes wo Enter the number of a mailbox whose Outcalling permission is to change as indicated on Form 2 followed by Press 5 for Outcalling Administration a A Press 9 to turn on the Outcalling feature O Repeat Steps 3 through 5 for each mailbox whose Outcalling permission is
62. as provided below the liability of Lucent Technologies and its affiliates and suppliers for any claims losses damages or expenses from any cause whatsoever including acts or omissions of third parties regardless of the form of action whether in contract tort or otherwise shall not exceed the lesser of 1 the direct damages proven or 2 the repair cost replacement cost license fee annual rental charge or purchase price as the case may be of the equipment that directly gives rise to claim Except as provided below Lucent Technologies and its affiliates and suppliers shall not be liable for any incidental special reliance consequential or indirect loss or damage incurred in connection with the equipment As used in this paragraph consequential damages include but are not limited to the following lost profits lost revenues and losses arising out of unauthorized use or charges for such use of common carrier telecommunications services or facilities accessed through or connected to the equipment For personal injury caused by Lucent Technologies negligence Lucent Technologies liability shall be limited to proven damages to person No action or proceeding against Lucent Technologies or its affiliates or suppliers may be commenced more than twelve 12 months after the cause of action accrues THIS PARAGRAPH SHALL SURVIVE FAILURE OF AN EXCLUSIVE REMEDY Voice Messaging System Planning Forms This appendix contains t
63. by the system tells you whether or not the mailbox exists If you entered the system tells you the number of the first existing mailbox 4 Press repeatedly to hear the next existing mailbox number Press x z to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit Deleting a Mailbox Update Form 2 for the voice messaging system to show mailboxes to be deleted then use the updated form while performing the following procedure Review the following notes before you delete a mailbox a The receptionist s mailbox at extension 10 cannot be deleted a Any messages in the mailbox are lost when a mailbox is deleted The message light is turned off The personal greeting is lost f you delete a mailbox from an extension that has VMS Cover assigned unassign Automatic VMS Cover or remove the VMS Cover button This action prevents unanswered intercom and transferred calls to this extension from being transferred to the receptionist s extension If you delete a mailbox that was assigned a line owner using VMS Line Cover either delete line ownership from that line or assign a different mailbox as the owner of that line Similarly if you delete a mailbox that was assigned a line owner using Extension Line Coverage either unassign coverage or assign a different extension as the owner 5 42 Setem Management A SECURITY ALERT As a safeguard against toll fraud delete unused mailboxes To dele
64. call is transferred Write NA if Music on Hold or silence is desired Toll Call Prefix 402 By default 0 or 1 must be dialed before the area code for a long distance call Write No if 0 or 1 is not required System Password 403 By default no password is programmed to override dialing restrictions and to turn Night Service on and off Write 4 digits if password is desired __ Star Code Dial Delay 410 By default the system inserts a 0 second delay after a valid Central Office star code when it autodials Write number 1 5 of seconds if a longer delay is desired or NO if this feature should not be active____ Music on Hold 602 By default the Music on Hold jack on the processor module is active Write No if the jack is deactivated 9 Line Coverage If VMS AA is checked on Form A Item 7 specify the following 12 Installation Date VMS Hunt Delay 506 By default VMS answers calls after 2 rings Write Del if calls ring 4 times before VMS answers VMS Hunt Schedule 507 By default VMS is on all the time Check if Day only or Night only is desired Q Day only Q Night only 13 Order Nos 14 Sales Support Representative s Name 10 Auxiliary Equipment System Check if applicable m Ooovoo Q Battery Backup Caller ID Devices Loudspeaker Paging Number of zones Magic on Hold Music on Hold 602 must be active Uninterruptible Power S
65. callers dial extension numbers directly n Selector Code Transfer Selector Codes 1 9 represent a specific extension Group Calling number if available or Hunt Group number to which the caller will be transferred Use the following values PARTNER Plus 10 33 or 771 776 PARTNER Advanced 11 41 71 74 or 771 776 PARTNER Il 10 57 71 74 or 771 776 PARTNER 48 10 57 71 or 771 776 Selector Code Transfer lets callers dial a single digit to reach a single extension or group such as the VP of Sales at extension 37 or the order processing operators assigned to Hunt Group 774 m Selector Code 9 lets callers transfer directly to mailbox 10 receptionist mailbox where they can leave a message m The Description and Selector Code number from this form will be used to complete the Day and Night Menu Prompts Forms EA 5 Janq 5A m For Announcement entries in Description Selector Code and Announcement of this form will be used to complete Forms 3A and 3B Completing this Form For Direct Extension Transfer Q Description Write Direct Extension Transfer Range of Extensions for Direct Extension Transfer Leave the factory default Ext or Group for Selector Code Transfer Leave blank For Selector Extension Transfer Description Write the name of the person or group to receive the transfer Range of Extensions for Direct Extension Transfer Cross out the factory default if you want the c
66. card in the vertical slot on the lower front of the voice messaging system module see Figure 2 3 Make sure the arrows on the Mailbox Expansion Card label face up and in Also make sure the card is pushed in all the way 5 Turn on power to the control unit The green Power LED should light f it does skip to Step 6 If the green Power LED does not light power down the control unit reseat the voice messaging system module then power up the control unit again If the green Power LED still does not light call for support as indicated on the inside front cover of this guide 6 Next the voice messaging system module performs self diagnostic tests The LEDs work as follows LED State Green Power ON Yellow Test ON Red Status ON for approximately 2 seconds 2 5 Installation _ 7 After approximately 10 seconds when the tests are completed the yellow Test LED goes off When this occurs check the red Status LED If the red Status LED is not lit the module passed the tests Continue with Step 8 If the red Status LED is lit power down the control unit re install the Mailbox Expansion Card if it was installed in Step 4 then power up the control unit again If the red Status LED comes on again call for support as indicated on the inside front cover 8 After the module passes the self diagnostic tests the extensions associated with the voice messaging system module go off hook Two outside lines
67. delete then use the updated form while performing the following procedure gt NOTE If you remove line ownership either use Group Call Distribution 206 to remove VMS Line Coverage from the line or assign a new mailbox number as the owner of the line to prevent the system from transferring callers who call in on the covered line to the receptionist s extension To delete an existing line owner assignment 1 Access the Programming Main Menu a Press Intercom Z Z z or the programmed VMMsgs button b Press 9 9 c Enter the Password and press d Press 9 The system plays the system programming options 2 Press 6 for line ownership The system plays To scan line ownership press 2 to assign line ownership press 4 to modify line ownership press 6 To delete line ownership press D 3 Press 3 The system plays Pleas nter the CO line number followed by If finished press 4 Enter the number of the outside line whose ownership you want to delete followed by The system responds as follows lf the line has an owner the system tells you the mailbox number of the owner and asks you to confirm the deletion Go to Step 5 If the line has no owner the system tells you so and asks you to enter another CO line number Enter another line number followed by or go to Step 7 5 Press 9 to confirm that you want to delete the ownership assi
68. end of the dial plan On a PARTNER Plus system work backwards from extension 33 on a PARTNER II or PARTNER 48 system work backwards from extension 57 on a PARTNER Advanced Communications System work backwards from extension 41 After you create a guest mailbox use Automatic VMS Cover later in this section to assign automatic coverage to the guest mailbox Calls to these extensions are routed immediately to the mailbox the call does not try ringing the extension first If you do not have empty slots in the carrier you can assign guest mailboxes to the unused extension numbers associated with the voice messaging system module You also need to assign automatic coverage to these guest mailboxes You can use any of the six extensions on the voice messaging system module for guest mailbox assignments Calls routed to these extensions are routed to the subscriber s mailbox depending on the extension used Refer to the table below to determine whether calls are routed on an immediate or delayed basis For a 2 port system If the bottom two extensions are used calls are routed to the subscriber s mailbox on an immediate basis Ifthe remaining four extensions are used calls are routed to the subscriber s mailbox after four rings or after the number of rings programmed in the VMS Cover Ring Interval For a 4 port system If the bottom four extensions are used calls are routed to the subscriber s mailbo
69. equipment causes harm to the telephone network the local telephone company may discontinue your service temporarily If possible they will notify you in advance But if advance notice is not practical you will be notified as soon as possible You will also be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC Your local telephone company may make changes in its facilities equipment operations or procedures that affect the proper functioning of this equipment If they do you will be notified in advance to give you an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted telephone service FCC Information IC Notification and Repair Information The Industry Canada IC label identifies certified equipment This certification means that the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective operational and safety requirements The IC does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user s satisfaction Before installing the equipment users should ensure that it is permissible to connect it to the facilities of the local telecommunications company The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection In some cases the company s inside wiring for single line individual service may be extended by means of a certified connector assembly telephone extension cord The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations Repairs to
70. for Announcement Press 5 for Direct Extension Transfer factory default setting Initial Programming 8 Do one of the following If you chose Selector Code Transfer in Step 7 enter the extension Hunt Group or Calling Group number specified in Column C of Form 3 This value corresponds to the Selector Code entered in Step 5 Then press Go to Step 10 If you chose Announcement in Step 7 enter the Announcement number 1 or 2 specified in Column C of Form 3A This value corresponds to the Selector Code entered in Step 5 Go to Step 9 To record an Announcement lift the handset press 1 and record the Announcement from Press 1 after recording Repeat Steps 5 through 8 for each Selector Code for which there is information in Column C Press x to approve your entries and finish modifying the Menu Definition If you do not want to record a Day Menu Prompt or Announcement press to approve the Menu Definition and go to Step 16 To record a Day Menu Prompt lift the handset press 1 and record the Menu Prompt from Form 4 Press 1 after recording Choose an option or skip this step Press 2 1 to immediately re record this Menu Prompt or Announcement Begin recording immediately after the beep press 1 after recording Repeat if desired Press 2 3 to play back this Menu Prompt or Announcement Press x 3 to delete this Men
71. for example installation of a Mailbox Expansion Card could increase the number of default mailboxes to 20 for extensions 10 through 29 Mailbox Expansion Cards can also allow for configurations consisting of four ports and 20 mailboxes and four ports and 40 mailboxes The System Manager can change default mailbox assignments First delete mailboxes for any extensions that do not require voice mail coverage Then create mailboxes for extensions that need them Note that the mailbox assigned to extension 10 the receptionists extension cannot be deleted gt NOTE Mailboxes should be deleted from extensions that connect auxiliary equipment such as fax machines or doorphones to keep the maximum number of mailboxes available for users and to safeguard system security Guest Mailboxes The System Manager can create guest mailboxes for users who do not have their own phone but still require mailboxes If this is the case either the Automated Attendant Service or system users can transfer a caller directly to the guest mailbox where the caller can leave a message Guests can call the voice messaging system from any touch tone phone to retrieve their messages For more information on guest mailboxes see Guest Mailboxes in Chapter 5 1 14 Overview Security The System Manager is responsible for the security of the system It is important that you fully understand and appropriately administer this product to reduce your ri
72. for the communications system for instructions on setting up Music On Hold No REFER to VMS Form 2Jto identify default mailboxes e f there are extensions that do not require mailboxes use Delete Mailboxes to remove the mailboxes from those extensions e If other extensions require mailboxes use Create Mailboxes to assign available mailboxes Refer to VMS Form 2 Column C to see if a different Mailbox Language is specified for any active mailboxes If so modify Mailbox Language Refer to VMS Form 2 Column D to see if Outcalling is assigned for any active mailboxes If so assign outcalling A maximum of two Announcements can be recorded in Monolingual Mode In Bilingual Mode two Announcements can be recorded in the Primary Language and two Announcements can be recorded in the Secondary Language Programming Flowchart Refer to CS Form A Page 1 of 2 Line Coverage to see if VMS Yes AA is specified for any lines Use Group Call Distribution 206 to assign VMS AA lines to Hunt Refer to CS Form A Page 2 of 2 to check VMS Hunt Delay and VMS Hunt Schedule settings for the PARTNER MAIL VS system If Immediate and Always are checked this site uses immediate call handling all the time day and night If Delayed and Always are checked this site uses delayed call handling all the time day and night If Immediate and Day Only are checked this site uses immedia
73. frequently thereafter Subscribers can refer to the instructions for changing their passwords in Using the PARTNER MAIL VS familiarize yourself with the impact of the Outcalling feature on system performance and security If Outcalling is not permitted on the system Outgoing Call Restriction should be set to Inside Only for the voice mail system extensions It is strongly recommended that you use the communications system Call Restriction features that is Outgoing Call Restriction used with Allowed and Disallowed Lists to restrict Outcalling numbers See Outgoing Call Restriction in Chapter 4 for details monitor your call reporting system records of outgoing calls to identify possible system abuse Overview You should also provide effective physical security for the room containing your telecommunications equipment and the room with administrative tools records and System Administration information These areas should be locked when unattended provide a secure trash disposal for all sensitive information including your company s telephone directories call accounting records or anything that may supply information about your communications system This trash should be shredded Security Policy and User Education As part of your responsibility for protecting system security you should establish and communicate security policies for all system users You should let users know what measures they should t
74. from default Outside Conference Denial 109 By default a conference call can include 2 outside parties Write No if 2 outside parties are not allowed VMS Cover Rings 117 By default a call rings 3 times before going to the user s mailbox Write number 1 9 if different from default Ring on Transfer 119 By default the caller hears ringing when the call is transferred Write NA if Music on Hold or silence is desired Toll Call Prefix 402 By default 0 or 1 must be dialed before the area code for a long distance call Write No if 0 or 1 is not required System Password 403 By default no password is programmed to override dialing restrictions and to turn Night Service on and off Write 4 digits if password is desired _ Star Code Dial Delay 410 By default the system inserts a 0 second delay after a valid Central Office star code when it autodials Write number 1 5 of seconds if a longer delay is desired or NO if this feature should not be active Music on Hold 602 By default the Music on Hold jack on the processor module is active Write No if the jack is deactivated 9 Line Coverage If VMS AA is checked on Form A Item 7 specify the following VMS Hunt Delay 506 By default VMS answers calls after 2 rings Write Del if calls ring 4 times before VMS answers VMS Hunt Schedule 507 By default VMS is on all the time Check if Day onl
75. let callers know they can switch the language they hear while on the call For example Para espanol marque 1 The menu options should contain instructions that correspond to the Menu Definition set up on Form 3 If callers can dial extension numbers Direct Extension Transfer the prompt should instruct callers to dial the extension number For example If you know the extension of the person you want to reach dial it now and leave a message If callers can dial a single digit to transfer to an extension or group Selector Code Transfer the prompt should provide instructions such as To leave a message for Pat press 6 Keep in mind that there are no group mailboxes If Selector Code 9 is left as the default the prompt should instruct callers to press 9 to leave a message with the receptionist It is recommended that you keep the number of menu options to 5 or less to avoid confusing the caller Completing this Form Write the message that you want callers to hear when they call after normal business hours including instructions to the caller for selecting menu options Suggested options include m Dial 9 or remain on the line to leave a message To hear this menu again dial 4 Recording the Night Menu Prompt m To record the Night Menu Prompt dial 3 from the Programming Main Menu Form 5A Night Menu Prompt Secondary Language Required for Bilingual Mod
76. may direct the system to outcall only during the hours of 7 30 p m to 8 00 a m Otherwise the default schedule is 24 hours The start and end times entered by a user are based on a 24 hour clock however the voice playback of these times is based on the system language selection of 12 or 24 hour format In the example above the subscriber would enter the start time of 7 30 p m as 1930 and 8 00 a m as 0800 5 3 System Management m lf a message arrives at a subscriber s mailbox after the specified Outcalling time interval Outcalling notification for that message is not initiated at the next Outcalling time interval The system attempts to outcall three times within a minimum time interval of 15 minutes between attempts However during heavy message traffic periods the time interval may be longer For a pager beeper number Subscribers can program a callback number as part of the Outcalling number Subscribers are advised to enter several pauses where each pause is represented by a sign after the Outcalling number before entering their PIN and or callback number to allow the paging system sufficient time to answer Subscribers should experiment to determine the correct number of pauses needed after the pager service number It is important to ensure that enough time is allowed for the call to be dialed and answered before additional information such as the PIN or callback number is dialed It is
77. need Use template and or checklist For additional instructions see pages 8 through 13 SAMPLE Template Instructions e If desired write in line number dial code feature or auto dial number e If desired write in Line Ringing Imm Del or No from Form B2 e If desired write in Line Access Restriction Out In or No from Form B2 PARTNER 18D only Specify Automatic Line Selection Identify extensions programmed as shown 11 12 13 14 15 Check Desired Features Also write in extension or group number Night Service Button 503 NightSve Outgoing Call Restriction Button 114 OCR Wake Up Service Button 115 Wake Caller ID Inspect F 17 ID Inspect Caller ID Name Display F 16 ID Name Do Not Disturb F 01 DND Privacy F 07 Priv VMS Cover F 15 VMSCover j J k Ba VIOB Account Code Entry F 12 ACE Music Background Music F 19 Call Forwarding Call Follow Me F 11 XX Xx CF XX XX Call Park I XX Park Call Pickup I 6 XX Pickup XX Conference Drop F 06 Drop Contact Closure 1 F 41 cC1 Contact Closure 2 F 42 CC2 Direct Line Pickup Active Line I 68 DLPA Direct Line Pickup Idle Line I 8 DLPI Exclusive Hold F 02 ExHold Fax Management I XX FAX XX Group Calling Ring Page I 7 G or I 7 G GCall g Group Hunt Ring Signal I 77 G or 1 77 G Hunt g Group Pickup I 66 G
78. number For example If you know the extension of the person you want to reach dial it now and leave a message If callers can dial a single digit to transfer to an extension or group Selector Code Transfer the prompt should provide instructions such as To leave a message for Pat press 6 Keep in mind that there are no group mailboxes Thank you for calling Tennis Land We are currently closed To get information about our location and hours press 5 To get information about tournaments and special events press 6 To leave a message for one of our staff please dial that extension now Otherwise press 7 or stay on the line to leave a message at the Main Desk and we will return your call when we re open If Selector Code 9 is left as the default the prompt should instruct callers to press 9 to leave a message with the receptionist It is recommended that you keep the number of menu options to 5 or less to avoid confusing the caller Completing this Form Write the message that you want callers to hear when they call after normal business hours including instructions to the caller for selecting menu options Suggested options include m Dial 9 or remain on the line to leave a message To hear this menu again dial 4 Recording the Night Menu Prompt m To record the Night Menu Prompt dial 3 from the Programming Main Menu Case Studies Case Study 2 About the Cus
79. number for the language you want to use The system plays For LANGUAGE where LANGUAGE is the current language press 9 to confirm or 6 to cancel Either Press 6 to cancel your selection The system plays System Language has not been changed Press 9 to confirm your selection The system plays System Language has been changed 7 Press z to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit System Management Bilingual Mode Playing the Primary Language To listen to the current Primary Language 1 Access the Programming Main Menu a Press Intercom z Zz z or the programmed VMMsgs button b Press 9 9 c Enter the Password and press d Press 9 The system plays the system programming options Press 1 for Language The system plays To program Language Mode press 1 To program System Language press 2 If finished press Press 2 for System Language The system plays To program Primary Language press 1 To program Secondary Language press 2 If finished press Press 1 for Primary Language The system plays To play Primary Language press 2 To modify Primary Language press 6 If finished press Press 2 to play the Primary Language The system plays Primary Language is LANGUAGE where LANGUAGE is the current language To play Primary Language press 2 To modify Primary Langu
80. numbers in this column represent Tennis Land s three lines The last line Line 03 is Stan s personal line VMS AA In this column checks for Lines 01 02 and 03 indicate that unanswered calls on those lines go to the Automated Attendant Service of the PARTNER MAIL VS system a VMS Mail Stan s extension number 12 in this column indicates that the Line Coverage Extension 208 feature sends unanswered calls on Line 04 directly to Stan s mailbox CS Form A Page 2 of 2 System Settings a Receptionist answers calls during business hours The clerk and salespeople will serve the receptionist function so Yes appears on this line a Ring on Transfer 119 NA written in the space provided indicates that music or recorded messages will be played while calls are being transferred Music on Hold 602 The blank line indicates that a Music on Hold device is installed Line Coverage VMS Hunt Delay 506 Del Delayed indicates that the Automated Attendant Service acts as a backup picking up calls after the fourth ring A person has a chance to answer before a call goes to the PARTNER MAIL VS system VMS Hunt Schedule 507 The absence of any check mark indicates that the Automated Attendant Service picks up unanswered calls during business hours and after hours This setting is the default F 4 Case Studies CS Form B1 Page 1 of 3 a Write Name Description The names listed
81. one Review the following notes before you create a mailbox a Mailboxes can be created for extensions 11 through 33 for the PARTNER Plus 11 through 41 for PARTNER Advanced systems and 11 through 57 for the PARTNER II and PARTNER 48 system See Hardware earlier in this chapter for details a When a mailbox is created it uses the factory set password 1234 and the factory set Mailbox Language in either the System Language in Monolingual Mode or Primary Language in Bilingual Mode The Mailbox Language can be changed on a per mailbox basis See Modifying a Mailbox Language later in this chapter for details a You can create a guest mailbox for an extension that does not have a phone connected to it See Guest Mailboxes earlier in this chapter for details To create a mailbox 1 Access the Programming Main Menu a Press Intercom z z Zz or the programmed VMMsgs button b Press 9 9 c Enter the Password and press d Press 9 The system plays the system programming options 2 Press 4 to program mailboxes The system tells you how many mailboxes exist and how many are allowed then Pleas nter the mailbox number followed by or press for the next mailbox 3 Enter the number of the mailbox you want to create followed by The system plays Mailbox XX does not exist To create this mailbox press 4 If finished with this mailbox press or press for
82. press At this point do one of the following To change the System Language if the system is set for Monolingual Mode go to Step 3 of Modifying the System Language To change the Primary Language if the system is set for Bilingual Mode go to Step 3 of Modifying the Primary Language Press x z to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit Monolingual Mode Playing the System Language 5 10 To listen to the current System Language 1 Access the Programming Main Menu a Press intercom Zz Zz z or the progrmmed VMMsgs button b Press 9 9 c Enter the Password and press d Press 9 The system plays the system programming options Press 1 for Language The system plays To program Language Mode press 1 To program System Language press 2 If finished press Press 2 for System Language The system plays To play System Language press 2 To modify System Language press 6 If finished press System Management 4 Press 2 The system plays System language is LANGUAGE where LANGUAGE is the current language To play System Language press 2 To modify System Language press 6 If finished press 5 At this point do one of the following To change the System Language go to Step 4 of Modifying the System Language Press x z to return to the Programming Main Menu or ha
83. prevent other extensions from interrupting calls asign Automatic Extension Privacy 304 on Form B2 Must be standard phone If immediate dialing is required use a dedicated line Do not assign restrictions that 8 Check corresponding alert extensions in next column To prevent outside calls remove all outside lines see prevent dialing the outside number Forced Account Code Entry 307 or groups Also see Form D External Lines Not Assigned on Form B2 Hotline 311 Also write Transfer Return Ext No 306 on this form 5 Standard phone is recommended Write extension number of corresponding alert extension or 70 for loud 10 Write 1 2 or B for Both to identify which Contact Closure the extension can activate speaker paging system in next column Lucent Technologies Bell Labs Innovations Pops Write Name Description If checked see Form B1 Page 3 of 3 If there is a mix of PARTNER model and MLS model phones write P for PARTNER and M for MLS Intercom Autodialer 18 Button Display Identify Telephone Attached to this Extension Write T for touch tone or R for rotary If Call Waiting is desired check next column Must be standard phone If immediate dialing is required use a dedicated line Do not assign restrictions that prevent dialing the outside number Forced Account Code Entry 307 or groups Also see Form D External Hot
84. responsible for checking the messages in the mailbox at extension 10 and forwarding them to the appropriate people a Calls will go to the Automated Attendant Service of the PARTNER MAIL VS system during the day and at night a The majority of Software Mexico s callers have questions about their software or inquiries about bills Therefore callers who receive Automated Attendant Service and want to speak to the customer service representative or the bookkeeper can do so easily by pressing a single digit as explained in the Automated Attendant Service prompt Since the majority of Software Mexico s customers speak Spanish the system should answer outside calls and play messages and prompts in Spanish Callers will have the option of listening to the prompts and messages in English a Each employee will have a mailbox and Automatic VMS Cover assigned to his or her extension This arrangement allows callers to leave personal messages when the employee is unable to answer a call F 21 Case Studies Filling Out the Planning Forms This section explains how the System Planner for the PARTNER Plus Release 4 1 Communications System and the forms for the PARTNER MAIL VS Release 4 Voice Messaging System are filled out based on the facts in the Software Mexico case For brevity CS refers to the System Planner forms for the communications system and VMS refers to the forms for the voice messaging system CS Form A Page 1 of
85. restrictions should be used for the communications system See Outgoing Call Restriction in Chapter 4 for details To assign or remove Outcalling privileges for a mailbox 1 Access the Programming Main Menu a Press intercom Z Z Z or the programmed VMMsgs button b Press 9 9 c Enter the Password and press d Press 9 The system plays the system programming options 5 49 System Management 2 Press 4 to program mailboxes The system tells you how many mailboxes exist and how many are allowed then Pleas nter the mailbox number followed by or press for the next mailbox 3 Enter the number of the mailbox for which you want to activate deactivate Outcalling privileges followed by The system plays Mailbox XX exists To reinitialize the password press 3 To reinitialize the mailbox press 4 To administer Outcalling press 5 To program the Mailbox Language press 6 To delete the mailbox press D If finished with this mailbox press or press for the next mailbox 4 Press 5 to administer Outcalling The system plays To turn on Outcalling press 9 To turn off Outcalling press 6 5 Either Press 9 to activate Outcalling The system plays Outcalling is turned on Press 6 to deactivate Outcalling The system plays Outcalling is turned off 6 To activate deactivate Outcalling for another mailbox repeat steps 3 through 5 7 P
86. strongly recommended that subscribers verify that the system can function properly with the Outcalling number as it is entered Subscribers should leave a message in their own mailbox during a scheduled Outcalling period to ensure that the system places the call to their beeper Fora telephone number After the system has sent all the digits of the Outcalling number the system plays a message that announces the subscriber s mailbox number and notification that a new message has arrived It also instructs the subscriber how to access the new message and how to cancel the Outcalling notification This message is repeated five times unless it is interrupted by the subscriber The subscriber may make up to three attempts to log in during the outcall before the system disconnects A subscriber can cancel Outcalling for a new message without logging in or listening to the new message by pressing x when listening to the Outcalling notification message System Management Using the Tutor Feature Tutor is an on line help feature that allows all system users not just voice messaging system subscribers to easily access and listen to information on commonly used communications system features You should let system users know about this feature and recommend that users stick the Tutor Service label provided with the voice messaging system hardware into the depression for the handset mouthpiece on the base of their sys
87. symbol The system comes with a predetermined number of mailboxes The optional Mailbox Expansion Card doubles the capacity Mailbox 10 is reserved for the receptionist at extension 10 and cannot be changed Mailbox 10 provides 60 minutes of message recording time All other mailboxes provide 20 minutes of message recording time For system security mailooxes should be deleted where they are not needed for example mailboxes should be deleted for extensions in use by auxiliary equipment such as a fax or doorphone and the extensions assigned to the VMS Hunt Group Guest mailboxes can be created for users who don t have their own phone by assigning an unused extension number as the mailbox number Unused extension numbers include 1 vacant extension jacks in installed 206 modules and 2 extensions in your DIAL plan higher than the last extension jack in the last installed 206 module See Guest Mailboxes in Chapter 5 for more information Q Outcalling Assigned Mailbox Language Mailbox Subscriber Name Completing this Form Mailbox To assign a mailbox to an extension other than the factory default cross out the factory default and write in the extension to be used m For PARTNER PLUS use an extension number from 11 33 m For PARTNER Advanced Communications System use an extension number from 11 41 a For PARTNER Il or PARTNER 48 use an extension number from 11 57 To mark a
88. takes incoming or transferred calls in round robin fashion Calls to the Hunt Group are directed to the first available extension in the group with the extension that answered most recently being the last one in the hunt order See also Calling Group and Me I Immediate Call Handling A communications system feature that allows the Automated Attendant Service to answer every incoming outside call on specified lines and play the Automated Attendant Service day or night menu See a so Delayed Industry standard device A telephone or other telecommunications device that can be connected directly to the public telephone network See also Intercom call A call that is made to another system extension k amp CCC L Language Mode See Blingual Moda and Line Coverage Extension A communications system feature that directs incoming calls on a specific line to a specific extension Line jack The location on 206 and 400 modules that allow you to connect outside lines to the control unit Line number The number assigned to each line jack on a 206 or 400 module Line jack numbers run consecutively from 01 through 12 fora PARTNER Plus system 01 through 15 for a PARTNER ACS or from 01 through 24 for PARTNER II and PARTNER 48 systems Line Ownership A voice messaging system feature that lets you program VMS Line Coverage See also Group Call Distribution and VMS Line Coverage Glossary M Mailbox A storage a
89. the Password and press d Press 9 The system plays the system programming options Press 6 for line ownership The system plays To scan line ownership press 2 to assign line ownership press 4 to modify line ownership press 6 To delete line ownership press D Press 2 The system plays Pleas nter the CO line number followed by or press for the next line owner Enter a specific outside line number followed by or press for the first outside line number that has been assigned an owner The system responds as follows If you entered a line number followed by the system tells you whether or not an owner is assigned If you entered the system tells you the mailbox number of the owner of the first outside line that has an owner Press to hear the mailbox number for the next outside line that has an owner Press x z to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit System Management Assigning Line Ownership Update Form 6 for the voice messaging system to show the line number that requires coverage and the line owner s extension number then use the updated form while performing the following procedure Make sure you also use Group Call Distribution 206 later in this section to assign coverage to lines To associate an outside line with a specific subscriber s mailbox 1 Access the Programming Main M
90. the language callers initially hear when they call in to the voice messaging system See also Secondary Language Programmable button A system phone button that does not have a line assigned it can be set up to dial a number or access a feature Programming extension An extension from which you can program the communications system It can be either extension 10 or 11 if available EE R Receptionist The person who primarily is responsible for answering outside calls This is the person at extension 10 EEE SeSe S Secondary Language In Bilingual Mode the language callers have the option of hearing when they call in to the voice messaging system See also Primary Language Selector Code A single digit 1 9 used to define transfer options for outside callers on the Automated Attendant Service menu See also Menu Definition and Menu Prompt Send All Calls A communications system feature that lets subscribers use Do Not Disturb to send callers immediately to their mailbox calls do not ring the extension first provided voice mail coverage is on at the extension Standard phone An industry standard touch tone or rotary phone such as you might have in your home Some standard phones include special feature buttons for frequently used calling functions See also Industry standard__device Subscriber A user who is assigned a mailbox System Language In Monolingual Mode the language callers hears when they call in t
91. the next mailbox System Management 4 Press 4 The system plays Created 5 Press x z to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit Reinitializing a Password If a subscriber forgets the password for his or her mailbox you can reinitialize the password to the factory setting of 1234 so the user can retrieve messages Remind the subscriber to change the password immediately after logging in for the first time To reinitialize a password to 1234 1 Access the Programming Main Menu a Press Intercom z Z z or the programmed VMMsgs button b Press 9 2 2 c Enter the Password and press d Press 9 The system plays the system programming options 2 Press 4 to program mailboxes The system tells you how many mailboxes exist and how many are allowed then Pleas nter the mailbox number followed by or press for the next mailbox 3 Enter the number of the mailbox whose password you want to reinitialize followed by The system plays Mailbox XX exists To reinitialize the password press 3 To reinitialize the mailbox press 4 To administer Outcalling press 5 To program the Mailbox Language press 6 To delete the mailbox press D If finished with this mailbox press Or press for the next mailbox 4 Press 3 The system plays The password has been reinitialized 5 Press x z to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit 5
92. they hear while listening to the Announcement For example Para espafol marque 1 Announcements can supply frequently requested information so that your staff is free to assist customers or to perform other tasks more efficiently An Announcement can be up to four minutes long Completing this Form Write the Announcement and its number in the space provided Recording the Announcement s To record the Announcement dial 3 from the Programming Main Menu Form 3B Automated Attendant Announcement Secondary Language Required for Bilingual Mode only if Selector Code transfer is set to Announcement Announcement Announcement General Information After the Announcement plays you can program the system to hang up or to offer callers the option of pressing 4 to repeat this Announcement 7 to return to the Main Menu 8 to transfer to an extension or 0 Let callers know they can switch to the Primary Language while listening to the Announcement For example For English press 1 Announcements can supply frequently requested information so that your staff is free to assist customers or to perform other tasks more efficiently An Announcement can be up to four minutes long Completing this Form Write the Announcement and its number in the space provided Recording the Announcement s m To record the Announcement dial 3 from the Programming Main Menu Form 4 Day Men
93. to be changed N Press x z to return to the Programming Main Menu 8 Continue with the next section gt NOTE Although you have assigned Outcalling for a specific mailbox the subscriber must specify a telephone or pager number and turn outcalling on before this feature will function Subscribers may also establish an Outcalling schedule optional 4 17 Initial Programming Line Ownership Before you begin locate Form 6 for the voice messaging system a If Form 6lis filled out use the procedure below to assign ownership a f Form 6 is not filled out skip to Communications System Assigning Line Ownership To assign an owner to an outside line as specified on Form 6 4 18 1 a A OO PD oO If necessary access the Programming Main Menu If you are already at the Programming Main Menu skip to Step 2 a Press Intercom z z Zz or the programmed VMMsgs button b Press 9 9 c Enter the Mailbox Password and press d Press 9 Press 6 for Line Ownership Press 4 to assign Line Ownership Enter a line number specified in Column A of Form 6 followed by Enter the line owner s mailbox number specified in Column D of Form 6 followed by Repeat Steps 4 and 5 for each owned line Hang up to exit voice messaging system programming Refer to the next section to program the communications system Initial Programming Commun
94. will prevent unauthorized use of common carrier telecommunication services or facilities accessed through or connected to it Lucent Technologies will not be responsible for any charges that result from such unauthorized use Federal Communications Commission Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense Canadian Department of Communications DOC Interference Information This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions set out in the radio interference regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications Le Pr sent Appareil Num rique n met pas de bruits radio lectriques d passant les limites applicable aux appareils num riques de la class A pr scrites dans le reglement sur le brouillage radio lectrique dict par le minist re des Communications du Canada Trademarks PARTNER PARTN
95. yourself by following the appropriate troubleshooting procedures described in this chapter If not you can call for help in the continental U S call the Technical Service Center at 1 800 628 2888 outside the continental U S call your Lucent Technologies Representative or local Authorized Dealer The following sections describe various difficulties that might occur possible causes for the difficulty and procedures you can follow to try to solve the problem 6 1 Troubleshooting Automated Attendant Service Outside Callers Hear Ringing but System Does Not Answer Possible Cause 1 This is normal when the PARTNER MAIL VS extensions are busy What to do There are a number of ways to reduce the amount of time a PARTNER MAIL VS extension is busy For example you can recommend that users access the Tutor Service feature during non peak calling hours you can reduce the number of options in the Automated Attendant Service menu or you can reduce the length of the Automated Attendant Service menu prompt Possible Cause 2 The PARTNER MAIL VS module may not be installed correctly What to do Check the PARTNER MAIL VS module to make sure it is securely mounted in the control unit Also check the module s LEDs the Power LED should be steady green and the Status LED should not be lit If the Power and Status LEDs are lit perform the System Save Reset All procedure by entering 989 RESET 989 73738 after you log in as the System
96. 0 and 4 00 to 6 00 lf you know the extension number and you want to leave a message dial it now If not please wait and leave a message for the attendant If Selector Code 9 is left as the default the prompt should instruct callers to press 9 to leave a message with the receptionist It is recommended that you keep the number of menu options to 5 or less to avoid confusing the caller Completing this Form Write the message that you want callers to hear when they call after normal business hours including instructions to the caller for selecting menu options Suggested options include m Dial 9 or remain on the line to leave a message m To hear this menu again dial 4 Recording the Night Menu Prompt m To record the Night Menu Prompt dial 3 from the Programming Main Menu Glossary E A Announcement An informative message that provides frequently requested information It is recorded by the System Manager and plays to callers who select it from an Automated Attendant s Menu Auto Dial button A programmable button on a system phone that lets the user dial a series of digits simply by pressing that button An Auto Dial button can be used to dial the voice messaging system with one touch See also Programmable button Automated Attendant Service A component of the voice messaging system that consists of a menu definition and prompt It provides outside callers with options enabling them
97. 03 By default no password is programmed to override dialing restrictions and to turn Night Service on and off Write 4 digits if password is desired___ e Music on Hold 602 By default the Music on Hold jack on the processor module is active Write No if the jack is deactivated 10 Line Coverage Complete items based on Line Coverage selection on Form A Item 8 DXD PARTNER II system only If DXD is checked specify the following Direct Extension Dial Delay 112 By default a call rings 2 times before it is answered by the system Write number 0 9 if different from default____ Direct Extension Dial Record Playback I 892 message of up to 20 seconds that caller hears when call is answered with the Direct Extension Dial feature Write message below and record from extension 10 or 11 Lucent Technologies Bell Labs Innovations N Identify Telephone Attached to this Extension Write Name Description Alert Extension tor Hotline intercom Autodialer 18 Button Display Call Waiting 316 External Hotline 311 4 Hotline 603 5 18 Button 2 12 Button Display Cordless Wireless Standard 3 Check if Ext Name Display CTP 12 Button 2 i Programmer 5 l Felipe CS Rep I Rosa Bookkeeper O O O Form B1 System Extensions Required for PARTNER II System and PARTNER Plus System For additional instructions see page
98. 03 604 605 606 607 608 609 610 611 612 613 614 615 616 617 618 619 620 621 622 623 624 625 626 627 628 629 630 631 632 633 You can dial System Speed Dial numbers that are marked with at any time regardless of Telephone number can be up to 28 digits including 0 9 and special dialing functions dialing restrictions placed on your extension System Speed Dial numbers are programmed by the see page 16 of instructions for detailed information System Manager report problems and suggested revisions to your System Manager Form A System Configuration Lucent Technologies Bell Labs Innovations 8 Required for PARTNER II System and PARTNER Plus System For additional instructions see page 2 6 Configure Hardware for Hybrid Mode PARTNER II system only No Q Yes O If yes call local telephone company MF Mode and FCC AS5 USA 21312 MF E 1 Customer Billing Name 2 Installation Address 3 Contact Name Phone 7 Features Customer is most interested in most important first 4 Person to be Trained Phone Alternate Trainee s Name Phone 5 Sold by Lucent Technologies Sales Force Sal
99. 04 Identify extensions programmed as shown Simultaneous Paging I 70 SPage Station Lock F 21 Lock Touch Tone Enable F 08 N Voice Mail Messages Buttor I 777 VMMsgs 777 WV Voice Mailbox Transfer F 14 VMBox F Feature button G Group I Left Intercom button XX Extension Form 2 Mailbox Assignments i i Outcalling Assigned General Information m Factory defaults are identified by the symbol m The system comes with a predetermined number of mailboxes The optional Mailbox Expansion Card doubles the capacity m Mailbox 10 is reserved for the receptionist at extension 10 and cannot be changed m Mailbox 10 provides 60 minutes of message recording time All other mailboxes provide 20 minutes of message recording time m For system security mailboxes should be deleted where they are not needed for example mailboxes should be deleted for extensions in use by auxiliary equipment such as a fax or doorphone and the extensions assigned to the VMS Hunt Group Guest mailboxes can be created for users who don t have their own phone by assigning an unused extension number as the mailbox number Unused extension numbers include 1 vacant extension jacks in installed 206 modules and 2 extensions in your DIAL plan higher than the last extension jack in the last installed 206 module See Guest Mailboxes in Chapter 5 for more information Q Mailbox Subscriber Name
100. 10 DXD and Direct Extension Dial Button 113 6 Check desired line for 206 or enter line owner s extension number for 208 Also see PARTNER 3 Check if desired Also see Form A Item 10 VMS AA and Form B1 PARTNER MAIL or PARTNER MAIL VS MAILJor PARTNER MAIL VS column S column Write extension number of line owner eligible for Call Coverage Also write line owners name in next column 4 Check if desired Also see Form A tem 10 RSA and Form C Automatic System Answer Button 111 Form A System Configuration BA Lucent Technologies Bell Labs Innovations Required for PARTNER Il System and PARTNER Plus System For additional instructions see page 3 9 System Settings Write response on line for each item VMS AA If VMS AA is checked specify the following e Receptionist answers calls during business hours Write Yes or No No VMS Hunt Delay 506 By default VMS answers calls after 2 rings Write Del if e Number of Lines 104 By default 2 lines per 206 module and 4 lines per 400 module calls ring 4 times before VMS answers__ are assigned to each extension or to pool 880 in PARTNER II Hybrid Mode Write VMS Hunt Schedule 507 By default VMS is on all the time Check if Day only or number if different from default Night only is desired e Transfer Return Rings 105 By default a transferred call rings 4 times before going to a Day only the transfer return extension W
101. 2 a 3 gt e S plg o 2 column to show desired Line Ringing options for Line Access Restriction 302 or Slez hgp g 215 _ l leSlolow ale 2 Pool Access Restriction 315 asi gS 9a alx T 3 S SH 2 aes Ve Bs Soleeieeise 8 2 9588 83275 Selg gtu PSIZElSElSS OS Ss els AEAEE zE 2 2 23 8 S85 No Restrictionw SEE 25 ge 2e2 ZE B o a B8 pole 822 Soa 28 Lalex HRlsk amp S 2lels2 8 Ssle ES Sajo Z985 ecljoad 42 4 fag Snl P Sl LlISEl Hl SsEe 2 5 l s amp DR x Wi lo jaa lt olo zo SO 5 5 w Immediate No Rin Lines Pools Outgoin Incomin 1 4 1 1 4 1 4 1 6 Delayed g going No Access NRW NAV Ev NAV Av NAW AV NAW NAv P Vv y lines V pools Not Assigned only only NAV NAV NAV K am i l 22 23 24 l 25 l 26 27 28 E 29 l 30 I 31 32 i 33 I 1 Write S for Spanish or F for French 5 Write list number 1 4 Also Earp Phone Number Lists 404 Assignments 2 In Hybrid Mode only write K for Key extension Extension 10 always operates 6 Write list number 1 4 Also see Form D Allowed Phone Number Lists 407 v Default as a Key extension 7 Write group number 1 4 A Assigned or Active 3 In Key Mode use Line Assignment 301 to remove lines from or assign lines 8 Write group number 1 4 If a loudspeaker is connected and Simultane
102. 3 List 4 List 5 List 8 De s Coo 8 o e A o o OoOo o i of o OR oef oaf Oooo i def dool SS SS doef doef eof f C it a a a a OOo dol Cit CS CH Oooo y y doel oal CO TC Ct O for oe for or for o SS Oooo oo ol Joo Joo Cf Cf fo Co p e e e e e Allowed Phone Number Lists 407 Required only if Allowed List Assignment 408 is specified on Form B2 Write the telephone numbers that users can dial regardless of assigned restrictions 1 List 6 ntry Telephone Numbet Entry Telephone Numbef Entry Telephone Numbet Entry Telepnone Number Entry Telephone Numbet Oo o olo ClO N OF AJo Poy g o oQ olol ojo ca AJo Po 06 08 09 o g olg o o oO oo I X M oO lo ala alo x co J oO Oo oO Telephone Number can be up to 12 characters including 0 9 and Write for wildcard press Hold to program Lucent Technologies Bell labs Innovations Emergency Phone Number List 406 Write Emergency Phone Numbers that can be dialed from any phone that has access to an outside line regardless of assigned restrictions Person Place 1 Telephone Number can be up to 12 digits 0 9 2 Telephone Number can be up to 28 characters including 0 9 and special dialing functions You can have more than 10 External Hotlines Form D Number Lists KA Required if identifies External Hotlines For additional instructions see page 15 External Hotline 311 Required if
103. 4 42 75 43 76 EA A 7 45 78 46 79 47 80 49 82 50 83 51 84 HHE 53 86 54 87 55 88 56 89 57 90 58 91 H 60 93 61 94 62 95 63 96 H 64 A Eh a Sia STT TT C eje S 99 1 Valid entries are 0 9 write for wildcard press Hold to program Lucent Technologies O Bell Labs Innovations X Optional for PARTNER II System and PARTNER Plus System For additional instructions see page 16 To Dial On system phones press Feat 3 digit code On standard phones press 3 digit code while receiving intercom dial tone Name Company x Telephone Number Telephone Number Name Company 620 654 621 655 622 656 623 657 624 658 625 659 626 660 627 661 628 662 629 663 630 664 631 665 632 666 633 1 You can dial System Speed Dial numbers that are marked 2 Telephone number can be up to 28 digits including 0 9 x with at any time regardless of dialing restrictions placed on and special dialing functions see page 16 of instructions for your extension System Speed Dial numbers are programmed detailed information by the System Manager report problems and suggested revisions to your System Manager Case Studies Purpose This appendix contains two case studies based on actual customer requirements Each case study defines the call handling requirements of the busine
104. 400 modules to ensure consecutive extension numbering If the control unit is upgraded with more 206 or 400 modules the voice messaging system module should be removed the new modules should be installed and the voice messaging system module should be replaced in the first available slot after the 206 and 400 modules The VMS Hunt Group Extensions and Transfer Return Extensions must then be reprogrammed see Chapter 4 On the PARTNER Advanced Communications System you must install the voice messaging system module in the slot to the right of the PARTNER ACS module in the 2 slot carrier If your system has a 5 slot carrier you may install the voice messaging system module in any slot except the center slot see Push slowly but firmly in the center of the module until the module locks into place and is attached to the rear of the backplane Do not force the module If it does not insert easily remove the module clear any obstruction and reinsert it 2 2 Installation 3 Refer to Figure 2 1 or Figure 2 2 for your system then record the extensions associated with the PARTNER MAIL VS module on Form B1 of the System Planner for the communications system PARTNER Plus Control Unit or PARTNER II or PARTNER 48 PARTNER II or PARTNER 48 Primary Carrier Expansion Carrier If PARTNER MAIL VS 2 port Ls Installed In Slot Systems Then Assi ign These Exts To Hunt Group 7 20 21 26 27 32 33 38 39 44 45 50 51 56 57 If PART
105. 45 System Management Reinitializing a Mailbox 5 46 To prepare a previously used mailbox for a new subscriber you can reinitialize the mailbox This procedure deletes any messages left in the mailbox and turns off the phone s message light if lit erases the personal greeting if recorded changes the password back to the factory setting 1234 and changes the Mailbox Language back to either the System Language Monolingual Mode or the Primary Language Bilingual Mode To reinitialize a mailbox 1 Access the Programming Main Menu a Press intercom Z z z or the programmed VMMsggs button b Press 9 2 c Enter the Password and press d Press 2 The system plays the system programming options Press 4 to program mailboxes The system tells you how many mailboxes exist and how many are allowed then Pleas nter the mailbox number followed by or press for the next mailbox Enter the number of the mailbox you want to reinitialize followed by The system plays Mailbox XX exists To reinitialize the password press 3 To reinitialize the mailbox press 4 To administer Outcalling press 5 To program the Mailbox Language press 6 To delete press D If finished with this mailbox press or press for the next mailbox Press 4 The system plays Mailbox XX has YY new and ZZ old messages Do you want to reinitialize this mailbox Press 9 to confi
106. 5 Identify Auxiliary Equipment Attache i xtensi Contact Closure Group 612 Answering Machine Extra Alert Write in Other Equipment FAX Machine Extension 601 Doorphone 1 604 L Alert Extensions 606 for Doomhone 1 Alert Extensions 606 PARTNER MAIL PARTNER MAIL VS PassageWay Doorphone 2 F605 tor Doorphone 2 AA Extension 607 9 IMPORTANT A system display phone is required for programming at extension 10 or 11 Extension 10 typically is the receptionist s extension Extension 11 is recommended as a second programming extension typically the POS If checked see Form B1 Page 3 of 3 If there is a mix of PARTNER model and MLS model phones write P for PARTNER and M for MLS Write T for touch tone or R for rotary If Call Waiting is desired check next column Must be standard phone If immediate dialing is required use a dedicated line Do not assign restrictions that prevent dialing the outside number Forced Account Code Entry 307 or groups Also see Form D External Hotline 311 Standard phone is recommended Write extension number of corresponding alert extension or 70 for loudspeaker paging system in next column System Manager s extension 6 Also write Transfer Return Ext No 306 on this form usually extension 10 Also see Identify Group Assignments VMS Only 7 To prevent other
107. 8D phone at extension 10 Night Service Do Not Disturb Voice Mail Messages and Voice Mailbox Transfer The Night Service button allows the user to turn Night Service on and off When Night Service is off the Day Menu prompt plays When Night Service is on the Night Menu Prompt plays A subscriber can use the Do Not Disturb button to send callers to the general mailbox without ringing the extension first The Voice Mail Messages button allows the user to call Voice Mail Service with one touch The Voice Mailbox Transfer button allows the user to transfer callers directly to another subscriber s mailbox without ringing the extension first The second indicates the buttons programmed on the PARTNER 18 phones at extensions 11 12 13 14 and 15 Do Not Disturb Voice Mail Messages and Voice Mailbox Transfer Case Studies eee CS Form C7 MLS 12 Phone m indicates that a Voice Mailbox Transfer button is programmed on the MLS 12 phones at extensions 16 and 17 VMS Form 1 The default settings for Language Mode Monolingual and System Language U S English are used Subscriber Name In this column the names assigned to mailboxes 10 though 15 indicate that the clerk Sally Stan and the coaches have mailboxes Mailboxes 16 through 19 are marked for deletion For system security it is advisable to delete unused mailboxes a Outcalling Assigned Yes in this column indicates that Outcalling privileges are assi
108. Access Restriction 315 slg g 2E 2a amp 2 3 g SS 3 e e s 355 2 38 PSlZElZEISS SEa Sa 2 2148 8 82 S 2 5 2 ace No Restriction v 23 apla Z3 2s z Slo g S HESE Sols 2s E 2 822 22 22 22 25 Sh 25 s 25 3 S Zoo 5 2 52 R 58 38 86 EEJ Immediate i Lines Pools Outgoing Incoming No Access v 1 Ev NAv Av NA w Av NAw NAW Pv 7 V lines Not Assigned only NA 34 Oooo d T S S S ee EA AST A e A a Ey e E e E LET l se fT T a a T T S G S S S S f l af o TS T e S T T S S T S S S T B CE To e eE oe F A e e e e a T sa d CT TI TT E a T A S S A A l T 40 x AL a e a a o a ee d ee d a a aaf T TST T o a T T S G T S S S S i a3 a es d QO E l aaf S TT T a a eT G T S S S S 46 47 Oooo d S S y S S y y f i 48 OC T E E A e e 49 Oo o HA E d S E a l 50 po et 51 E E kE E E o A EE 52 f 53 m A GOO 54 m CGO 55 EE a eS Se Ae ee E a Sl 56 O E E e E e E a T a 57 ee Ee eee ee 4 Write S for Spanish or F for French 5 Write 1 4 number 1 4 Also seelEorm JDisalowed Phone Number Lists 404 re a 2 In Hybrid Mode only write K for Key extension l Ea ore rebates see Form D Allowed Phone Number Lists 407 A Assigned or Active 3 nd sat te ieee eae LTA E lines 8 Write group number 1 4 if a loudspeaker is connected and Simultaneous Paging is desired NA Ne iied or Not Active remove pools from or assign pools to extensions put appropriate extensions in Calling Group 1 Also see Form C Simultaneous Paging
109. C Simultaneous Paging ia a or Active Write IN for Inside Only or LOC for Local Only to indicate restrictions for all 8 Write group number 1 6 T l outgoing calls on all iras 9 Check off the same PARTNER MAIL or PARTNER MAIL VS extensions indicated on NE z Nor oe fi Not Active Write list number 1 8 Also see Form D Disallowed Phone Number Lists z CTP Centralized Telephone Programming Lucent Technologies Bell Labs Innovations S Template Instructions e If desired write in line number dial code feature or auto dial number e If desired write in Line Ringing Imm Del or No from e If desired write in Line Access Restriction Out In or No from Form B2 ee i I i lt S 0 o0 000 00 00 IMM MM MM ogo 2 oo zig i Sle Ww Intercom Intercom Ext i Specify Automatic Line Selection Identify extensions programmed as shown 10 Form C3 PARTNER 18 18D Phone PAGE Voice Mailbox Transfer F 14 F Feature button G Group I Left Intercom button XX Extension 3of8 Make as many copies as you need Use template and or checklist For additional instructions see pages 8 through 13 Check Desired Features Also write in extension or group number SAMPLE V Night Service Button 503 NightSvc og Outgoing Call Restriction Button 114 OCR
110. Data prompt press 1 0 4 Press Next Item or Prev Item until the next PARTNER MAIL VS extension number specified on displays 5 Atthe Data prompt press 1 2a 6 If additional PARTNER MAIL VS extensions are specified on repeat Steps 4 and 5 for each one 7 Press Feature 0 0 to exit programming 8 Continue with the next section for information about programming the voice messaging system Outgoing Call Restriction Use this procedure to restrict all extensions associated with the voice mail system unit from making outside calls Outgoing call restriction is strongly recommended in particular to protect system security when Outcalling privileges are assigned to subscribers on Form 2 1 Press 4 o z 2 Atthe Extension prompt enter the first PARTNER MAIL VS extension number specified on 3 Press Next Data until the display reads 2 Inside Only 4 Press Next Item or Prev item until the next PARTNER MAIL VS extension number specified on displays 5 Press Next Data until the appropriate value displays 6 Repeat Steps 4 and 5 for each PARTNER MAIL VS extension In some countries the procedure code for Transfer Return Extension is 309 Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system 4 4 Initial sdcslol etulialie 7 Press Feature 0 0 to exit programming 8 Refer to the next section for information about progr
111. Do Not Disturb button can be used to prevent calls for the extensions from audibly alerting lights still flash Subscribers with communications system 4 0 or later who have VMS Extension Coverage either automatic or manual can use this communications system feature when they want calls sent to their mailboxes immediately Line Coverage Line Coverage lets callers who call in on a covered line leave messages in the mailbox of a specific subscriber known as the owner of the covered line When a call comes in on a covered line the system routes the caller directly to the line owner s mailbox if the call is not answered The caller has the option of leaving a message or transferring to another extension VMS Cover Rings 117 is not available on all systems Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system 1 12 Overview Line ownership typically is assigned to personal lines or to lines to be used for outside access to the voice messaging system when Automated Attendant Service is not used Lines in the system can be assigned either Line Coverage or Automated Attendant Service coverage a single line cannot be assigned both types of coverage Voice Mailbox Transfer A Voice Mailbox Transfer button can be programmed on a user s phone to transfer callers directly to a subscribers mailbox without ringing the extension first This feature is useful when a user is handling calls for a subscriber who is not at his
112. ER MAIL VS PARTNER MAIL MLS 34D MLS 18D MLS 12D MLS 12 MLS 6 MLC 6 MDC 9000 MDW 9000 MDW 9010 and MDW 9030P are registered trademarks of Lucent Technologies in the U S and other countries Ordering Information Call Lucent Technologies Publications Center Voice 1 800 457 1235 International Voice 317 361 5353 Fax 1 800 457 1764 International Fax 317 361 5355 Write Lucent Technologies Publications Center P O Box 4100 Crawfordsville IN 47933 Order Document No 585 322 521 Issue 1 March 1997 Comcode 107970212 Support Telephone Number In the continental U S Lucent Technologies provides a toll free customer helpline 24 hours a day Call the Lucent Technologies Helpline at 1 800 628 2888 or your Lucent Technologies authorized dealer if you need assistance when installing programming or using your system Consultation charges may apply Outside the continental U S contact your local Lucent Technologies authorized representative Lucent Technologies Fraud Intervention If you suspect you are being victimized by toll fraud and you need technical support or assistance call Technical Service Center Toll Fraud Intervention Hotline at 1 800 643 2353 WWW Home Page The WWW home page for Lucent Technologies is www ucent com Important Safety Instructions A WARNING The following list provides basic safety precautions that should always be followed when using the system 1 2 3 10 Read and understand all instru
113. FER TO DIRECT EXTENSION TRANSFER BILINGUAL MODE PRESS _7 for Day Menu PRESS 6 to modify ENTER a Selector Code 1 through 9 PRESS 9 to modify PRESS 5 for Direct Extension Transfer To program another Selector Code for Direct Extension Transfer repeat PRESS Lx to approve PRESS _1 to record the Day Menu Prompt in the Primary Language PRESS 1 after recording PRESS x L to approve PRESS 2 to record the Day Menu Prompt in the Secondary Language PRESS 1 after recording PRESS x L to approve PRESS 4 to approve all changes TO RETURN TO THE PROGRAMMING MAIN MENU PRESS x Z TO EXIT PROGRAMMING PRESS x Le 9 Automated Attendant REFER to Forms and 5A PRESS 3 to program Automated Attendant Service TO CHANGE SELECTOR CODE TRANSFER TO ANNOUNCEMENT BILINGUAL MODE PRESS 1 for Day Menu PRESS 6 to modify ENTER a Selector Code 1 through 9 PRESS 9 to modify PRESS 3 for Announcement ENTER an Announcement number PRESS 1 to record the Announcement in the Primary Language PRESS 1 after recording PRESS x to approve PRESS 2 to record the Announcement in the Secondary Language PRESS 1 after recording PRESS x L to approve the Announcements PRESS x L to continue without programming another Selector Code or PRESS x L to program another Selector Code repeat PRESS _1 to record the Day Menu Prompt in the Primary Langua
114. For example If you know the extension To record the Night Menu Prompt dial 3 from the of the person you want to reach dial it now and leave a Programming Main Menu message If callers can dial a single digit to transfer to an extension or group Selector Code Transfer the prompt should provide instructions such as To leave a message for Pat press 6 Keep in mind that there are no group mailboxes Form 6 Line Ownership Required if VMS Line Coverage exists for one or more lines O Line Telephone Number Line Owner Subscriber Name Mailbox General Information m Lines in the system are assigned either ownership or Automated Attendant Service coverage a single line cannot be assigned both types of coverage m Note that more than one line may be assigned to the same mailbox but a single line cannot be assigned to more than one mailbox m Lines that are assigned ownership typically are used for personal lines or outside access to the voice messaging system if Automated Attendant Service is not used If the company has users who need to access mailboxes when no one is around to transfer them to their mailboxes you can set up the system as follows Assign extension 10 as owner of the covered lines Instruct users to press Z when they hear the personal greeting from extension 10 m See the communications system planning forms to determine line numbers telephone number
115. Hunt Delay is set to Immediate use this procedure to prevent users from accidentally picking up calls sent to the voice messaging system Update Form B1 of the System Planner for the communications system to show Automatic Extension Privacy 304 as Assigned for the PARTNER MAIL VS extensions To change the Automatic Extension Privacy setting 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program Enter the System Password if required Press 3 o 4 Enter the first PARTNER MAIL VS extension number specified on Press Next Data until the display reads 1 Assigned ip O i 6 Press Next item Or Prev Item until the next PARTNER MAIL VS extension number specified on displays 7 Press Next Data until the display reads 1 Assigned 8 If additional PARTNER MAIL VS extensions are specified on repeat Steps 6 and 7 for each one 9 Press Feature 0 o to exit programming VMS Hunt Schedule Use this communications system procedure to specify when the communications system is to route calls to the voice messaging system Update Form A Page 2 of the System Planner for the communications system to show modifications to the VMS Hunt Schedule setting before you begin To change the VMS Hunt Schedule setting Press Feature o o System Program System Program Enter the System Password if required Press 5 0 Zz Press Ne
116. List to the extensions 1 Press 4 o 8 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed Enter the list number 1 4 To assign the list press Next Data until the display reads 1 Assigned To save the number in memory you must press Enter O oa A UO P To program another extension press Next Procedure Prev Procedure and repeat from Step 2 7 Continue with the next section Call Answer Service 4 23 Initial Programming Call Answer Service Before you begin locate Forms A and B2 of the System Planner for the communications system Refer to Form A Page 1 Line Coverage If either check marks or extension numbers appear in the VMS Mail column use Line Coverage on the next page to program personal lines for Call Answer Service If nothing is specified in the VMS Mail column of Form A refer to to see if Automatic VMS Cover is assigned to any extensions If it is refer to Automatic VMS Cover and VMS Cover Rings later in this chapter a f neither VMS Mail for personal lines or Automatic VMS Cover is specified skip to Telephone Button Programming Line Coverage Refer to Form A Page 1 Line Coverage VMS Mail f check marks appear for any lines in this column use the procedure in VMS Line Coverage below a f extension numbers are specified for any lines in this column use the procedure in Line Coverage Extension be
117. Lucent Technologies Bell Labs Innovations PARTNER MAIL VS Voice Messaging System Release 4 Installation and Programming 585 322 521 Comcode 107970212 Issue 1 March 1997 Copyright 1997 Lucent Technologies 585 322 521 All Rights Reserved Comcode 107970212 Printed in USA Issue 1 March 1997 Notice Every effort was made to ensure that the information in this book was complete and accurate at the time of printing However information is subject to change Your Responsibility for Your System s Security Toll fraud is the unauthorized use of your telecommunications system by an unauthorized party for example persons other than your company s employees agents subcontractors or persons working on your company s behalf Note that there may be a risk of toll fraud associated with your telecommunications system and if toll fraud occurs it can result in substantial additional charges for your telecommunications services You and your System Manager are responsible for the security of your system such as programming and configuring your equipment to prevent unauthorized use The System Manager is also responsible for reading all installation instruction and system administration documents provided with this product in order to fully understand the features that can introduce risk of toll fraud and the steps that can be taken to reduce that risk Lucent Technologies does not warrant that this product is immune from or
118. MBox F Feature button G Group I Left Intercom button XX Extension Lucent Technologies PAGE Beli Labs Imovaions Form C3 PARTNER 18 18D Phone 3 of 8 Make as many copies as you need Use template and or checklist For additional instructions see pages 8 through 13 Check Desired Features Also write in extension or group number SAMPLE Template Instructions e f desired write in line number dial code feature or auto dial number e If desired write in Line Ringing Imm Del or No from e f desired write in Line Access Restriction Out In or No from Form B2 PARTNER 18D only Specify Automatic Line Selection Identify extensions programmed as shown 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Night Service Button 503 NightSvc Outgoing Call Restriction Button 114 OCR Wake Up Service Button 115 Wake Caller ID Inspect F 17 Caller ID Name Display F 16 Do Not Disturb F 01 Privacy F 07 pannbay C31 Account Code Entry F 12 Background Music F 19 Call Forwarding Call Follow Me F 11 XX XX CF XX XX Call Park I XX 1 Requires f Auto Dial Call Pickup I 6 XX g button for Conference Drop F 06 each 7 extension Contact Closure 1 F 41 2 Button with Contact Closure 2 F 42 lights is ina Pj vali recom Direct Line Pickup Active Line I 68 mended but Direct Line Pickup Idle Line
119. Main Menu Form 4A Day Menu Prompt Secondary Language ee Required for Bilingual Mode only if VMS Hunt Schedule is set to Day Only or Always Thank you for calling Software Mexico If you know the extension number dial it now If not please wait and the attendant will answer your call For Customer Service press 4 For Billing press 5 General Information The Day Menu Prompt plays to callers when the VMS Hunt Schedule is set to Day Only or Always and Night Service is off The Day Menu Prompt and the Night Menu Prompt use the same Menu Definition m The Day Menu Prompt should contain a welcome and a list of menu options m The welcome should introduce the company For example Thank you for calling the Any Travel Agency Let callers know they can switch back to the Primary Language For example For English press 1 m The menu options should contain instructions that correspond to the Menu Definition set up on If callers can dial extension numbers Direct Extension Transfer the prompt should instruct callers to dial the extension number For example If you know the extension of the person you want to reach dial it now If callers can dial a single digit to transfer to an extension or group Selector Code Transfer the prompt should provide instructions such as To speak to someone in sales press 6 If callers can can choose an Announcement include that information
120. NER MAIL VS 4 port ls Installed In Slot Systems Then Assign These 18 19 24 25 130 31 136 37 42 43 48 49 1 54 55 Exts To Hunt Group 7 20 21 26 2732 33 38 39 44 45 50 51 56 57 Figure 2 1 Voice Messaging System Extensions for PARTNER Plus PARTNER II and PARTNER 48 Installation 2 Slot Carrier 5 Slot Carrier ACS ACS Processor Processor Module Module OE Line fa Jacks ey Line a Jacks a H 5 a z am E K G Wl ay Cl lt i lt E Ld m Bue REl zE xtension By a Jacks H EC PARTNER MAILVS 5 If PARTNER MAIL VS 2 port Is Installed In Slot 2 port Is Installed In Slot Systems Then Assign These 22 23 Systems Then Assign These Exts To Hunt Group 7 If PARTNER MAIL VS 4 port Is Installed In Slot Exts To Hunt Group 7 If PARTNER MAIL VS 4 port Is Installed In Slot Systems Then Assign These Exts To Hunt Group 7 22 23128 Systems Then Assign These Exts To Hunt Group 7 22 23 P6 27 182 33 B8 39 29134 35 40 41 Figure 2 2 Sample Voice Messaging System Extensions for PARTNER Advanced Communications Systems 2 4 Installation Reserved for Future Use RS 232 Port Factory Use Only Power Indicator Green LED Test Yellow LED Status Red LED Hard Disk Drive Green LED Figure 2 3 Installing the Mailbox Expansion Card 4 To install the Mailbox Expansion Card insert the
121. NR No Restriction 4 Write IN for Inside Only or LOC for Local Only to indicate restrictions for all 9 Write group number 1 6 Pooled outgoing calls on all fines 10 Check off the same PARTNER MAIL or PARTNER MAIL VS extensions indicated on Form B1 P CTP Centralized Telephone Programming Lucent Technologies Bell Labs Innovations S Template Instructions e f desired write in line number pool access code dial code feature or auto dial number e If desired write in Line Ringing Imm Del or No from Form B2 e If desired write in Line Access Restriction or Pool Access Restriction Out In or No from Form B2 Intercom Intercom Cc iol _d g For PARTNER II systems in Hybrid mode only if pool 880 is assigned these two buttons are associated with this pool Specify Automatic Line Selection Form C1 PARTNER 34D Phone Make as many copies as you need Use template and or checklist For additional instructions see page 8 SAMPLE Identify extensions programmed as shown Check Desired Features Also write in extension or group number E Night Service Button 503 NightSvc Outgoing Call Restriction Button 114 Wake Up Service Button 115 Caller ID Inspect F 17 ID Inspect Caller ID Name Display F 16 ID Name Do Not Disturb F 01 DND Privacy F 07 Priv A VMS Cover F 15 VMSCover Voice Interrupt on Bu
122. Only or Night Only as specified on Form A Page 2 1 Press 5 o z 2 Press Next Data until the appropriate value displays 3 Continue with Night Service Button below 4 20 Initial Fiogramming Night Service Check Form C for extension 10 If a Night Service button is specified follow the procedure below To program Night Service on a button with lights at extension 10 as specified on 1 Press 5 2 3 2 At this point do one of the following lf you want to assign Night Service to the first available button on the system phone press Next Data until the display reads Night Service 1 Assigned Ext10 Go to Step 3 If you want to assign Night Service to a specific button press 3 The display reads Night Service 3 Select Button Press the desired programmable button with lights to assign Night Service to that button 3 Label the Night Service button at extension 10 4 Continue with Music On Hold below Music On Hold If desired program Music On Hold See the Programming and Use guide for the communications system for instructions Continue with the next section Disallowed Phone Numbers Select button option 3 is not available on all systems Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system 4 21 Initial Programming Disallowed Phone Numbers If Outcalling is permitted a Disallowed Phone Number List 404 can be
123. PARTNER MAIL VS for instructions on recording a personal greeting changing a password forwarding a message specifying a telephone or pager number and schedule for Outcalling and performing other Voice Mail Service procedures Voice Mail Service also allows the System Manager to program the voice messaging system See Voice Messaging System Programming in Chapter 3 for more information 1 13 Overview When subscribers call into the Voice Mail Service they hear this factory set prompt in either the System Language Monolingual Mode or the Primary and Secondary Language Bilingual Mode Welcome to PARTNER MAIL VS Pleas nter extension and Otherwise to access PARTNER Tutor press 4 The System Manager can change on a per mailbox basis the language subscribers hear after they access their mailboxes The Mailbox Language is used for voice prompts for recording a personal greeting retrieving messages and other Voice Mail services The Mailbox Language can be different from the System Language selected in Monolingual Mode or the Primary and Secondary Languages selected in Bilingual Mode Mailboxes The voice messaging system provides a predetermined number of mailboxes which are assigned to extensions in order beginning with extension 10 For example the system may have 10 default mailboxes for extensions 10 through 19 If a Mailbox Expansion Card is installed the number of default mailboxes is increased
124. Primary Language Press 2 to record the Night Menu Prompt in the Secondary Language Record the prompt after the beep Press 1 when you are finished recording Choose an option or skip this step Press 2 1 to immediately re record this Night Menu Prompt Begin recording immediately after the beep press 1 after recording Repeat if desired Press 2 3 to play back this Night Menu Prompt Press x 3 to delete this Night Menu Prompt The system plays Deleted To record Primary Language prompt press 1 To record Secondary Language prompt press 2 To save any recordings press Return to Step 5 Press x to approve this Night Menu Prompt The system plays Approved To record the Night Menu Prompt in the other language repeat Steps 5 through 9 Press to approve all changes The new Night Menu Prompts now take effect Press x z to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit System Management mm Group Call Distribution Use this communications system procedure to specify a new outside line on which you want Automated Attendant Service Update Line Coverage on Form A Page 1jof the System Planner for the communications system to show modifications to VMS AA lines before you begin To assign VMS AA lines to Hunt Group 7 1 Press Feature o 0 System Program System Program 2 Enter the System Password if requi
125. Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit Modifying the Night Menu Prompt Update Form 5 for the voice messaging system to show modifications to the Night Menu Prompt then use the updated form while performing the following procedure 5 26 To change the Night Menu Prompt 1 Access the Programming Main Menu a Press intercom z z z or the programmed VMMsgs button b Press 9 2 c Enter the Password and press d Press 9 The system plays the system programming options Press 3 for Automated Attendant The system plays To program the Day Menu press 1 For the Night Menu press 2 If finished press Press 2 The system plays To play the menu press 2 to modify the menu press 6 If finished press Press 6 The system plays To record a new prompt for this menu press 1 To use the existing prompt press Lift the handset press 1 and record the Night Menu Prompt System Management Press 1 when you are finished recording Choose an option or skip this step Press 2 1 to immediately re record the Night Menu Prompt Begin recording immediately after the beep press 1 after recording Repeat if desired Press 2 3 to play back the Night Menu Prompt Press x 3 to delete the Night Menu Prompt The system plays Deleted To record a new prompt for this menu press 1 To use the existing prompt press Ret
126. Spanish the Primary Language When Night Service is off and a call goes to the Automated Attendant Service the caller hears the prompt on Form 4 in English the Secondary Language when he or she presses x 1 When Night Service is on and a call goes to the Automated Attendant Service the caller hears the prompt on Form 5 in Spanish the Primary Language a When Night Service is on and a call goes to the Automated Attendant Service the caller hears the prompt on Form 5 in English the Secondary Language when he or she presses x 2 Post Installation Recommendations a Since callers can leave a message in the mailbox at extension 10 Vera should record a general business greeting for this extension in both Spanish and English The greetings should instruct callers to press 1 to switch to the other language All employees should record a personal greeting in both Spanish and English The greetings should instruct callers to press 1 to switch to the other language In addition employees change the factory set password for their mailboxes F 25 Case Studies Lucent Technologies Bell Labs Innovations x 1 Customer Billing Name Enia Software M xico Form A Required for PARTNER II System and PARTNER Plus System For additional instructions see page 2 2 Installation Address zd Juarez 7 3 Contact Name Vera Gonzalez one 52 555 1234 4 Person to be Train
127. Stan will once again be offering his Killer Serve Clinic on the 19th And our own tennis Land team will be traveling to mayberry for an exhibition match Be sure to sign up at the Main Desk for these exciting events For more information press 0 now General Information Completing this Form After the Announcement plays you can program the system to Write the Announcement and its number in the space provided hang up or to offer callers the option of pressing 4 to repeat this Announcement 7 to return to the Main Menu 8 to Recording the Announcement s transfer to an extension or 0 EE E ee m To record the Announcement dial 3 from the Programming m If the system is set for Bilingual Mode let callers know they can Main Menu switch the language they hear while listening to the Announcement For example Para espa ol marque 1 m Announcements can supply frequently requested information so that your staff is free to assist customers or to perform other tasks more efficiently m An Announcement can be up to four minutes long Form 4 Day Menu Prompt System Language or Primary Language I ee Required if VMS Hunt Schedule is set to Day Only or Always Thank you for calling Tennis Land lf you know the extension of the person you want to reach dial it now To speak to someone in the shop press 4 To get information about our location and hours press 5 To get information about tourn
128. System Program Central Tel Program Enter the number of the extension to be programmed Press a programmable button with lights Press Feature 0 1 Program another button for this extension or press Feature a a to exit programming mode Label the button at the user s extension Voice Mailbox Transfer A Voice Mailbox Transfer button lets any system user transfer calls directly to another subscriber s mailbox without ringing the extension If for example a caller wants to talk to a subscriber who is on vacation the receptionist can transfer the call directly to the subscriber s mailbox by pressing this button and entering the subscriber s extension number or pressing an Auto Dial button The voice messaging system answers the call the caller hears the subscriber s personal greeting if recorded and the caller can then leave a message for the subscriber To program a Voice Mailbox Transfer button 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program Central Tel Program 2 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed 3 4 5 Press a programmable button Press Feature 1 4 Program another button for this extension or press Feature o a to exit programming mode Label the button at the user s extension In some countries the feature code for Voice Mailbox Transfer is 1 5 Check the Programming and Use guide for the communicati
129. TNER II or PARTNER 48 use an extension number from 11 57 To mark an unused mailbox for deletion without assigning an extension cross out the factory default subscriber Name For every mailbox in use write the name of the mailbox subscriber Mailbox Language For each mailbox that requires a language different from the System Language or Primary Language indicated on Form 1 write the name of the language in this space Supported languages are listed on Form 1 Outcalling Assigned For each mailbox in use indicate whether Outcalling is assigned Programming Mailboxes You can change a mailbox assignment by deleting an existing mailbox and creating a new one m To program mailboxes dial 4 from the Programming Main menu Form 3 Menu Definition Required for Automated Attendant Service Q Description Selector Range of Extensions Ext or Group for Code for Direct Extension Selector Code Transfer Transfer or Announcement ooo a e l oo oe e o o e General Information Factory defaults are identified by the Y symbol m This Menu Definition applies to both the Day and Night Menu prompts m The Selector Code is the first digit dialed by the caller in response to the menu prompts m In Direct Extension Transfer Selector Codes 1 5 and 7 represent the first digit for a range of extensions These Selector Codes let callers dial extension numbers directly m n Selector Code Transfer Sele
130. a Ext 1 O 2 a Ola 2 0 Zgleda o e 2 5 2156 2 55 2 06 Other Ext No Slelticl elel el 5 T g wlwl S 3 5 899 S z Jack pH sie s sis 815 38 5 s s al SS 2 2 5 ES S Su 8 ea Sie Bl Egui t 306 inti 15 8 3 5 35 5 2 e S s Ee 2 W 5 E E S o a 5 2 2 eA eS ly 2 Equpmen No Write Name Description 13 a 8 a a a o 3 2 S S St S S 3 S o 8 2 4 85S 8 esls s Sl 2 2 8 8 2 3 3 8 5 225 c e e s esac a lt s poe se I 10 i mH ER HH ha 1 Pt n T T T o O o J T O HH i 12 E ERR Bee eee 13 ERR Eee eee 14 ERR Bee eee 15 E ERR Bee eee 16 E ERR Bee eee 17 peel CSCS ee TT T 18 O Jr E a 19 ERE 0 T J i mo 20 O S a T y 21 ERE fee le See See ee ed 22 ERE ae ee ae ee 2 E Ea aS hares ae IMPORTANT A system display phone is required for programming at extension 10 or 11 Extension 10 typically is the receptionist s extension Extension 11 is recommended as a second programming extension typically the System Manager s extension 1 If checked see Form B1 Page 3 of 3 6 Also write Transfer Return Ext No 306 on this form usually extension 10 Also see Form B2 Identify 2 If there is a mix of PARTNER model and MLS model phones write P for PARTNER and M for MLS Group Assignments VMS Only 3 Write T for touch tone or R for rotary If Call Waiting is desired check next column 4 7 To
131. a personal message for Ms Smith dial x 8 3 32 In this example 33 represents the 2 digit extension number of the guest mailbox Remind the receptionist to log in to the guest mailbox regularly to check for messages since the guest mailbox does not have an associated phone with a message waiting light If Automatic VMS Cover is not assigned to extension 10 you should program a VMS Cover button and a Do Not Disturb button on the system phone at extension 10 Then instruct the receptionist to press both the VMS Cover and Do Not Disturb buttons to turn the features on whenever the receptionist leaves the desk or leaves for the day This ensures that any calls routed to extension 10 when the receptionist is away are immediately covered by the voice messaging system If the receptionist has Automatic VMS Cover program only the Do Not Disturb button at the extension If selector code 9 on the Automated Attendant Service menu is left at the factory setting which is highly recommended callers can be routed directly to the receptionists mailbox to leave a message If this is the case let the receptionist know that he or she should review the messages each morning and distribute them to the appropriate people STU Management Group Calling Tips It is important to note that voice mail coverage is not provided for group calls If your system is set up for group transfer be sure that the receptionist is aware of the following items
132. age press 6 If finished press At this point do one of the following To change the Primary Language go to Step 5 of Modifying the Primary Language Press x z to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit 5 13 System Management Modifying the Primary Language Update Form 1 for the voice messaging system to show the change in the Primary Language selected for Bilingual Mode When you change the Primary Language the system uses any recorded messages already associated with the new Primary Language After changing the Primary Language listen to the Automated Attendant Service Day and Night Menu Prompts to make sure they are still relevant re record them if necessary gt NOTE When you change the Primary Language the Mailbox Language for any mailboxes that were left at the factory setting also change to reflect the new Primary Language Any mailboxes that were assigned a different language do not change To change the Primary Language 1 Access the Programming Main Menu a Press Intercom z z z or the programmed VMMsgs button b Press 9 2 c Enter the Password and press d Press 9 The system plays the system programming options Press 1 for Language The system plays To program Language Mode press 1 To program System Language press 2 If finished press Press 2 for System Language The system plays To p
133. age you selected A written explanation of Lucent Technologies types of maintenance coverage may be obtained from Lucent Technologies by calling 1 800 247 7000 in the continental U S only If you purchased your system from a Lucent Technologies Authorized Dealer contact your reseller for the details of the maintenance plan applicable to your system This Lucent Technologies limited warranty covers damage to the system caused by power surges Unless otherwise expressly agreed to in a written agreement signed by Lucent Technologies Lucent Technologies will not be responsible under this limited warranty for damages resulting from Failure to follow Lucent Technologies installation operation or maintenance instructions Unauthorized system modification movement or alteration Unauthorized use of common carrier communication services accessed through the system m Abuse misuse or negligent acts or omissions of the customer and persons under the customer s control or Act of third parties and acts of God C 3 Warranty Information LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES OBLIGATION TO REPAIR REPLACE OR REFUND AS SET FORTH ABOVE IS YOUR EXCLUSIVE REMEDY EXCEPT AS SPECIFICALLY SET FORTH ABOVE LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES ITS AFFILIATES SUPPLIERS AND DEALERS MAKE NO WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM ANY WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Limitation of Liability Except
134. age prompt The system plays the Day or Night Menu Prompt depending on your choice in Step 3 in either the Primary or Secondary Language depending on your choice in Step 6 Repeat Step 6 to play the Day or Night Menu Prompt in the other language Press x Zz to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit Svat Managemen Modifying the Menu Definition Day Menu Prompts and Announcements Update Forms B and 4A for the voice messaging system to show modifications to the Menu Definition and or Day Menu Prompts update forms 3 3A and for the voice messaging system to show modifications to the Automated Attendant Announcements Then use the updated forms while performing the following procedure A CAUTION It is important to understand that you must approve each element that is the Menu Definition the Day Menu Prompt and any Announcements as well as save all of these entries in Step 21 If you exit at any point before saving your approved entries your entries will be lost This procedure is designed to ensure that callers do not hear the incomplete menu while you are in the process of modifying it To change the Menu Definition Day Menu Prompts and Announcements 1 Access the Programming Main Menu a Press intercom Z Z Z or the programmed VMMsgs button b Press 9 9 c Enter the Password and press d Press 9 The system plays the system programming options 2 Press
135. ake to protect system security and explain how hackers may try to gain access to the system In particular you should provide users with the following information All reports of trouble requests to move extensions or any other administrative details associated with the communications system or the voice mail system should be handled by one person the System Manager or within one department Anyone claiming to be a telephone company representative should be referred to this person or department a If a caller claims to be an authorized telephone company representative verify his or her identity before permitting that person any access to the system Establish well controlled policies for passwords Establish a specific date for changing passwords for example the first of each month and help users remember to do it Advise subscribers to use a 4 digit password Tell users that passwords should not be recycled They should be hard to guess and should not contain all the same numbers for example 4444 a sequential characters for example 1234 personal information that can be associated with them such as their name birthdate telephone number or social security number Discourage the practice of writing down passwords If a password needs to be written down keep it in a secure place and never discard it while it is still active Tell users never to program passwords onto Auto Dial buttons D
136. aller to dial the corresponding Selector Code to transfer to the extension announcement or group identified in below Ext or Group for Selector Code Transfer Write the extension announcement or group number to receive the transfer For Announcement Description Write Announcement Range of Extensions for Direct Extension Transfer Cross out the factory default if you want the caller to dial the corresponding Selector Code to hear the Announcement identified in below Announcement Write the Announcement number 1 or 2 Form 4 Day Menu Prompt System Language or Primary Language 0 Es 8283 3 i i lt i lt S lt S w lt lt CS s C C OT L LhLhLh hh hhh Required if VMS Hunt Schedule is set to Day Only or Always Gracias por llamar a Software Mexico For English press star one Si usted tiene tel fono de tonos y conoce el numero de extensi n a la que desea llamar marquelo ahora De lo contrario espere a ser atendido por nuestra operadora Para servicios al cliente marque cuatro para informacion de facturacion marque cinco General Information The Day Menu Prompt plays to callers when the VMS Hunt Schedule is set to Day Only or Always and Night Service is off The Day Menu Prompt and the Night Menu Prompt use the same Menu Definition m The Day Menu Prompt should contain a welcome and a list of menu options m The we
137. aments and special events press 6 lf you would like to hear this message again press 4 lf you require assistance please stay on the line General Information The Day Menu Prompt plays to callers when the VMS Hunt Schedule is set to Day Only or Always and Night Service is off The Day Menu Prompt and the Night Menu Prompt use the same Menu Definition m The Day Menu Prompt should contain a welcome and a list of menu options m The welcome should introduce the company For example Thank you for calling the Any Travel Agency m lf the system is set for Bilingual Mode let callers know they can switch the language they hear while on the call For example Para espanol marque 1 m The menu options should contain instructions that correspond to the Menu Definition set up on Form 3 If callers can dial extension numbers Direct Extension Transfer the prompt should instruct callers to dial the extension number For example If you know the extension of the person you want to reach dial it now If callers can dial a single digit to transfer to an extension or group Selector Code Transfer the prompt should provide instructions such as To speak to someone in sales press 6 If callers can can choose an Announcement include that information For example For directions to our office press 4 It is recommended that you keep the number of menu options to 5 or less to avoid co
138. amming the voice messaging system gt NOTE If Outcalling is permitted be sure to create Allowed and Disallowed Phone Lists as needed for Outcalling numbers See Disallowed Phone Numbers and Allowed Phone Numbers later in this chapter for instructions Initial Programming Voice Messaging System Programming Language Before you begin locate Form 1 for the voice messaging system Check to see if any of the Language settings are changed from the factory defaults f none of the Language settings is changed skip to Automated Attendant Service and follow the instructions for Monolingual Mode f any of the Language settings are changed follow the appropriate procedure for either Monolingual Mode or Bilingual Mode Monolingual Mode To change the System Language as specified on 1 If necessary access the Programming Main Menu If you are already at the Programming Main Menu skip to Step 2 a Press Intercom Z z z or the programmed VMMsgs button b Press 9 9 c Enter the Mailbox Password and press d Press 9 Press 1 for Language Press 2 for System Language Press 6 to modify System Language a fF WO PY Enter the number corresponding to the System Language specified on Press 9 to confirm your selection O 7 Press x z to return to the Programming Main Menu 8 Continue with the section Automated Attendant Service
139. andling or Delayed Call Handling See also and VMS Hunt Group Hunt Group 7 reserved by the communications system to identify extensions associated with the voice messaging system hardware See also VMS Hunt Delay and VMS Hunt Schedule GL 4 VMS Hunt Schedule A communications system feature that allows you to set the communications system to route outside calls to the Automated Attendant Service always only when the Night Service button at the receptionists extension is on or only when the Night Service button is off VMS Line Coverage A voice messaging system feature that lets the System Manager associate a personal line with a specific subscriber s mailbox for voice mail coverage See also Group Call Distribution and Line Ownership Voice Mail Service A component of the voice messaging system that allows subscribers to listen to and delete messages record personal greetings and change their passwords It also allows the System Manager to program the voice messaging system Voice Mailbox See Mailbox Voice Mailbox Transfer button A button on a system phone that enables the user to transfer a call directly to a subscriber s mailbox Voice messaging system VMS An optional device that automates call handling answers calls and routes them to caller designated extension permits callers to leave messages at unanswered extensions and allows subscribers to retrieve their messages See also Automated Attendant Service b
140. andset press 1 and record the Menu Prompt from Press 1 after recording Press 1 after recording Choose an option or skip this step Press 2 1 to immediately re record this Menu Prompt Begin recording immediately after the beep press 1 after recording Repeat if desired Press 2 3 to play back this Menu Prompt Press x 3 to delete this Menu Prompt and return to Step 13 to be prompted for re recording Press x to approve this Day Menu Prompt If you want to record the Day Menu Prompt or Announcement in the Secondary Language continue with Step 18 otherwise skip to Step 21 Press 2 and record the Menu Prompt from Form 4A or Announcement from Press 1 after recording Choose an option or skip this step Press 2 1 to immediately re record this Menu Prompt or Announcement Begin recording immediately after the beep press 1 after recording Repeat if desired Press 2 3 to play back this Menu Prompt or Announcement Press x 3 to delete this Menu Prompt or Announcement and return to Step 18 to be prompted for re recording Press x to approve this Day Menu Prompt or Announcement Press to approve and save all entries The Menu Definition Day Menu Prompts and Announcements if any now take effect Initial Programming 23 Press x z to return to the Programming Main Menu 24 Continue with Night Menu Prom
141. anguage REFER to VMS Form 1 to see if a different Secondary Language is specified If so modify the Secondary Language In some countries the procedure code for Transfer Return Extension is 309 Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system Programming Flowchart Program the Menu Definition and Day Menu Prompt REFER to VMS Form 3 Column C to determine if Selector Code Transfer or Announcement is used Program the appropriate extension announcement or group numbers for Selector Code Transfer as specified on Form 3 Column C Monolingual Bilingual Record the Announcement s as specified on Form 3A If the system is set for Bilingual Mode also record the Announcement s in the Secondar Language as specified on Monolingual Bilingual No REFER to VMS Form 4 to determine if Yes _ Record the Day Menu Prompt as a Day Menu Prompt is used gt specified on Form 4 the system is set for Bilingual Mode also record the Day Menu Prompt in the Secondar Language as specified on Monolingual Bilingual No REFER to VMS Form 5 to determine if Yes a Night Menu Prompt is used Record the Night Menu Prompt as specified on Form 5 If the system is set for Bilingual Mode also record the Night Menu Prompt in the Secondary Language as specified on Monolingual Bilingual No w a REFER to the Programing and Use guide
142. anguage Callers who call in to a voice messaging system set for Bilingual Mode hear the Automated Attendant Service menu prompt announcements and mailbox greetings in the Primary Language but have the option of switching to the Secondary Language by pressing x 2 Programming Main Menu Press EJ Language Press 1 Language FET ode Press 1 Press 2 Monolingual Bilingual Mode Mode Press 1 Press 2 Mons Play System Modify System Play Primary Modify Primary Language Language Language Language Press 2 Press 6 Press _1 2 Press 1 6 Modify Play Secondary Secondary Language Press _2 21 Language Press _2 61 Figure 5 1 Language Menu 5 8 Seu sitelere If you need to change current programming for Language you can use the instructions presented in this section For example f you want to change the Language Mode from Monolingual to Bilingual or Bilingual to Monolingual use Modifying the Language Mode f you want to change the current System Language used in Monolingual Mode use Modifying the System Language f you want to change the current Primary and or Secondary Language used in Bilingual Mode use Modifying the Primary Language and or Modifying the Secondary Language Modifying the Language Mode Update Form 1 for the voice messaging system to show the change in Language Mode Whe
143. anguage Announcement assigned to the Selector Code Press 2 to play the Secondary Language Announcement assigned to the Selector Code The system plays the recorded Announcement 7 Press Zz to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit Playing the Day and Night Menu Prompts in the Primary and Secondary Languages To listen to the current Day or Night Menu Prompts in the Primary and Secondary Languages selected for Bilingual Mode 1 Access the Programming Main Menu a Press intercom 7 z z or the programmed VMMsgs button b Press 9 9 c Enter the Password and press d Press 9 The system plays the system programming options 2 Press 3 for Automated Attendant The system plays To program the Day Menu press 1 For the Night Menu press 2 If finished press 3 Either Press 1 for the Day Menu Press 2 for the Night Menu The system plays To play the menu press 2 to modify the menu press 6 If finished press System Management Press 2 The system plays To play the menu prompt press 1 To play the Menu Definition press 2 If finished press Press 1 to play the menu prompt The system plays To play Primary Language prompt press 1 To play Secondary Language prompt press 2 If finished press Either Press 1 for the Primary Language prompt Press 2 for the Secondary Langu
144. ay service is standard during the warranty period for both the control unit and system phones Business Day service is performed during normal business hours However if you need 24 hour service protection during the warranty period on the control unit in case there is a major system failure you can purchase an Around the Clock service contract from your local Lucent Technologies sales office Around the Clock service is not available for phones If you purchased or leased your system through a Lucent Technologies Authorized Dealer contact your dealer for repairs Warranty Information Post Warranty Repairs If you purchased your system from Lucent Technologies and you have a post warranty service contact Lucent Technologies service is provided under the terms of that contract To significantly reduce unexpected repair costs after the warranty period you can purchase a post warranty service contract from Lucent Technologies If you do not have a contract Lucent Technologies service is provided on a time and materials basis by calling the Lucent Technologies Technical Service Center A contract provides you within the applicable coverage period and response times service calls with no charge for parts and labor on covered repairs Both Business Day and Around the Clock coverages of varying lengths are available To order a post warranty service contract call 1 800 247 7000 in the continental U S only If you leased your syste
145. bout This Guide Key Sequences This guide instructs you to press key sequences on the telephone s dialpad to perform tasks Each sequence includes a number If the keys on your dialpad also have letters the number in the sequence is equivalent to a letter associated with the task in English For example to delete a message from your mailbox you press x 3 which is equivalent to x 2 on the dialpad The numerical key sequences and their associated letter sequences are listed below for your reference Delete x 4 x 0 Help 4 4 Restart z J a Transfer x 3 x 7 Exit x 2 x x 4 About This Guide I ee How to Use This Guide If you are the technician refer to the appropriate chapters to help you Install the voice messaging system hardware Chapter 2 provides instructions for installing and upgrading the voice messaging system module in the communication system s control unit It also provides instructions for installing the Mailbox Expansion Card Refresh your memory about programming Chapter 3 offers general programming information for both the communications system and the voice messaging system Perform initial programming provides step by step programming instructions for integrating the voice messaging system with the communications system It also provides test procedures that you should use after installation to ensure that the system is working properly
146. certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated by the supplier Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment or any equipment malfunctions may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system if present are connected This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas A CAUTION Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves but should contact the appropriate electrical inspection authority or electrician as appropriate To prevent overloading the Load Number LN assigned to each terminal device denotes the percentage of the total load to be connected to a telephone loop used by the device The termination on a loop may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the total of the Load Numbers of all the devices does not exceed 100 IC Certification No 230 3756A CSA Certification No LR 60486 Load No 7 FCC Information Renseignements sur la notification du minist re des Communications du Canada et la r paration L tiquette du Minist re des Communications du Canada identifie le mat riel homologu Cette tiquette certifie que le mat riel est conforme a certaines normes de protection d exploitat
147. ck number specified on List 1 List 2 List 3 List 4 Form B1 and the corresponding telephone O S number to be assigned to Personal Speed Dial Entry Telephone Numbet Entry Telephone Number Telephone Number Code 80 for that extension aof Pt Telephone Numbet of Ts 2 of to PO 03 7 ua 0 ee of OSHC of fo Td of Oy A vy A o of jos to Td 8 of op to 9 a A S 1 Telephone Number can be up to 12 characters including 0 9 and Write for wildcard press Hold to program 2 Telephone Number can be up to 12 digits 0 9 NOTE An External Hotline phone is a phone that dials the specified 3 Telephone Number can be up to 28 characters including 0 9 and special dialing functions You can have more telephone number when the handset is lifted than 10 External Hotlines O Kuram A Required only if Forced Account Code Verification is desired For additional instructions see page 15 Lucent Technologies Bell Labs Innovations ereed Aecorni c Account Code List 409 Entry Account Code up tp 6 digits Write Description Entry Account Code up to 6 digits Ey Account Code up to 6 digits Write Description 3 8 36 69 37 70 38 71 39 72 40 73 41 7
148. created to restrict calls Creating a Disallowed Phone Number List Check communications system Planning Form D to see if a Disallowed Phone Number List is needed for Outcalling If so continue with the procedures in this section otherwise skip to Allowed Phone Numbers To create a list of Disallowed Phone Numbers 1 Press 4 0 4 Atthe List Number prompt enter the list number 1 4 Atthe Entry prompt select a list entry 01 10 2 3 4 Atthe Data prompt enter the first number 5 To save the number in memory you must press Enter 6 At this point To change the number you just entered press Remove and repeat Steps 4 and 5 To delete the number you just entered press Remove To enter other numbers in this list press Next item and repeat Steps 4 and 5 Assigning the Disallowed Phone Number List The Disallowed Phone Number List that was created for Outcalling should be assigned to the extension s that are connected to the Outcalling port To assign a Disallowed Phone Number List to the extensions 1 Press 4 o 5 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed Enter the list number 1 4 2 3 4 To assign the list press Next Data until the display reads 1 Assigned 5 To save the number in memory you must press Enter 6 To program another extension press Next Procedure Prev Procedure and repeat from Step 2 4 22
149. ctions Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the product Unplug all telephone connections before cleaning DO NOT use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners Use a damp cloth for cleaning This product should be serviced by or taken to a qualified repair center when service or repair work is required DO NOT use this product near water for example in a wet basement location DO NOT place this product on an unstable cart stand or table Never push objects of any kind into slots or openings as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short out parts that could result in a risk of fire or electric shock Never spill liquid of any kind on the product Avoid using this product during an electrical storm There may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning DO NOT use the telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak The product is provided with a three wire grounding type plug This is a safety feature DO NOT defeat the safety purpose of the grounding type plug DO NOT staple or otherwise attach the AC power supply cord to building surfaces A CAUTION DO NOT block or cover the ventilation slots and openings They prevent the product from overheating DO NOT place the product in a separate enclosure unless proper ventilation is provided SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS ee SS Contents 1 1 2 Installation 2 1 Before You Start 2 1 2 2 a Installing the PARTNER MAIL VS Module 3 Understandin
150. ctions between the voice messaging system and the receptionist s extension Use the following list as a guide when you explain these interactions to the receptionist The receptionist s extension is factory set as extension 10 and cannot be changed The mailbox for this extension can handle up to 60 minutes of stored messages or 120 messages When the Automated Attendant Service answers outside calls the receptionist will receive calls from any caller who presses a or stays on the line after hearing the menu prompt VMS shows on the display of the receptionist s phone to identify calls transferred by the voice messaging system The personal greeting recorded at the receptionists mailbox should be more general than personal since this mailbox is the destination for business calls when the receptionist is not available If the receptionist requests a personal mailbox you can create a guest mailbox for that purpose See Guest Mailboxes later in this chapter for instructions Once the guest mailbox is created the receptionist should tell people who might call to dial the extension number of the guest mailbox to leave personal messages when they call and hear the Automated Attendant Service prompt Additionally the receptionist can record a note on the personal greeting at extension 10 to notify callers of the guest mailbox For example the personal greeting for extension 10 can also say If you would like to leave
151. ctor Codes 1 9 represent a specific extension Group Calling number if available or Hunt Group number to which the caller will be transferred Use the following values PARTNER Plus 10 33 or 771 776 PARTNER Advanced 11 41 71 74 or 771 776 PARTNER II 10 57 71 74 or 771 776 PARTNER 48 10 57 71 or 771 776 Selector Code Transfer lets callers dial a single digit to reach a single extension or group such as the VP of Sales at extension 37 or the order processing operators assigned to Hunt Group 774 m Selector Code 9 lets callers transfer directly to mailbox 10 receptionist mailbox where they can leave a message m The Description and Selector Code number from this form will be used to complete the Day and Night Menu Prompts Forms 4 14A J5 and 5A m For Announcement entries in Description Selector Code and Announcement of this form will be used to complete Forms BA and BB Completing this Form For Direct Extension Transfer Q Description Write Direct Extension Transfer Range of Extensions for Direct Extension Transfer Leave the factory default Ext or Group for Selector Code Transfer Leave blank For Selector Extension Transfer Q Description Write the name of the person or group to receive the transfer Range of Extensions for Direct Extension Transfer Cross out the factory default if you want the caller to dial the corresponding Selector Code to transfer to the extensi
152. d ensure that any corresponding voice mail system forms are updated accordingly Samples of the voice mail system Planning Forms are included in For a general description of all the Planning Forms see Chapter 3 Instructions for completing each form are contained on the form itself Communications System Planning Forms How To Use the Forms The following table shows what procedures should be used and to which communications systems forms they correspond in planning for voice mail system installation and programming To Use Complete Feature Procedure CS Form Assign the extensions associated with the VMS Hunt Group hardware to Hunt Group 7 Extensions 505 Assign lines to Hunt Group 7 so calls can ring Group Call directly to the VMS and receive Automated Distribution 206 Attendant Service Identify an extension as an owner of an outside Line Coverage line so calls on that line can ring directly to the Extension 208 owner s voice mailbox when Automatic VMS Cover or VMS Cover is on at owner s ext Determine when outside calls should be answered VMS Hunt Delay by the Automated Attendant Service of the VMS 506 i e immediate or delayed call handling Determine when outside calls should ring the VMS VMS Hunt Schedule Hunt Group always day only or night only 507 depending on the status of the Night Service Button at ext 10 Determine whether an extension s unanswered Automatic VMS intercom and tran
153. d time occurs before the additional attempts these attempts will not be made by the system You may need to obtain more lines if the problem occurs frequently Possible Cause 4 The message was received outside the hours programmed in the subscriber s Outcalling Schedule or the Outcalling period was ended What to do This is standard operation Outcalling is performed only during the hours specified by the subscribers Outcalling Schedule Outcalling will be done only for message received during the Outcalling period Possible Cause 5 Outcalling may not be turned on What to do Have the mailbox owner verify that Outcalling is turned on The System Manager should also verify that the Outcalling privilege is assigned Outcalling to a Telephone Is Not Working Possible Cause 1 The Outcalling number is not properly programmed What to do Check that the Outcalling number is correct If not reprogram the number Possible Cause 2 A line may not be available to place a call What to do If all lines are in use when the system attempts to outcall the outcall does not go through The mail system attempts to outcall three times within a minimum time interval of 15 minutes between attempts When subsequent attempts are made during a peak line activity period these attempts may be delayed much longer And if the subscriber s Outcalling Schedule end time occurs before the additional attempts these attempts will not be made by the system
154. different from default Automatic System Answer Mode 121 By default ASA calls are put on hold after the greeting plays Check if calls should continue to ring or be disconnected Q Ring Q Disconnect ASA Record Playback I 891 message of up to 10 seconds that caller hears when the call is answered by the Automatic System Answer feature Write message below and record from extension 10 or 11 Form A System Configuration fz33 Lucent Technologies Bell Labs Innovations S Required for PARTNER II System and PARTNER Plus System For additional instructions see page 4 11 Auxiliary Equipment System Check if applicable Battery Backup Caller ID Devices Loudspeaker Paging Number of zones Magic on Hold Music on Hold 602 must be active Uninterruptible Power Supply SMDR If checked specify the following if appropriate e SMDR Record Type 608 By default all calls are included on call reports Write Out if only outgoing calls are reported e SMDR Output Format 610 By default up to 15 digits are printed for dialed numbers in the Number field of the call report Write 24 if a maximum of 24 digits is desired e SMDR Talk Time 611 PARTNER II only By default a Talk field is not included on the call report Write Active if the Talk field is desired 12 Notes Write any additional information that you want to communicate to the installer 13 Insta
155. ductors serving these receptacles are to be connected to earth ground at the service equipment U S Meets UL 1459 Issue 2 Canada Meets CSA C22 2 225 A 3 specications Government U S FCC Part 68 Approvals and FCC registration number U S AS5 USA 61630 KF E Local Phone FCC Part 15 Class A Company REN outside line jack 0 9A per line jack Information Jack type RJ11C Loop start lines Canada IC CP01 Issue 7 IC registration number Canada 230 3756A IC CS03 Issues 6 amp 7 Load Number 7 Loop start lines FCC Information Federal Communications Commission FCC Interference Information This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of FCC rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manuals may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will have to correct the interference at his or her own expense gt NOTE References to FCC regulations are not applicable outside of the U S B 1 FCC Information FCC Notification and Repair Information This equipment is regist
156. e Mailbox s Language later in this section If Outcalling is chosen see Assigning Outcalling Privileges later in this section Deleting a Mailbox gt NOTE The receptionist s mailbox at extension 10 cannot be deleted To delete mailboxes as specified on 1 If necessary access the Programming Main Menu If you are already at the Programming Main Menu skip to Step 2 a Press intercom Z Z Z or the programmed VMMsgs button b Press 9 9 c Enter the Mailoox Password and press d Press 2 2 Press 4 for Mailboxes Enter the number of a mailbox to be deleted as indicated on Form 2 followed by w Press x 3 to delete the mailbox Press 2 to confirm mailbox deletion Repeat Steps 3 through 5 for each mailbox to be deleted Press x z to return to the Programming Main Menu Continue with Creating a Mailbox or Modifying a Mailbox s Language or go to Assigning Outcalling Privileges or later in this chapter oN O oO RAR 4 15 Initial Programming Creating a Mailbox To create mailboxes as specified on Form 2 l If necessary access the Programming Main Menu If you are already at the Programming Main Menu skip to Step 2 a Press Intercom 7 Z Zz or the programmed VMMsgs button b Press 9 9 c Enter the Mailbox Password and press d Press 9 2 Press 4 for Mailbox
157. e Drop F 06 Contact Closure 1 F 41 Contact Closure 2 F 42 Direct Line Pickup Active Ling 68 Direct Line Pickup Idle Lindl 8 Exclusive Hold F 02 Fax Management I XX Group Calling Ring Page I 7 G or I 7 G Group Hunt Ring Signal 1 77 G or 1 77 G Group Pickup I 66 G Intercom Autodial I XX or I XX Last Number Redial F 05 Loudspeaker Paging I 70 Manual Signaling F 13 XX or F 13 XX Message Light Off F 10 XX Message Light On F 09 XX MsgOn XX Recall F 03 Save Number Redial F 04 SNR Simultaneous Paging I 70 SPage Station Lock F 21 Lock Touch Tone Enable F 08 TT EN Voice Mail Messages I 777 VMMsgs 777 Voice Mailbox Transfer F 14 VMBox Feature button G Group I Left Intercom button L Line XX Extension Button with lights is recommended but not required You can program the origination extension only or both the origination and destination extension Extension number can be programmed as Auto Dial button You can program the extension number Form C5 MLS 34D Phone Lucent Technologies Bell Labs Innovations Make as many copies as you need Use template and or checklist For additional instructions see pages 8 through 13 Check Desired Features Also write in extension or group number SAMPLE Night Service Button 503 m Outgoing Call Restriction Button 114 z
158. e Menu 5 8 5 2 Automated Attendant Service Menu 5 19 5 3 Modifying Mailboxes 5 37 5 4 Dial Plan for PARTNER Plus PARTNER IL and PARTNER 48 5 39 5 5 Dial Plan for PARTNER Advanced Communications Systems 5 40 5 6 Line Ownership 5 53 ix About This Guide Purpose This guide provides instructions for installing upgrading programming and managing the PARTNER MAIL VS Voice Messaging System on the PARTNER Plus PARTNER II PARTNER 48 or PARTNER Advanced Communications System ACS It is intended for the technician who installs the hardware and programs the initial system settings and for the System Manager the person who is responsible for managing the system on an on going basis Terminology This guide uses the following terms a Voice messaging system VMS the PARTNER MAIL VS Voice Messaging System a Subscribers a user who has a mailbox on the voice messaging system a Communications system CS in most countries Release 3 1 or later of the PARTNER Plus PARTNER II and PARTNER 48 systems or Release 1 0 of the PARTNER Advanced Communications System In the U K Release 2 0 or later of the PARTNER Plus and PARTNER 48 systems a System phones the telephones specifically designed to work with the communications system including where available the PARTNER 34D PARTNER 18D PARTNER 18 PARTNER 6 MLS 34D MLS 18D MLS 12D MLS 12 MLS 6 MLC 6 MDC 9000 MDW 9000 MDW 9010 and MDW 9030P xi A
159. e correct extension or group go to Possible Cause 3 Possible Cause 3 The line is too noisy What to do Call your local telephone company 6 4 ace Ciara Unanswered Transferred Calls Ring Continually Possible Cause In some countries the telephone company does not always provide a far end disconnect signal This causes the line to remain open even after the caller hangs up What to do Assign voice mail coverage to all extensions in the system this is especially important for extension 10 Also make sure voice mail coverage is on at extension 10 at night when no one is around to manually disconnect calls The voice messaging system will disconnect any call to an extension that has voice mail coverage after 15 seconds of silence 6 5 Troubleshooting Call Answer Service Call Answer Service Takes Too Long to Answer Calls Possible Cause Calls ring four times at a subscriber s extension to give the subscriber a chance to answer the call What to do Recommend that subscribers program a Do Not Disturb button on their system phones They should turn on the feature when they leave their desks or whenever they are too busy to answer calls Calls to extensions with Do Not Disturb on are answered immediately Call Answer Service Terminates Message While Caller Is Recording Possible Cause The callers recording time exceeded the mailbox s message time limit The time limit for recording a message is four minutes Wha
160. e only if VMS Hunt Schedule is set to Night Only or Always General Information If Selector Code 9 is left as the default the prompt should en ee instruct callers to press 9 to leave a message with the The Night Menu Prompt plays to callers when the VMS Hunt receptionist Schedule is set to Night Only or Always and Night Service is on The Night Menu Prompt and the Day Menu Prompt use the It is recommended that you keep the number of menu options to 5 same Menu Definition or less to avoid confusing the caller m The Night Menu Prompt should contain a welcome and a list of menu options Completing this Form m The welcome should introduce the company For example Write the message that you want callers to hear when they call You have reached the Any Travel Agency Our hours are 9 AM after normal business hours including instructions to the caller for to 5 PM Monday through Friday selecting menu options Let callers know they can switch back to the Primary Language Suggested options include For example For English pr y TE ERNE eee eer press Dial 9 or remain on the line to leave a message m The menu options should contain instructions that correspond to the Menu Definition set up on Form 3 If callers can dial extension numbers Direct Extension Transfer the prompt should instruct callers to dial the To hear this menu again dial 4 Recording the Night Menu Prompt extension number
161. ecorded Announcement Some systems allow programming from extension 11 Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system 4 29 Initial Programming Night Menu Repeat Steps 2 through 4 for each line that has Automated Attendant Service coverage If the VMS Hunt Schedule is set for Always continue with Night Menu below Make sure the Night Service button at extension 10 is on Call in on a line answered by the Automated Attendant Service If the system is set for Immediate Automated Attendant Service should answer the call on the second ring Delayed Automated Attendant Service should answer the call after the fourth ring Listen for the Night Menu Prompt 5 If you already tested the Day Menu go to Step 8 Otherwise after the prompt choose an option from the night menu Make sure your call is transferred to the appropriate extension or group or the correct announcement is played Repeat Steps 2 through 6 for each option on the night menu 8 If the system is set for Bilingual Mode press x 1 to check the Night 4 30 Menu Prompt in the Secondary Language You should also hear any recorded Announcement Initial Programming Call Answer Service VMS Extension Coverage 1 Press the Do Not Disturb button at the appropriate destination extensions to quickly route your test calls to Call Answer Service 2 For extensions that do not have Automatic VMS Cov
162. ector Code you want to modify Go to Step 10 If you want to change an Announcement press 3 Go to Step 9 Enter an Announcement number 1 or 2 Go to Step 11 The system plays To record a new announcement press 1 to use existing announcement press Press x to approve your entries and finish modifying the Menu Definition The system plays To record a new prompt for this menu press 1 To use the existing prompt and save any Menu Definition changes press If you do not want to record a new Day Menu Prompt or Announcement press and go to Step 16 otherwise continue with Step 12 To record a new Day Menu Prompt or Announcement lift the handset press 1 and record after the beep The prompt or Announcement can be up to four minutes long Press 1 when you are finished recording System Management 16 Choose an option or skip this step Press 2 1 to immediately re record the Day Menu Prompt or Announcement Begin recording immediately after the beep press 1 after recording Repeat if desired Otherwise go to Step 15 Press 2 3 to play back the Day Menu Prompt or Announcement Repeat if necessary Press x 2 to delete the Day Menu Prompt or Announcement Return to Step 11 Press x to approve and save the Day Menu Prompt or Announcement The system plays Approved Menu Definition saved Press x z to return to the
163. ed Phone Alternate Trainee s Name Phone era Conzailez _ C 5 Soldby Lucent Technologies Sales Force Salesperson s Name Phone Colleen Rivera _ 52 555 6812 Q Dealer 8 System Lines System Configuration PAGE 1of3 6 Configure Hardware for Hybrid Mode PARTNER II system only No Q Yes Q If yes call local telephone company MF Mode and FCC AS5 USA 21312 MF E 7 Features Customer is most interested in most important first PARTNER MAIL VS Hybrid Mode Line Coverage You can select one per line i Only AA iDXD 2 VMS ASA Hunt VMS Write Write User s Name for Check Identify other Local Jack Numbers in order i I LAA Group Mail Ext No Personal or Owned Line Jit Telephone Company No customer desires noo 884 88 607 205 206 204 write no 206 for Call 9 stat i ae for A er 4 lee Call list personal and 883 or No Pool Only one of these one cr these 206 or Cover edicated Line ae g Rep dedicated lines last 207 t 208 208 Cel eee ee Ee eee ee eee a Eee eae a lt po ee ne a S T i e o EEE EEE _ O z z z m COC AR o eee E PARTNER II System Only 23 1 Check if desired Also see AA Extension 607 column 5 Write group number 1 6 covering this line Also see Hunt Group Extensions 505 1 6 2 Check if desired Also see Form Alltem
164. ension coverage A feature that allows callers to leave messages or transfer to another extension when the extension called is busy or not answered and Automatic VMS Cover is on Extension jack The six jacks on the lower half of a 206 module that allow you to connect phones or other telecommunications devices to the control unit Extension Line Coverage A voice messaging system feature that lets a subscriber s extension mailbox be assigned as the owner of a covered line When a call comes in on the covered line the system routes the caller to the mailbox specified as the line owner if the call is not answered See also Line Coverage Extension Extension number The number assigned to each extension jack on a 206 module Extension jack numbers run consecutively from 10 through 33 for the PARTNER Plus system 10 through 41 for the PARTNER ACS and 10 through 57 for the PARTNER II and PARTNER 48 systems They are used for intercom calling Extension Programming A method of telephone programming that lets users program their own extensions from their system phones See also Centralized Telephone Programming G Group Call Distribution A communications system feature that directs incoming calls on specified lines to a Hunt Group for either Automated Attendant Service or Line Coverage See also Automated Attendant Service Hunt Group VMS Hunt and VMS Line Coverage GL 2 eee H Hunt Group A group of extensions that
165. enu a Press Intercom 7 z Zz or the programmed VMMsgs button b Press 9 9 c Enter the Password and press d Press 9 The system plays the system programming options 2 Press 6 for line ownership The system plays To scan line ownership press 2 to assign line ownership press 4 to modify line ownership press 6 To delete line ownership press D 3 Press 4 The system plays Pleas nter the CO line number followed by If finished press 4 Enter the number of the outside line that you want to associate with a specific subscriber s mailbox followed by If the line already has an owner the system announces the mailbox number of that owner Otherwise the system plays CO line X has no owner Entre the mailbox number of the new line owner followed by If finished press 5 Enter the mailbox number followed by The system plays CO Line X owner is mailbox YY If the mailbox does not exist you are told so See Creating a Mailbox earlier in this chapter for instructions on creating mailboxes 6 Repeat Steps 4 and 5 until you assign line ownership for all of the appropriate lines 7 Press z to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit 5 55 System Management Modifying Line Ownership Update Form 6 for the voice messaging system to show modifications to line ownership then use the updated form while per
166. ep the number of menu options to 5 same Menu Definition or less to avoid confusing the caller m The Night Menu Prompt should contain a welcome and a list of menu options Completing this Form m The welcome should introduce the company For example Write the message that you want callers to hear when they call You have reached the Any Travel Agency Our hours are 9 AM after normal business hours including instructions to the caller for to 5 PM Monday through Friday selecting menu options m lf the system is set for Bilingual Mode let callers know they can Suggested options include switch the language they hear while on the call For example ese f P D m Dial 9 or remain on the line to leave a message Para espa ol marque 1 f ae f To hear this menu again dial 4 m The menu options should contain instructions that correspond 9 to the Menu Definition set up on Form 3 R ding the Night M P t If callers can dial extension numbers Direct Extension iia eS ake 3 Transfer the prompt should instruct callers to dial the m To record the Night Menu Prompt dial 3 from the extension number For example If you know the extension Programming Main Menu of the person you want to reach dial it now and leave a message If callers can dial a single digit to transfer to an extension or group Selector Code Transfer the prompt should provide instructions such as To leave a message for Pat press
167. epeat Call Line Only one of these 206 or 201 pes pe em 208 for Isss gsam gy S S S i 02 555 4568 Oo ooe S S i i i O Fe E a oR gk e Po5 Oo S S y B o o S S y po OS QO GCC o y y S K a Ca GC A Oo O S e e S e e Pe S e Oo S S e 4 o o s y O Ooo S 15 OOo doo o D ee 1 Check if desired Also see Form B1 AA Extension 607 column 2 Check if desired Also see Form A Item 9 and Form B1 PARTNER MAIL or PARTNER MAIL VS column 3 Write group number 1 6 covering this line Also see Hunt Group Extensions 505 1 6 4 Check desired line for 206 or enter line owner s extension number for 208 Also see PARTNER MAIL or PARTNER MAIL VS column Lucent Technologies Bell Labs Innovations stem Configuration RA Required for PARTNER Advanced Communications System For additional instructions see pages 3 and 4 8 System Settings Write response on line for each item Receptionist answers calls during business hours Write Yes or No Yes Number of Lines 104 By default 3 lines per PARTNER ACS processor module 2 lines per 206 module and 4 lines per 400 module are assigned to each extension Write number if different from default Transfer Return Rings 105 By default a transferred call rings 4 times before going to the transfer return extension Write number 0 9 0 no return if different
168. epeat Steps 12 through 16 18 Do one of the following If you approved the Day Menu Prompt go to Step 21 If you approved an Announcement go to Step 19 19 Press to move up a menu level 20 Press x to move up another menu level 21 Press to approve and save all changes The new Day Menu Prompts Announcements and Selector Code changes now take effect 22 Press x z to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit Modifying the Night Menu Prompts Update Form 5 and Al for the voice messaging system to show modifications to the Night Menu Prompts then use the updated form while performing the following procedure To change the Night Menu Prompts 1 Access the Programming Main Menu a Press intercom z z z or the programmed VMMsgs button b Press 9 9 c Enter the Password and press d Press 9 The system plays the system programming options 2 Press 3 for Automated Attendant The system plays To program the Day Menu press 1 For the Night Menu press 2 If finished press yoten Managenient 12 Press 2 The system plays To play the menu press 2 to modify the menu press 6 If finished press Press 6 The system plays To record Primary Language prompt press 1 To record Secondary Language prompt press 2 To save any recordings press Lift the handset Press 1 to record the Night Menu Prompt in the
169. equired For Automated Attendant Service Script Automated Attendant Announcements in System or Primary Language Required if Annc is assigned to a Selector Code Script Automated Attendant Announcements in Secondary Language Required for Bilingual Mode if Annc is assigned to a Selector Code Script the Day Menu Prompt in System or Primary Language Required if VMS Hunt Schedule is set to Day Only or Always Script the Day Menu Prompt in Secondary Language Required for Bilingual Mode if VMS Hunt Schedule is set to Day Only or Always Script the Night Menu Prompt in System or Primary Language Required if VMS Hunt Schedule is set to Night Only or Always Script the Night Menu Prompt in Secondary a Language Required for Bilingual Mode if VMS Hunt Schedule is set to Night Only or Always Assign Line Ownership cannot be assigned to lines 6 6 assigned Automated Attendant coverage Required if VMS Line Coverage exists for one or more lines D 2 Form 1 Language I ee Q Language Mode Q Monolingual Bilingual Monolingual Mode System Language Q U S English Q U K English Latin American Spanish U Canadian French Q Other specify U U S English Q U K English O Latin American Spanish Q Canadian French O Other specify Q U S English U U K English Q Latin American Spanish Q Canadian French O Other specify Genera
170. er turn on coverage by pressing the VMS Cover button at those extensions 3 Call the first extension that has VMS coverage either automatic or manual f Do Not Disturb is on at the extension Call Answer Service should answer the call after one ring and you should hear the default greeting for that mailbox If Do Not Disturb is not on the call rings at the extension before Call Answer Service answers it 4 Repeat this procedure for every extension that has voice mail coverage VMS Line Coverage 1 Callin on the first line that is programmed for VMS Line Cover Call Answer Service should answer the call on the fifth ring and the factory set greeting should prompt you to leave a message in that line owner s mailbox 2 Repeat this procedure for every line that has VMS Line Cover Line Coverage Extension 1 Make sure VMS Cover is on at the owner s extension 2 Call in and make sure the call goes to VMS Cover by the number of rings specified by VMS Cover Rings 117 3 Verify that you hear the factory set mailbox greeting for the line owner 4 Repeat this procedure for every Line Coverage extension VMS Cover Rings 117 is not available on all systems Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system 4 31 System Management Contents General Information 5 2 Changing Your Password 5 2 m Training Co Workers 5 3 Language 5 3 Outcalling 5 3 Using the Tutor Feature 5 5 Other Opti
171. er can log in the problem is solved a f the subscriber still cannot log in re initialize the password as described in Chapter 5 If you forget the password for login 99 you must call for help Date or Time in Message Headers Is Incorrect Possible Cause The day date or time programmed for the communications system is incorrect or the PARTNER MAIL VS system was not updated with the correct time What to do Refer to System Date 101 System Day 102 or System Time 103 in the Programming and Use guide for the communications system to check the day date or time settings If the day date and time are correct choose one of these procedures and re enter the correct value After one minute this updates the day date and time on the voice messaging system If message headers for new messages are still incorrect call for help In the continental U S help is available at 1 800 628 2888 Outside the continental U S call your Lucent Technologies Representative or local Authorized Dealer 6 7 Poublsshoound Subscriber Cannot Forward Messages to Another Subscriber Possible Cause 1 The recipient s mailbox is full or does not have enough space remaining to accommodate the message What to do Old messages must be deleted regularly from mailboxes When a subscriber s mailbox is full the caller cannot leave a message in that mailbox but is given the option of transferring to another extension The sender cann
172. ered with the FCC in accordance with Part 68 of its rules In compliance with those rules you are advised of the following Means of Connection Connection to the telephone network shall be through a standard network interface jack USOC RJ11C These USOCs must be ordered from your local telephone company This equipment may not be used with party lines or coin telephone lines a Notification to the Telephone Companies Before connecting this equipment you or your equipment supplier must notify your local telephone company s business office of the following The telephone number s you will be using with this equipment The appropriate registration number and ringer equivalence number REN which can be found on the right hand side of the primary carrier You must also notify your local telephone company if and when this equipment is permanently disconnected from the line s Repair Instructions If you experience trouble because your equipment is malfunctioning the FCC requires that you disconnect the equipment from the network and not use it until the problem has been corrected Repairs to this equipment can only be made by the manufacturer its authorized agents or by others who may be authorized by the FCC In the event repairs are needed on this equipment please contact the Lucent Technologies Technical Service Center at 1 800 643 2353 For warranty information see a Rights of the Local Telephone Company If this
173. ervice Button 503 at extension 10 e Set Automatic Extension Privacy 304 to Assigned for the VMS extensions c9 fon He Set VMS Hunt Delay 506 to Delayed Set VMS Hunt Schedule 507 to Night Only Program a Night Service Button 503 at extension 10 Refer to CS Form A Page 1 of 2 Line Yes Coverage to see if any lines are checked off in the VMS Mail column Use Group Call Distribution 206 to program the personal lines as VMS Line Coverage for Hunt Group 7 Refer to VMS Form 6 Columns A and D to assign Line Ownership to specified lines No m Refer to CS Form A Page 1 of 2 Line Use Line Coverage Extension 208 Coverage to see if any extension to program line ownership for those numbers are specified in the VMS extensions Mail column Refer to CS Form B2 to determine if Assign Automatic VMS Cover 310 Automatic VMS Cover 310 is to those extensions assigned for any extensions Refer to CS Form A Page 2 of 2 to Use VMS Cover Rings 117 to see if a different number of VMS program the number of rings c8 Cover Rings 117 is specified Refer to CS Form Cjto determine if a VMS Cover button is specified for any extensions Yes Program a VMS Cover button on the system phone at those extensions E a z Refer to CS Form Cjto determine if a Program a Do Not Disturb button on Do Not Disturb button is specified for the system phone at each o
174. es ao N O On A Enter the number of a mailbox to be created as indicated on Form 2 followed by Press 4 to create this mailbox Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each mailbox to be created Press x z to return to the Programming Main Menu Continue with Modifying a Mailbox s Language or go to Assigning Outcalling Privileges or later in this chapter Modifying a Mailbox s Language To modify a mailbox s language as specified on Form 2 1 If necessary access the Programming Main Menu If you are already at the Programming Main Menu skip to Step 2 a Press intercom 7 z z or the programmed VMMsgs button b Press 3 9 c Enter the Mailbox Password and press d Press 9 2 Press 4 for Mailboxes 3 Enter the number of a mailbox whose language is to change as indicated on Form 2 followed by Press 6 for Mailbox Language Press 6 to modify Mailbox Language Enter the number corresponding to the Mailbox Language specified on Press 9 to confirm Repeat Steps 3 through 7 for each mailbox whose language is to be changed Press x z to return to the Programming Main Menu Continue with Assigning Outcalling Privileges or Line Ownership later in this chapter Initial Programming Assigning Outcalling Privileges When the system is first installed the Outcalling feature is not assigned to
175. esperson s Name Phone Dealer 8 System Lines Hybrid Mode Line Coverage You can select one per line AA i DXD VMS ASA t Hunt VMS Write Write Users Name for Check Identify other Local i 1 AA Group Mail Ext No Personal or Owned Line if Telephone Company 607 205 206 204 Write no 206 for Call or Identify Equipment for Caller Subscription Services 206 Dedicated Line ID e g Repeat Call Only one of these 206 o Service Line Write the Telephone Jack Numbers in order customer desires list personal and dedicated lines last Write auxiliary pool 881 882 883 or No Pool a e E g N a 7 om ui He a a lt N 1 Check if desired Also see Form B1 AA Extension 607 column 5 Write group number 1 6 covering this line Also see Form B2 Hunt Group Extensions 505 1 6 2 Check if desired Also see Form A Item 10 DXD and Form C Direct Extension Dial Button 113 6 Check desired line for 206 or enter line owner s extension number for 208 Also see PARTNER 3 Check if desired Also see Form A Item_ 10 VMS AA and PARTNER MAIL or PARTNER MAIL VS MAIL or PARTNER MAIL VS column o column 7 Write extension number of line owner eligible for Call Coverage Also write line owner s name in next 4 Check if desired Also see Form A
176. ess Feature 1 4 2 3 Press a programmable button 4 5 At this point do one of the following Go to Step 3 of the next procedure to program another button for this extension Press Central Tel Program and go to Step 2 of any button programming procedure in this section to program a button for a different extension Press Feature a o to exit In some countries the feature code for Voice Mailbox Transfer is 1 5 Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system 4 27 Initial Programming Voice Mail Messages This intercom Auto Dial button allows the subscriber to access the voice messaging system with the touch of one button To program a Voice Mail Messages VMMsgs button as specified on Form C 1 Press Feature 0 o System Program System Program Central Tel Program Dial the number of the extension to be programmed Press left intercom 7 7 z 2 3 Press a programmable button 4 5 At this point do one of the following Press Central Tel Program and go to Step 2 of any button programming procedure in this section to program a button for a different extension Press Feature 0 a to exit Initial Programming Verifying System Operation After you finish programming the voice messaging system and the communications system you should perform the tests described in this secti
177. extensions from interrupting calls assign Automatic Extension Privacy 304 on 8 Check corresponding alert extensions in next column To prevent outside calls remove all outside lines see Lines Not Assigned on Form B2 Also write Transfer Return Ext No 306 on this form 10 Write 1 2 or B for Both to identify which Contact Closure the extension can activate Lucent Technologies Bell Labs Innovations x m m m Form B2 Customized Extension Settings f 7493 Required if you want to change extension settings from defaults for PARTNER II System and PARTNER Plus System For additional instructions see pages 6 and 7 Identify Extension Settings Identify Line Ringing CTP Option Identify Restrictions Permissions G pae i if Different than Default If Different than Default If Different than Defaults roup Assignments l Jg ae 3 T Write line numbers in each column to show desired Write line numbers for Line Access Restriction gt g 2 z g g R olf E elg Line Ringing options 302 ag BS SaR aR l EI 5 Ss 58 2 2_ a8 s il zlaga ol gelgel g vyl js S Z or oo o S SG155 65S e Seles 9 2 gS o0I8 SS g col zE o E 2 Oe 55 3 o2 2 82 oe 25l s sci ee 2S 28 5 82 22 F EIS joe x j S gt El sx lem No Restriction OF la PSl S 8 2 c E5lESln les S gt gt S o w s Se 50 2 3 2 aloxa klaks oe S888 ZgolE ESlan Od ga z lt og T u lS 26 2 22 38 883
178. f those any extensions extensions No L Refer to CS Form Cjto determine if a Program a Voice Mailbox Transfer Voice Mailbox Transfer button is button on the system phone at those specified for any extensions extensions No m Program a Voice Mail Messages button on all subscribers system phones for one touch access to the voice messaging system No In some countries the procedure code for Group Call Distribution is 205 Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system Test the system See Ch 4 t VMS Cover Rings 117 may not be available on your system Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system PARTNER MAIL VS System Programming Reference TO START PROGRAMMING PRESS Intercom Z Z Z PRESS 9 9 and ENTER your Password factory setting is 1234 and _ PRESS _9 to access the Programming Main Menu Language REFER to Form 1 PRESS 1 to program Language TO REPLAY A MENU PRESS x 4 TO RETURN TO A PREVIOUS MENU PRESS x L Automated Attendant REFER to Forms and 5 PRESS 3 to program Automated Attendant Service TO RETURN TO THE PROGRAMMING MAIN MENU PRESS x Z TO EXIT PROGRAMMING PRESS x amp 9 Automated Attendant REFER to Forms and 5A PRESS 3 to program Automated Attendant Service TO MODIFY THE LANGUAGE MODE PRESS 1 for Language Mode PRESS _1 for Monolingual Mode o
179. fer Leave the factory default Ext or Group for Selector Code Transfer Leave blank For Selector Extension Transfer Q Description Write the name of the person or group to receive the transfer Range of Extensions for Direct Extension Transfer Cross out the factory default if you want the caller to dial the corresponding Selector Code to transfer to the extension announcement or group identified in below Ext or Group for Selector Code Transfer Write the extension announcement or group number to receive the transfer For Announcement O Description Write Announcement Range of Extensions for Direct Extension Transfer Cross out the factory default if you want the caller to dial the corresponding Selector Code to hear the Announcement identified in below Announcement Write the Announcement number 1 or 2 Form 3A Automated Attendant Announcement System Language or Primary Language TO E Required if Selector Code Transfer is set to Announcement Announcement l Tennis Land is located at 4 Clay Court just 5 blocks east of Anytown Shopping plaza on Route 66 Our courts are available daily from 6 am to 8 p m and our shop is open Monday through Saturday 10 am to 6 pm To return to the Main Menu press ut Announcement Welcome to Tennis Land s Calendar of Events This month we will be hosting the 6th Annual Anytown Father Daughter Tennis Tournament on the 12th
180. for calling the ANY Travel Agency If you know the extension of the person you are calling enter the extension number now To speak with a cruise specialist press 3 For corporate travel press 4 For personal travel press 5 For assistance press 0 or if you have a rotary phone stay on the line A sample night menu prompt for the ANY Travel Agency follows You have reached the ANY Travel Agency Our business hours are 9 to 5 Monday through Friday To leave a message press 9 and we will return your call as soon as possible If this is an emergency press 6 for our special traveler s assistance information In this case the caller who needs after hours assistance can press 6 to hear the following Announcement If you have misplaced your airline tickets or passport missed your flight or limousine pickup or have any other travel emergency after ANY Travel s standard business hours call 1 800 555 6060 to speak with our special traveler s assistance program representative 5 21 Svc Management Other Options Automated Attendant Service provides the following built in options no programming required for use in your menu prompt a A third type of transfer option which is always available to outside and inside callers may be useful in certain situations With this type of transfer when callers press x 8 the system prompts them to enter an extension number Using the example above if you assigned Select
181. for extensions 10 though 19 in this column identify the extension assignments Identify Telephone Attached to this Extension Check in these columns specify the type of telephone each person or location has VMS inthe Write Name Description column and checks in the PARTNER MAIL VS column indicate that the PARTNER MAIL VS module is installed in Slot 3 of the Control Unit The module uses extensions 22 and 23 the last two extensions for that slot a Write Transfer Return Ext No 10 in this column indicates that when a call transferred by the PARTNER MAIL VS system is unanswered it goes to extension 10 where the clerk can answer it CS Form B2 Page 1 of 2 Automatic VMS Cover 310 Check in this column indicate that unanswered calls to extensions 10 through 15 automatically are covered by the Automated Attendant Service Hunt Group Extensions 1 6 505 1 in this column indicates that extensions 16 and 17 make up Hunt Group 1 A call transferred to this group rings three times at the first non busy extension If it is not answered it moves to the next non busy extensions in the group continuing until someone answers or the caller hangs up Hunt Group Extensions VMS Only column for extensions 22 and 23 satisfy the requirement that the extensions used by the PARTNER MAIL VS module be assigned to Hunt Group 7 CS Form C3 PARTNER 18 Phone The first Form C3lidentifies the buttons programmed on the PARTNER 1
182. forming the following procedure To change line ownership 1 Access the Programming Main Menu a Press intercom 7 z z or the programmed VMMsgs button b Press 9 9 c Enter the Password and press d Press 9 The system plays the system programming options 2 Press 6 for line ownership The system plays To scan line ownership press 2 to assign line ownership press 4 to modify line ownership press 6 To delete line ownership press D 3 Press 6 The system plays Pleas nter the CO line number followed by If finished press 4 Enter the number of the outside line whose ownership you want to modify followed by If the line does not have an owner the system tells you so Otherwise the system plays CO line X owner is mailbox YY Enter the mailbox number of the new line owner followed by If finished press 5 Enter the new mailbox number followed by The system plays CO Line X owner is mailbox YY If the mailbox does not exist you are told so See Creating a Mailbox earlier in this chapter for instructions on creating mailboxes 6 Repeat Steps 4 and 5 to modify the line ownership for any other lines 7 Press z to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit 5 56 System Management Deleting Line Ownership Update Form 6 for the voice messaging system to show the ownership assignments you want to
183. g 4 13 Initial Programming 13 14 15 16 17 Choose an option or skip this step Press 2 1 to immediately re record this Menu Prompt Begin recording immediately after the beep press 1 after recording Repeat if desired Press 2 3 to play back this Menu Prompt Press x 2 to delete this Menu Prompt and return to Step 11 to be prompted for re recording Press x to approve this Night Menu Prompt Press to approve all changes The Night Menu Prompts now take effect Press x z to return to the Programming Main Menu Continue with the next section Voice Mail Service Initial Programming Voice Mail Service Before you begin locate Form 2 for the voice messaging system Check to see if mailboxes are numbered differently from the factory defaults if any mailbox is to be deleted or if a Mailbox Language is changed for any mailbox a If mailboxes are not numbered differently no mailbox is deleted no mailbox s language is changed and no Outcalling is assigned skip to Line Ownership m f any mailbox is to be deleted use the procedure below a f mailboxes are numbered differently first use the procedure below to delete all mailboxes from extensions that do not require coverage then use the procedure on the next page to create mailboxes for all extensions that require coverage f Mailbox Language is changed for any mailbox se
184. g Programming 3 1 Cmmunications System Programming 3 1 i 4 m Voice Messaging System Programming 3 BE Ci OSOSOCOCOCOCOCOTTTWWWOOCOC Contents 5 1 a a Line Coverage 5 52 Telephone Button Programming 5 60 a OH _ L 5 System Management 6 Troubleshooting 6 1 6 6 Voice Mail Service m Language 6 11 rrr A Specifications A 1 i B 1 1 m 2 a 7 Ce B FCC Information a Federal Communications Commission FCC Interference Information B 1 IC Notification and Repair Information B 3 E C Warranty Information C 1 a Repair Information C 1 iabili C 3 Lucent Technologies Warranty and Limitation of Liability vi O E Contents e D Voice Messaging System Planning Forms D 1 mE E Communications System Planning Forms E 1 C F Case Studies i F 1 Purpose F 1 7 F 2 Case Study 1 Case Study 2 F 21 a GL Glossary GL 1 Programming Flowchart System Programming Reference Vii Figures 1 Overview 1 1 1 1 Voice Messaging Services 1 5 1 2 Immediate and Delayed Call Handling 1 9 COO 2 Installation 2 1 2 1 Voice Messaging System Extensions for PARTNER Plus PARTNER II and PARTNER 48 2 3 2 2 Sample Voice Messaging System Extensions for PARTNER Advanced Communications Systems 2 4 2 3 Installing the Mailbox Expansion Card 2 5 3 Understanding Programming 3 1 3 1 Programming Menus 3 6 5 System Management 5 1 5 1 Languag
185. g this Form Write the message that you want callers to hear when they call during normal business hours including the instructions to the caller for selecting menu options Suggested options include m Remain on the line for assistance Dial 0 for assistance To hear this menu again dial 4 Recording the Day Menu Prompt m To record the Day Menu Prompt dial 3 from the Programming Main Menu Form 4A Day Menu Prompt Secondary Language a ee Required for Bilingual Mode only if VMS Hunt Schedule is set to Day Only or Always General Information The Day Menu Prompt plays to callers when the VMS Hunt Schedule is set to Day Only or Always and Night Service is off The Day Menu Prompt and the Night Menu Prompt use the same Menu Definition m The Day Menu Prompt should contain a welcome and a list of menu options m The welcome should introduce the company For example Thank you for calling the Any Travel Agency m Let callers know they can switch back to the Primary Language For example For English press 1 m The menu options should contain instructions that correspond to the Menu Definition set up on Form 3 If callers can dial extension numbers Direct Extension Transfer the prompt should instruct callers to dial the extension number For example If you know the extension of the person you want to reach dial it now If callers can dial a single di
186. ge PRESS 1 after recording PRESS x L to approve PRESS 2 to record the Day Menu Prompt in the Secondary Language PRESS _7 after recording PRESS Lx L to approve PRESS to approve all changes TO PLAY THE MENU DEFINITION MONOLINGUAL MODE PRESS 7 for Day Menu PRESS 2 for playback of the Day Menu definition PRESS 2 for playback of the Selector Codes PRESS 1 to play the recorded Announcement assigned to the Selector Code or PRESS to skip PARTNER MAIL VS System Programming Reference To Program The PARTNER MAIL VS System TO REPLAY A MENU PRESS x 4 TO START PROGRAMMING PRESS intercom Z Z LZ TO RETURN TO THE PROGRAMMING MAIN MENU PRESS 9 9 and L ENTER your Password factory setting is 1234 and PRESS 9 to access the Programming Main Menu Automated Attendant REFER to Forms and 5A PRESS _3 to program Automated Attendant Service TO PLAY THE MENU DEFINITION BILINGUAL MODE PRESS 1 for Day Menu PRESS 2 for playback of the Day Menu definition PRESS 2 for playback of the Selector Codes PRESS 7 to play the Primary Language Announcement assigned to the Selector Code or PRESS 2 to play the Secondary Language Announcement assigned to the Selector Code or PRESS to skip TO MODIFY THE NIGHT MENU PROMPT MONOLINGUAL MODE PRESS 2 for Night Menu PRESS 6 to modify PRESS _7 to record the Night Menu Prompt
187. ge and a second in the Secondary Language They should include a sentence early in the greetings that lets callers know that they can switch to the other language by pressing x 1 while the greeting is playing You should let system users know that they can turn this feature on or off retrieve their messages from a touch tone phone as well as enter and change their Outcalling number and schedule Instructions for performing these tasks are provided in Using the PARTNER MAIL VS Voice Messaging System In addition you should provide users with the following information about the Outcalling feature Although you are responsible for assigning Outcalling privileges to a subscriber s mailbox the subscriber must turn on Outcalling and specify an Outcalling number Otherwise the system does not notify subscribers when new messages have arrived in their mailboxes If the subscriber is logged into the system the system does not place an outcall If the subscriber disconnects from the system without listening to a new message the outcall is placed according to schedule The Outcalling number may contain up to 60 digits including the and symbols The represents a 1 5 second pause The 9 dialed to get an outside line must be included in the Outcalling number And a pause should be included after the 9 Subscribers may also specify a schedule that is a start time and end time for Outcalling For example they
188. git to transfer to an extension or group Selector Code Transfer the prompt should provide instructions such as To speak to someone in sales press 6 If callers can can choose an Announcement include that information For example For directions to our office press 4 It is recommended that you keep the number of menu options to 5 or less to avoid confusing the caller Completing this Form Write the message that you want callers to hear when they call during normal business hours including the instructions to the caller for selecting menu options Suggested options include m Remain on the line for assistance Dial 0 for assistance m To hear this menu again dial 4 Recording the Day Menu Prompt m To record the Day Menu Prompt dial 3 from the Programming Main Menu Form 5 Night Menu Prompt System Language or Primary Language Required if VMS Hunt Schedule is set to Night Only or Always General Information The Night Menu Prompt plays to callers when the VMS Hunt Schedule is set to Night Only or Always and Night Service is on The Night Menu Prompt and the Day Menu Prompt use the same Menu Definition The Night Menu Prompt should contain a welcome and a list of menu options The welcome should introduce the company For example You have reached the Any Travel Agency Our hours are 9 AM to 5 PM Monday through Friday If the system is set for Bilingual Mode
189. gned to Sally Stan and the coaches Description In this column Direct Extension Transfer for Selector Code 1 indicates that when callers get the Automated Attendant Service they can transfer to any extension 10 to 19 by entering the extension number Shop in the Description column and 771 in the Specific Ext or Group for Selector Code Transfer or Announcement column for Selector Code 4 indicate that when callers get the Automated Attendant Service they can press 4 to transfer to Hunt Group 1 which is defined on CS Form B2 as extensions 16 and 17 in the shop Announcement in the Description column and the numbers 1 and 2 in the Specific Ext or Group for Selector Code Transfer or Announcement column indicate that when callers get the Automated Attendant Service they can choose to hear one of two Announcements VMS Form 3A m When an unanswered call goes to the Automated Attendant Service and the caller chooses to hear an Announcement the caller hears one of the Announcements on VMS Form 4 a When Night Service is off and an unanswered call goes to the Automated Attendant Service the caller hears the Day Menu Prompt on Form 4 Case Studies VMS Form 5 When Night Service is on and an unanswered call goes to the Automated Attendant Service the caller hears the Night Menu Prompt on Form 5 Post Installation Recommendations Stan Sally and the coaches should record
190. gnment The system plays Deleted 6 Repeat Steps 4 and 5 to delete other line ownership assignments 7 Press x z to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit 5 57 System Management Group Call Distribution Use this procedure to modify the assignment of outside lines for VMS Line Coverage Update Form A Page 1 Line Coverage of the System Planner for the communications system to show modifications to VMS MAIL lines before you begin To modify VMS MAIL lines assignments 1 Press Feature 0 o System Program System Program Enter System Password if required Press 2 2 s Atthe Group prompt press 7 7 F N Atthe Line prompt enter the first VMS MAIL line to be programmed as specified in the Line Coverage column of Form A Page 1 6 Press Next Data until the display reads 3 VMS Line Cover or2 Not Assigned Be careful not to choose 1 Assigned because you will assign Automated Attendant Service coverage rather than ownership to the line 7 To program another line press Next Item or Prev Item until the appropriate line number displays Then press Next Data until 3 VMS Line Cover or2 Not Assigned is displayed 8 Press Feature o o to exit programming In some countries the procedure code for Group Call Distribution is 205 Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system 5 58 SEM eee Extension Li
191. gs 777 Voice Mailbox Transfer F 14 VMBox F Feature button G Group I Left Intercom button XX Extension Requires Auto Dial button for each extension Button with lights is recom mended but not required Extension number can be pro grammed as Auto Dial button You can program the origination extension only or both the origination and destination extension You can program the extension number Lucent Technologies Bell Labs Innovations Template Instructions e If desired write in line number dial code feature or auto dial number e If desired write in Line Ringing Imm Del or No from e If desired write in Line Access Restriction Out In or No from Specify Automatic Line Selection Ext PAGE Form C4 PARTNER 6 Phone 4 of 8 Make as many copies as you need Use template and or checklist For additional instructions see pages 8 through 13 SAMPLE Identify extensions programmed as shown Fe i RO Check Desired Features Also write in extension or group number Do Not Disturb F 01 DND Privacy F 07 Priv VMS Cover F 15 VMSCover pauinbey 031 Voice Interrupt on Busy Talk Back F 18 VIOB Account Code Entry F 12 ACE Background Music F 19 Call Forwarding Call Follow Me F 11 XX XX CF XX XX Call Park I XX Park Call Pickup I 6 XX Pickup XX Conferenc
192. gual Mode a Press intercom z Zz z b Press 9 2 c Enter the System Manager s Mailbox Password d Press 9 1 2 1 4 e Press the number corresponding to the desired language f Press 9 6 11 Specifications Capacities Mailboxes a Mail Capacity Ext 10 60 minutes 120 messages subscriber 20 minutes 40 messages a Message Length 1 second to 4 minutes Automated a Personal Greeting Length 1 second to 4 minutes Attendant a Answers on this number of rings 2 immediate or 4 delayed Receptionist s Extension Dial 0 Extension 10 Dial 0 Timeout 5 seconds a Dial 0 Timeout Action day and night Transfer to receptionist a Menu Levels 1 a Menu Options 9 allowed 5 recommended Without Mailbox Expansion Card 2 voice channels ports 10 mailboxes 240 minutes of voice storage maximum With Mailbox Expansion Card Maximum of Ports of Mailboxes Voice Storage System Capacities 2 20 440 minutes 4 20 440 minutes 4 40 840 minutes Total Number of Calls Supported During Peak Usage Hour Call Connect Time Calls 2 port 4 port 0 5 minutes 25 122 1 minute 12 61 1 5 minutes 8 40 t Call connect time is an average for all calls to the PARTNER MAIL VS system including Tutor Automated Attendant Service Call Answer Service and Voice Mail Service This information assumes a 2 probability of system blockage A 1 epocilications Communications System
193. he Automated Attendant Service Menu mailbox assignments and line ownership assignments BA EEE E Intercom 7 7 7 Enter Login Press QQE Enter Mailbox Password Press BAH 2 Select Programming Main Menu Press Language Automated Mailboxes Line Press 1 Attendant Press 4 Ownership Press 3 Press 6 Figure 3 1 Programming Menus Accessing the Programming Main Menu To access the Programming Main Menu 1 Press intercom 7 Z z or a programmed VMMsgs button The system plays Welcome to PARTNER MAIL VS Pleas nter xtension and Otherwise to access PARTNER Tutor press 4 2 Press 9 9 The system plays Enter password and 3 6 nde rstanditid Frograrmming 3 Enter the Password and press The factory set Password is 1234 The system plays System Manager PARTNER MAIL VS Release 4 The system plays the available programming options It does not play option 9 the Programming Main Menu which only the System Manager can access Press 9 to access the Programming Main Menu The system plays To program the System Language press 1 for Automated Attendant press 3 for mailboxes press 4 for line ownership press 6 If finished press Programming Guidelines Once you are familiar with the voice messaging system use these shortcuts to save time while programming You do not have to wait for a prompt to play before entering d
194. he voice messaging system forms We suggest you fill in a photocopy of the form you need leaving the blank original in the book in case you need to make revisions in the future These forms must be completed before the voice mail system is installed because they serve as a reference for the person who installs and programs the system It is important to keep an accurate up to date record of the programming for the voice mail system If you change the system after installation you should update the forms that were used when the system was installed gt NOTE Before you begin to fill out the voice mail system Planning Forms you need a complete current copy of the communications system Planning Forms Samples of these forms are contained in For a general description of all the Planning Forms see Chapter 3 Instructions for completing each form are contained on the form itself Voice Messaging System Planning Forms How To Use the Forms The following table shows what voice mail system forms should be completed according to your voice mail system feature selection To Use VMS__ From Programming Form Main Menu press Select Language Mode System Language Primary and Secondary Language Assign Mailboxes to subscribers identify Mailbox Language and Outcalling privileges Identify Menu Definition i e Direct Extension Transfer Selector Code Transfer Ext or Group for Selector Code Transfer or Annc R
195. hen retrieving messages recording personal greetings and accessing other Voice Mail Services The rest of the subscribers prefer prompts and messages in Spanish the system s Primary Language Outcalling Assigned Yes in this column for Jose the system administrator and the customer service representative indicates that they have Outcalling privileges so that they can be notified of new voice mail while they are away from their offices Description In this column Direct Extension Transfer for Selector Code 1 and 2 indicates that when callers get the Automated Attendant Service they can transfer to any extension 10 to 29 by entering the extension number Customer Service in the Description column and 18 in the Specific Ext or Group for Selector Code Transfer or Announcement column for Selector Code 4 indicate that when callers get the Automated Attendant Service they can press 4 to transfer to extension 18 the Customer Service representative Customer Service in the Description column and 19 in the Specific Ext or Group for Selector Code Transfer or Announcement column for Selector Code 5 indicate that when callers get the Automated Attendant Service they can press 5 to transfer to extension 19 the Bookkeeper Case Studies VMS Form 4A VMS Form 5A When Night Service is off and a call goes to the Automated Attendant Service the caller hears the prompt on Form 4 in
196. ications System Programming Automated Attendant Service Before you begin locate Forms and C of the System Planner for the communications system Refer to Form A Page 1 Line Coverage to see if any lines are checked for VMS AA If so use this section to program Automated Attendant Service otherwise skip to Call Answer Service Group Call Distribution Use this procedure to specify the outside lines on which Automated Attendant Service is required To assign VMS AA lines specified on Form A Page 1 Line Coverage to Hunt Group 7 1 2 3 4 5 D At extension 10 press Feature o 0 System Program System Program Enter the System Password if required Press 2 o 6 Atthe Group prompt press z Atthe Line prompt enter the first VMS AA line specified in the Line Coverage column of Form A Page 1 Press Next Data until the display reads 1 Assigned TO program another line press Next item or Prev Item until the appropriate line number displays Press Next Data until the display reads 1 Assigned Repeat Steps 7 and 8 for each VMS AA line on Continue with VMS Hunt Delay below Some systems also allow programming from extension 11 Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system T In some cuntries the procedure code for Group Call Distribution is 205 Check the Programming and Use guide for the commun
197. ications system 4 19 Initial Programming VMS Hunt Delay Check Form A Page 2 VMS Hunt Delay If Delayed is specified follow the procedure below Otherwise skip to the next section Automatic Extension To change the VMS Hunt Delay setting from Immediate to Delayed as specified on Form A Page 2 1 Press 5 o s 2 Press Next Data until the appropriate value displays 3 Continue with VMS Hunt Schedule on the next page Automatic Extension Privacy If VMS Hunt Delay is set to Immediate use this procedure to prevent users from accidentally picking up calls sent to the voice messaging system To set Automatic Extension Privacy 304 to Assigned for the PARTNER MAIL VS extensions specified on 1 Press 3 0 4 2 Enter the first PARTNER MAIL VS extension number specified on 3 Press Next Data until the display reads 1 Assigned 4 Press Next Item or Prev Item until the next PARTNER MAIL VS extension number specified on Form B1 displays 5 Press Next Data until the display reads 1 Assigned 6 If additional PARTNER MAIL VS extensions are specified on repeat Steps 4 and 5 for each one 7 Continue with VMS Hunt Schedule below VMS Hunt Schedule Check Form A Page 2 VMS Hunt Schedule If Day Only or Night Only is selected follow the procedure below Otherwise skip to the next section To change the VMS Hunt Schedule setting from Always to Day
198. if desired Also see Form B1 JAA Extension 607 column 2 Check if desired Also see Form A Item 9 and PARTNER MAIL or PARTNER MAIL VS column 3 Write group number 1 6 covering this line Also see Hunt Group Extensions 505 1 6 4 Check desired line for 206 or enter line owner s extension number for 208 Also sosieem at PARTNER MAIL or PARTNER MAIL VS column Lucent Technologies Bell Labs Innovations N Form A System Configuration 7 5 Required for PARTNER Advanced Communications System For additional instructions see pages 3 and 4 8 System Settings Write response on line for each item Receptionist answers calls during business hours Write Yes or No Number of Lines 104 By default 3 lines per PARTNER ACS processor module 2 lines per 206 module and 4 lines per 400 module are assigned to each extension Write number if different from default Transfer Return Rings 105 By default a transferred call rings 4 times before going to the transfer return extension Write number 0 9 0 no return if different from default Outside Conference Denial 109 By default a conference call can include 2 outside parties Write No if 2 outside parties are not allowed VMS Cover Rings 117 By default a call rings 3 times before going to the user s mailbox Write number 1 9 if different from default____ Ring on Transfer 119 By default the caller hears ringing when the
199. ight Menu Prompt in the Secondary Language a Form 6 Line Ownership Identifies the lines assigned VMS Line Coverage Also shows for each owned line the associated telephone number the name of the subscriber who owns the line and the owner s mailbox number Samples of these forms and instructions for completing them are included in Using System Programmin A special login number is required to program the voice messaging system The following information applies to this login The login number is 99 99 is not an extension number This login does not have an associated mailbox The language associated with this login is either the System Language chosen for Monolingual Mode or the Primary Language chosen for Bilingual Mode it cannot be changed This login s factory set Password is 1234 If you are the System Manager refer to Changing Your Password in Chapter 5 to change the password before you begin to program the system gt NOTE Although this login has a Password it does not have an associated mailbox To begin programming the voice messaging system you make a call to the Voice Mail Service enter the login and password and select option 9 you are not prompted for this option This takes you to the Programming Main Menu shown in naarstig F rodramiming The Programming Main Menu The Programming Main Menu allows you to access the Language Mode and the language s associated with that mode t
200. igital Pager Is Not Working Possible Cause 1 The Outcalling number is not properly programmed What to do Check that the Outcalling number is correct If not reprogram the number Possible Cause 2 Insufficient number of pauses in Outcalling number What to do It is important to include a sufficient number of pauses between the pager number and the Personal Identification Number PIN or between the pager number and the callback number Leave several pauses after the pager number You must allow enough time for the paging system to answer before the PIN and or callback number is dialed In addition a pause should follow the 9 dialed to get an outside line And if the communications system is set to rotary rather than touchtone service pauses may need to be included after every digit in the Outcalling number In the continental U S help is available at 1 800 628 2888 Outside the continental U S call your Lucent Technologies Representative or Authorized Dealer 6 9 Troubleshooting Possible Cause 3 A line may not be available to place a call What to do If all lines are in use when the system attempts to outcall the outcall does not go through The mail system attempts to outcall three times within a minimum time interval of 15 minutes between attempts When subsequent attempts are made during a peak line activity period these attempts may be delayed much longer And if the subscriber s Outcalling Schedule en
201. igits for the next step Press x to return to the previous menu Press x 4 to repeat the current menu options Press x z at any point during programming to restart at the Programming Main Menu Use the handset rather than the speakerphone to record prompts and greetings to avoid background noise in your recordings To ensure that you hear voice prompts turn off your microphone when programming the system using the speakerphone Hang Up to exit programming 3 7 Initial Programming Contents Overview Voice Mail System Configurations a Upgrading Your Voice Mail System Initial Communications System Setup VMS Hunt Group Extensions Transfer Return Extensions 4 4 m 4 8 4 8 Automated Attendant Service Monolingual Mode Menu Definition Day Menu Prompt and Announcements 4 8 Menu Definition Day Menu Prompts and Announcements 4 11 Modifying a Mailbox s Language 4 16 Assigning Outcalling Privileges 4 17 Line Ownership 4 18 Assigning Line Ownership 4 18 Contents Automatic VMS Cover 4 25 VMS Cover Rings 4 26 a Telephone Button Programming 4 26 Assigning the Disallowed Phone Number List 4 22 VMS Cover 4 26 Line Coverage Extension 4 25 Initial Programming Overview This chapter identifies the four possible voice messaging system configurations It tells you how to perform initial programming of the voice messaging and communications systems The first two proced
202. ilboxes reset mailboxes and subscriber s passwords to factory settings assign cancel Outcalling privileges for a subscriber s mailbox and change the language a subscriber hears when using Voice Mail Service Line Coverage Allows you to modify line coverage using either VMS Line Coverage or Extension Line Coverage Telephone Button Programming Allows you to program buttons on subscriber s system phones for convenient use of voice messaging system features If you are a new System Manager you should review the following section for general information that you need to know in your new role You should use the rest of this chapter on an as needed basis Also if you have not done so already you should read for a description of the voice messaging system s features and services and Chapter 3 for an overview of voice messaging system and communications system programming System Management General Information This section tells you how to change the System Manager s password which is required for changing voice messaging system settings It also provides information that you should share with all system users and other information that is specifically for the receptionist at extension 10 Changing Your Password The factory setting for login 99 s the System Manager s Password is 1234 To prevent unauthorized programming of the system you should change the default password immediately after installation
203. imary Language Bilingual Prees 1 6 Mode No Modify Secondary Language Play Primary Play Press 2 6 Night Prompt Night Prompt Press 2 1 1 Press 2 1 Play Secondary Modify Night Prompt Night Prompt Press 2 1 2 Press _6 Modify Primary Night Prompt Press 6J 1 es ee Modify Secondary Night Prompt PressL6 J 2 Programming Flowchart REFER toJ CS Form B1fto identify the extensions for the PARTNER MAIL VS system Use Hunt Group Extensions 505 to assign the PARTNER MAIL VS extensions to Hunt Group 7 Use Transfer Return Extension 306 to specify extension 10 as the transfer return extension for each of the PARTNER MAIL VS extensions REFER to VMS Form 1jto see if the system should be programmed for Bilingual Mode No REFER to VMS Form ifto see if a different System Language is specified If so modify the System Language Key e CS Refers to the System Planner forms for the Communications System e VMS Refers to the forms for the Voice Messaging System e C Refers to the quick reference programming procedure for the Communications System e V Refers to a quick reference programming procedure for the Voice Messaging System Note C V procedures follow this flowchart Modify the Language Mode l REFER to VMS Form 1 to see if a different Primary Language is specified If so modify the Primary L
204. incwer semie nswer Service and Voice Mail Service Index E A Allowed Number List 4 23 Z O Announcements 1 6 5 18 5 21 __ Automated Attendant Announcement ial programming T A Automated Attendant Service Announcements communications system options factory set messages Music On Hold overview programming testing the operation of using Group Call Distribution for Automatic Extension Privacy A Automatic VMS Cover E B Button programming Do Not Disturb VMS Cover Voice Mail Messages 4 28 5 62 i Voice Mailbox Transfer 4 27 5 61 sid C Call Answer Service communications system options Changing language mailbox CO Line Coverage assigning Line Ownership 0 E Communications system programming dial plan for mailboxes dialpad overlays for 3 3 O entering programming mode 3 3 initial setup 4 1 4 19 o methods of 3 2 0 overview planning forms De D Day Menu Prompt H6 S y changing the description 1 6 factory set prompt al initial programming leti listening to 5 Extension coverage automatic immediate 1 manual overview Extensions transfer return 4 4 sd VMS Hunt Group 7 4 3 SSS O Extensions coverage manual H a F FCC information B1 _ _ IN 1 Index E EE e M G Group Call Distribution for Automated Attendant Service for CO Line Coverage initial programmi
205. ion Day Menu Prompts and Announcements To define the Automated Attendant Service menu as specified on Form 3 and to record the Day Menu Prompts for the Primary and Secondary Languages specified on Form and 4A and the Automated Attendant Announcement s specified on Form 3B follow this procedure It is important to understand that you must approve each element that is the Menu Definition the Day Menu Prompt and any Announcements as well as save all of these entries in Step 22 If you exit at any point before saving your approved entries your entries will be lost This procedure is designed to ensure that callers do not hear the incomplete menu while you are in the process of building modifying it Be sure to allow yourself enough time to complete this procedure in its entirety 1 If necessary access the Programming Main Menu If you are already at the Programming Main Menu skip to Step 2 a Press Intercom Z Z Zz or the programmed VMMsgs button b Press 9 9 c Enter the Mailbox Password and press d Press 9 Press 3 for Automated Attendant 2 3 Press 1 for Day Menu 4 Press 6 to modify the Menu Definition and or Day Menu Prompts 5 Enter a Selector Code for which information is specified in Column C of Form 3 If Column C is empty skip to Step 10 Press 9 to confirm that you are modifying this Selector Code action D 7 Do one of the following Press
206. ion Privacy 304 on 3 Write T for touch tone or R for rotary If Call Waiting is desired check next column E Check corresponding alert extensions in next column To prevent outside calls remove all outside lines see 4 Must be standard phone If immedate dialing is required use a dedicated line Do not assign restrictions that Lines Pools Not Assigned on Form B2 prevent dialing the outside number Forced Account Code Entry 307 or groups Also see Form D External 9 Also write Transfer Return Ext No 306 on this form Hotline 31 1 5 Standard phone is recommended Write extension number of corresponding alert extension or 70 for loud speaker paging system in next column Lucent Technologies Ropa Bell Labs Innovations Identify Telephone d a Write Name Description Button Display 2 intercom Autodialer Extemal Hotline 311 4 Hotline 603 gt Alert Extension 12 Button Display Cordless Wireless If checked see If there is a mix of PARTNER model and MLS model phones write P for PARTNER and M for MLS Write T for touch tone or R for rotary If Call Waiting is desired check next column Must be standard phone If immediate dialing is required use a dedicated line Do not assign restrictions that prevent dialing the outside number Forced Account Code Entry 307 or groups Also see Form D JExternal Hotline 311
207. ion et de s curit des r seaux de t lecommunications Le Minist re n assure toutefois pas que le mat riel fonctionnera a la satisfaction de utilisateur Avant d installer ce mat riel l utilisateur doit s assurer qu il est permis de le raccorder aux installations de l entreprise locale de t l ecommunication Le mat riel doit galement tre install en suivant une m thode accept e de raccordement Dans certains cas les fils int rieurs de l enterprise utilis s pour un service individuel a ligne unique peuvent tre prolong s au moyen d un dispositif homologu de raccordement cordon prolongateur t l phonique interne L abonn ne doit pas oublier qu il est possible que la conformit aux conditions nonc es ci dessus n emp chent pas la d gradation du service dans certaines situations Actuellement les entreprises de t l communication ne permettent pas que lon raccorde leur mat riel a des jacks d abonn sauf dans les cas pr cis pr vus pas les tarifs particuliers de ces entreprises Les r parations de mat riel homologu doivent tre effectu es par un centre d entretien canadien autoris d sign par le foumisseur La compagnie de t l communications peut demander a l utilisateur de d brancher un appareil la suite de r parations ou de modifications effectu es par l utilisateur ou cause de mauvais fonctionnement Pour sa propre protection l utilisateur doit s assurer que tous les fil
208. ions 2 Press 3 for Automated Attendant The system plays To program the Day Menu press 1 For the Night Menu press 2 If finished press 3 Press 1 J The system plays To play the menu press 2 to modify the menu press 6 If finished press 5 24 System Management Press 6 The system plays Pleas nter a selector code from 1 to 9 When finished modifying the Menu Definition press If you want to modify only the Day Menu Prompt go to Step 10 Otherwise continue with Step 6 Enter a Selector Code from 1 through 9 The system plays the current Selector Code Action or Announcement Number and Announcement then asks Do you want to make a modification Press 9 to confirm or 6 to cancel Press 9 to confirm that you want to modify this Selector Code The system plays For selector code transfer press 1 for announcement press 3 for direct extension transfer press 5 At this point do one of the following lf you want to return the Selector Code to the factory setting direct extension transfer for Selector Code 1 through 8 and transfer to receptionist s mailbox for Selector Code 9 press 5 Repeat Steps 6 through 8 for each Selector Code you want to modify Go to Step 10 If you want to assign a different extension or group to the Selector Code press 1 then enter the desired extension or group number followed by Repeat Steps 6 through 8 for each Sel
209. ions F ermissigng Group Assignments it Different than De If Different than Default If Different than Defaults l z 8 i 8 ry 2 te i Write line numbers for Line Access Restriction g S a gp 2 Write line numbers in each column to show desired 52 Qj k S Bi iS 2 Ig Line Ringing options 302 J Blo oS lo l 5 Sle 2 Slo lt Sc pe ZElSalsulsel g Slasa 2 2 2 as gt 5 2 22 G5 oO5 S Sizes s P GSlol ssle SS ee Pol SE BElS3 o3 5 215 85 lt e2 8 SE L egez No RestrictionY o 2 2 P12 ol Esl Ee Diniz 8 5 ea 8 2 ejz BB IER 5 6 283 L2al2el se S ke S L2 sig ES SIBYIE lEsleg eoclod t2 fawHOou rw S z26 yesa Ssa seis i 1 8 1 8 1 4 1 41 61 7 l lz l2 056 Outgoing Incoming No Access NRW NAV Immediate Delayed No Ring onl NAV NAV NAV Ev NAV Av NAv Av NAv NAV Not Assigned only y I 10 Y I 11 Y Oo E M S E l e a N 12 v SE EH ee Se RRS 13 v SE TS es es Cas 14 4 a es QQ GG 15 v Se EE Oe eS S CTO Co a 16 m QO GO 17 m Ce CEC ri 18 I 19 ES Se FS 20 SS Re Ey FR 21 a E E E a a a 22 m CG 23 in 24 I 25 l 26 l 27 l Write S for Spanish or F for French E Wee group nomad hea cent ea ae Sasa Sr Use Line Assignment 301 to remove lines from or assign lines to rite group number 1 4 If a loudspeaker is connected an imultaneous Faging Is desired R extensions 9 wao put appropriate extensions in Calling Group 1 Also see Form
210. ired check next column 7 4 Must be standard phone If immediate dialing is required use a dedicated line Do not assign restrictions that 8 prevent dialing the outside number Forced Account Code Entry 307 or groups Also see Form D External Hotline 31 1 Standard phone is recommended Write extension number of corresponding alert extension or 70 for loud speaker paging system in next column 10 Also write Transfer Return Ext No 306 on this form usually extension 10 Also see Form B2 Identify Group Assignments VMS Only To prevent other extensions from interrupting calls assign Automatic Extension Privacy 304 on Check corresponding alert extensions in next column To prevent outside calls remove all outside lines see Lines Not Assigned on 9 Also write Transfer Return Ext No 306 on this form Write 1 2 or B for Both to identify which Contact Closure the extension can activate Lucent Technologies Bell Labs Innovations XN Form B2 Customized Extension Settings Required if you want to change extension settings from defaults For additional instructions see pages 6 and 7 404 Write list number 1 8 Also see Form D Allowed Phone Number Lists 407 i icti isai Identify F te er Restrictions Permission Identify Extension Settings Identify Line Ringing CTP Option Monty Mestrict
211. isplay phones reveal the programmed numbers Educate employees that hackers may try to trick them into providing them with dial tone or dialing a number for them Overview Ask users to tell you if any of the following suspicious activity occurs inability to log into Voice Mail lost mail messages or altered greetings inability to get an outside line series of calls where there is silence on the other end or the caller hangs up sudden increase in wrong numbers caller complaints that your lines are busy callers claiming to represent the phone company Ask for a callback number callers trying to obtain sensitive information or asking for assistance in placing outside or long distance calls Ask for a callback number increases in internal requests for assistance in making outside calls particularly international calls or requests for dial tone a Make users with Outcalling privileges aware of the potential risks and their responsibilities Never distribute the office telephone directory to anyone outside the company Collect old office telephone directories and shred them Never discuss your telephone system s numbering plan with anyone outside your company a Any time a call appears to be suspicious call the Technical Service Center at 1 800 628 2888 in the U S 1 17 Installation Contents Before You Start Installing the PARTNER MAIL VS Module 2
212. ive Hold F 02 ExHold g Fax Management I XX FAX XX Group Calling Ring Page 17 G or 1 7 G GCall g Group Hunt Ring Signal 1 77 G or 1 77 G Hunt g Specify Automatic Line Selection Group Pickup a 66 G Pi smal g i i Intercom Autodial I XX or 1 XX xt XX Identify extensions programmed as shown a LNR Last Number Redial F 05 Loudspeaker Paging I 70 Loudspk Manual Signaling F 13 XX or F 13 XX MS XX Message Light Off F 10 XX MsgOff XX Message Light On F 09 XX MsgOn XX Recall F 03 Recall Save Number Redial F 04 SNR Simultaneous Paging 70 SPage Station Lock F 21 Lock Touch Tone Enable F 08 TT EN Voice Mail Messages I 777 VMMsgs 777 Voice Mailbox Transfer F 14 VMBox F Feature button G Group I Left Intercom button L Line XX Extension i Button with lights is recommended but not required 2 You can program the origination extension only or both the origination and destination extension 3 Extension number can be programmed as Auto Dial button 4 You can program the extension number PAGE O Form D Number Lists Lucent Technologies Required if Form B2 identifies Disallowed or Allowed List Assignments For additional instructions see page 14 Disallowed Phone Number Lists 404 Required only if Disallowed List Assignment 405 is specified on Write the telephone numbers that users are prevented from dialing List 1 List 2 List
213. ks in the PARTNER MAIL VS column indicate that the PARTNER MAIL VS module is installed in Slot 4 of the Control Unit The module uses extensions 32 and 33 the last two extensions for that slot 10 in the Write Transfer Return Ext No column indicates that when a call transferred by the PARTNER MAIL VS system is unanswered it goes to extension 10 where Vera can answer it CS Form B2 Page 1 of 2 Automatic VMS Cover Checks in this column indicate that unanswered calls to extensions 10 through 19 automatically are covered by the Automated Attendant Service Hunt Group Extensions VMS Only In this column check marks for extensions 32 and 33 satisfy the requirement that the extensions used by the PARTNER MAIL VS module be assigned to Hunt Group 7 Automatic Extension Privacy In this column check marks for the extensions used by the PARTNER MAIL VS module indicate that Automatic Extension Privacy is assigned to these extensions This feature prevents subscribers from accidentally picking up calls that are being answered by the voice mail system CS Form C1 PARTNER 34D Phone The first Form C1 identifies the buttons programmed on the PARTNER 34D phone at extension 10 Night Service Do Not Disturb Voice Mail Messages and Voice Mailbox Transfer The Night Service button allows Vera to turn Night Service on and off When Night Service is off the Day Menu Prompt plays When Night Service is on the Night Menu Prompt plays
214. l Information Factory defaults are identified by the symbol m lf the system is set for Bilingual Mode make sure you record the Automated Attendant Day Menu Prompts and Night Menu Prompts and Announcements if any in both the Primary and Secondary Languages Also subscribers can record two personal greetings one in the Primary Language and another in the Secondary Language m Subscribers can have a Mailbox Language different from the languages selected here Mailbox Language is specified on Bilingual Mode Primary Language Bilingual Mode Secondary Language Completing this Form Language Mode Check Bilingual if the Language Mode should be set to Bilingual If you check Bilingual also see below if not see Monolingual Mode System Language Check the Primary language desired if different from the default C Bilingual Mode Primary Language Check the Primary Language desired if different from the default Bilingual Mode Secondary Language Check the Secondary Language desired if different from the default Programming Language m To program the Language Mode as well as the System Language in Monolingual Mode or the Primary and Secondary Languages in Bilingual Mode dial 1 from the Programming Main Menu Form 2 Mailbox Assignments Q Mailbox Subscriber Name Mailbox Outcalling Language Assigned General Information m Factory defaults are identified by the Y sy
215. lcome should introduce the company For example Thank you for calling the Any Travel Agency m If the system is set for Bilingual Mode let callers know they can switch the language they hear while on the call For example Para espa ol marque 1 m The menu options should contain instructions that correspond to the Menu Definition set up on Form 3 If callers can dial extension numbers Direct Extension Transfer the prompt should instruct callers to dial the extension number For example If you know the extension of the person you want to reach dial it now lf callers can dial a single digit to transfer to an extension or group Selector Code Transfer the prompt should provide instructions such as To speak to someone in sales press 6 If callers can can choose an Announcement include that information For example For directions to our office press 4 It is recommended that you keep the number of menu options to 5 or less to avoid confusing the caller Completing this Form Write the message that you want callers to hear when they call during normal business hours including the instructions to the caller for selecting menu options Suggested options include m Remain on the line for assistance Dial 0 for assistance To hear this menu again dial 4 Recording the Day Menu Prompt m To record the Day Menu Prompt dial 3 from the Programming
216. line 311 Cordless Wireless Extemal Hotline 311 4 Hotline 603 5 Standard phone is recommended Write extension number of corresponding alert extension or 70 for loud speaker paging system in next column Alert Extension for Hotline 9 10 Form B1 System Extensions c Required for PARTNER Advanced Communications System For additional instructions see page 5 Identify Auxiliary Equipment Attached to this Extension y Write Transfer Return Ext No 306 Write in Other Equipment one 1 604 ph Contact Closure Group 612 19 PARTNER MAIL amp PARTNER MAIL VS Answering Machine PassageWay FAX Machine Extension 601 Alert Extensions 606 for Doo Doorphone 2 605 _ _ Alert Extensions 606 for Doorphone 2 AA Extension 607 9 Doo Also write Transfer Return Ext No 306 on this form usually extension 10 Also see Form B2 Identify Group Assignments VMS Only To prevent other extensions from interrupting calls assign Automatic Extension Privacy 304 on Form B2 Check corresponding alert extensions in next column To prevent outside calls remove all outside lines see Lines Not Assigned on Form B2 Also write Transfer Return Ext No 306 on this form Write 1 2 or B for Both to identify which Contact Closure the extension can activate F
217. llation Date 14 Order Nos 15 Sales Support Representative s Name Telephone No Form B1 System Extensions Lucent Technologies Required for PARTNER II System and PARTNER Plus System peewee For additional instructions see page 5 Identify Telephone Identify Auxiliary Equipment 3 j j Attached to this Extension Write Transfer Write in Return Other Ext No Equipment 306 PARTNER MAIL Alert Extensions 606 External Hotline 311 4 for Doorphone 2 AA Extension 607 9 Hotline 60315 Intercom Autodialer Cordless Wireless PARTNER MAIL VS Answering Machine _ Doorphone 1 604 8 Doorphone 2 605 8 Standard 3 34 Button Display 18 Button Call Waiting 316 Alert Extension for Hotline PassageWay for Doorphone 1 IMPORTANT A system display phone is required for programming at extension 10 or 11 Extension 10 typically is the receptionist s extension Extension 11 is recommended as a second programming extension typically the yee Manager s extension Also write Transfer Return Ext No 306 on this form usually extension 10 Also see Form B2 Identify 1 If checked see Form B1 Page 3 of 4 Group Assignments VMS Only 2 If there is a mix of PARTNER model and MLS model phones write P for PARTNER and M for MLS 7 To prevent other extensions from interrupting calls assign Automatic Extens
218. low VMS Line Coverage To assign VMS Mail lines checked on Form A Page 1 Line Coverage to Hunt Group 7 1 Press 2 o s 2 Atthe Group prompt press z 3 Atthe Line prompt enter the first line checked in the VMS Mail column 4 Press Next Data until the display reads 3 VMS Line Cover 5 To program another line press Next Item or Prev Item until the appropriate line number displays 6 Press Next Data until the display reads 3 VMS Line Cover 7 Repeat Steps 5 and 6 for each VMS Mail line checked on Form A 8 If extension numbers are specified for any lines in this column use the following procedure in Line Coverage Extension Otherwise continue with the section Automatic VMS Cover In some countries the procedure code for Group Call Distribution is 205 Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system 4 24 Initial icles Line Coverage Extension To assign line coverage for the extension numbers specified in the VMS Mail column on Form A Page 1 Line Coverage 1 Press 2 o 8 2 Atthe Line prompt enter the first line for which an extension is specified in the VMS Mail column of Form A Page 1 Line Coverage 3 Atthe Data prompt enter the number of the extension specified in the VMS Mail column 4 To program another line press Next item or Prev item until the appropriate line number displays 5 Atthe Data prompt
219. m If the system is set for Bilingual Mode make sure you record the Automated Attendant Day Menu Prompts and Night Menu Prompts and Announcements if any in both the Primary and Secondary Languages Also subscribers can record two personal greetings one in the Primary Language and another in the Secondary Language m Subscribers can have a Mailbox Language different from the languages selected here Mailbox Language is specified on Monolingual Mode System Language Completing this Form Q Language Mode Check Billingual if the Language Mode should be set to Bilingual If you check Bilingual also see below if not see Monolingual Mode System Language Check the Primary language desired if different from the default Billingual Mode Primary Language Check the Primary Language desired if different from the default Billingual Mode Secondary Language Check the Secondary Language desired if different from the default Programming Language To program the Language Mode as well as the System Language in Monolingual Mode or the Primary and Secondary Languages in Bilingual Mode dial 1 from the Programming Main Menu Form 2 Mailbox Assignments Q Mailbox Subscriber Name Mailbox Outcalling Language Assigned ese e Giv w e O a o ey ea O l wv Prog 18v 19v 20V 21 Vv 22 v 23V 24v 25V General Information Factory defaults are identified by the Y
220. m from Lucent Technologies Business Day service is included in your lease To upgrade to Around the Clock service call 1 800 247 7000 in the continental U S only If you purchased or leased your system through a Lucent Technologies Authorized Dealer contact your dealer for repairs Warranty Information Lucent Technologies Warranty and Limitation of Liability Lucent Technologies warrant you the customer that your system will be in good working order on the date Lucent Technologies or its authorized reseller delivers or installs the system whichever is later Warranty Date If you notify Lucent Technologies or its Authorized Dealer within one year of the Warranty Date that your system is not in good working order Lucent Technologies will without charge to you repair or replace at its option the system components that are not in good working order Repair or replacement parts may be new or refurbished and will be provided on an exchange basis If Lucent Technologies determines that your system cannot be repaired or replaced Lucent Technologies will remove the system and at your option refund the purchase price of your system or apply the purchase price towards the purchase of another Lucent Technologies system If you purchased your system directly from Lucent Technologies Lucent Technologies will perform warranty repair in accordance with the terms and conditions of the specific type of Lucent Technologies maintenance cover
221. mbol m The system comes with a predetermined number of mailboxes The optional Mailbox Expansion Card doubles the capacity m Mailbox 10 is reserved for the receptionist at extension 10 and cannot be changed m Mailbox 10 provides 60 minutes of message recording time All other mailboxes provide 20 minutes of message recording time m For system security mailboxes should be deleted where they are not needed for example mailboxes should be deleted for extensions in use by auxiliary equipment such as a fax or doorphone and the extensions assigned to the VMS Hunt Group Guest mailboxes can be created for users who don t have their own phone by assigning an unused extension number as the mailbox number Unused extension numbers include 1 vacant extension jacks in installed 206 modules and 2 extensions in your DIAL plan higher than the last extension jack in the last installed 206 module See Guest Mailboxes in Chapter 5 for more information Q Mailbox Subscriber Name Mailbox Outcalling Language Assigned guag a a a a a aS a ae a a os a eS se ee Ss ei a a Completing this Form Mailbox To assign a mailbox to an extension other than the factory default cross out the factory default and write in the extension to be used m For PARTNER PLUS use an extension number from 11 33 m For PARTNER Advanced Communications System use an extension number from 11 41 m For PAR
222. n extension You can program the extension number Form C2 Intercom Autodialer For additional instructions PARTNER II only see page 9 Lucent Technologies Bell Labs Innovations Sn SAMPLE Template Instructions e If desired write in Intercom Ring Ext XX or Voice Signal ExtVS XX or Manual Signal Ring MS XX or Voice Signal MSVS XX If desired write in user name for this extension Extensions programmed as shown circle choices 10 11 Lucent Technologies Bell Labs Innovations S Template Instructions e If desired write in line number pool access code dial code feature or auto dial number If desired write in Line Ringing Imm Del or No from e If desired write in Line Access Restriction or Pool Access Restriction Out In or No from C o Intercom A For PARTNER II systems in Hybrid mode only if pool 880 is assigned these two buttons are associated with this pool SAMPLE Form C3 PARTNER 18 Phone Make as many copies as you need Use template and or checklist For additional instructions see page 8 Check Desired Features Also write in extension or group number Night Service Button 503 NightSvc AUO OL Xa Outgoing Call Restriction Button 114 m Wake Up Service Button 115 D Caller ID Inspect F 17 ID Inspect Caller ID Name Display F 16 ID Name 3 Do Not Disturb F 01 DND Privacy F 07 Priv PARTNER
223. n where they ring until answered Automated Attendant Service Scenarios 1 10 The following sample scenarios illustrate typical ways in which Automated Attendant Service is set up with the communications system features Case 1 The receptionist is the primary call handler Automated Attendant Service handles overflow a Use Group Call Distribution 206 Setting 1 to identify the lines to be answered by Automated Attendant Service b Set VMS Hunt Schedule 507 to Always c Set VMS Hunt Delay 506 to Delayed Case 2 Automated Attendant Service is the primary call handler a Use Group Call Distribution 206 Setting 1 to identify the lines to be answered by Automated Attendant Service b Set VMS Hunt Schedule 507 to Always c Set VMS Hunt Delay 506 to Immediate d Set Automatic Extension Privacy 304 to Assigned for all PARTNER MAIL VS extensions When VMS Hunt Delay is set to Immediate you can use this feature to prevent users from accidentally picking up calls sent to the voice mail system a Case 3 The receptionist answers calls during the day Automated Attendant Service answers calls at night a Use Group Call Distribution 206 Setting 1 to identify the lines to be answered by Automated Attendant Service b Set VMS Hunt Schedule 507 to Night Only c Set VMS Hunt Delay 506 to Immediate Overview Music On Hold If you use Automated Attendant Service you also may want to use the
224. n line number dial code feature or auto dial number e If desired write in Line Ringing Imm Del or No from Form B2 e If desired write in Line Access Restriction Out In or No from Form B2 Intercom Intercom ae Specify Automatic Line Selection Identify extensions programmed as shown Outgoing Call Restriction Button 114 Wake Up Service Button 115 Caller ID Inspect F 17 Caller ID Name Display F 16 Do Not Disturb F 01 Privacy F 07 a pauinbay G37 VMS Cover F 15 VMSCover Background Music F 19 Music 4 Requires Call Forwarding Call Follow Me F 11 XX XX CF XX XX Auto Dial Call Park I XX puttan Tor Call Pickup I 6 XX ickup extension Conference Drop F 06 2 woe Contact Closure 1 F 41 recom Contact Closure 2 F 42 Pearce Direct Line Pickup Active Line I 68 3 Extension Direct Line Pickup Idle Line 8 number can Exclusive Hold F 02 ao AER Fax Management I XX Auto Dial Group Calling Ring Page I 7 G or I 7 G 4 ee Group Hunt Ring Signal I 77 G or 1 77 G program the Group Pickup I 66 G orgneron Intercom Autodial I XX or I XX only or both Last Number Redial F 05 te origina Loudspeaker Paging I 70 destination Manual Signaling F 13 XX or F 13 XXj extension 5 You can Message Light Off F 10 XX program the Message Light On F 09 XX
225. n unused mailbox for deletion without assigning an extension cross out the factory default Subscriber Name For every mailbox in use write the name of the mailbox subscriber Mailbox Language For each mailbox that requires a language different from the System Language or Primary Language indicated on Form 1 write the name of the language in this space Supported languages are listed on Form 1 Outcalling Assigned For each mailbox in use indicate whether Outcalling is assigned Programming Mailboxes You can change a mailbox assignment by deleting an existing mailbox and creating a new one m To program mailboxes dial 4 from the Programming Main menu Form 3 Menu Definition Required for Automated Attendant Service Q Selector Code Description Range of Extensions Ext or Group for for Direct Extension Selector Code Transfer Transfer or Announcement D Aa Trarsier a ww Direct Extension Transfer L ee 20 29 v Po pf www l y O Customer Service Fapa Oo ee Biling Dept Rosa C e o r oom O Oooo e p S General Information m Factory defaults are identified by the symbol m This Menu Definition applies to both the Day and Night Menu prompts m The Selector Code is the first digit dialed by the caller in response to the menu prompts m In Direct Extension Transfer Selector Codes 1 5 and 7 represent the first digit for a range of extensions These Selector Codes let
226. n you change the Language Mode the system continues to use any recorded messages associated with the selected language For example if you change from Monolingual to Bilingual Mode and the System Language in Monolingual Mode was Latin American Spanish callers will hear Latin American Spanish as the Primary Language Also when you change the mode listen to the Automated Attendant Service Day and Night Menu Prompts to make sure they are still relevant and re record them if necessary To change the Language Mode 1 Access the Programming Main Menu a Press Intercom z z z or the programmed VMMsgs button b Press 9 9 c Enter the Password and press d Press 9 The system plays the system programming options 2 Press 1 for Language The system plays To program Language Mode press 1 To program System Language press 2 If finished press 3 Press 1 for Language Mode The system plays the current Language Mode then For Monolingual Mode press 1 For Bilingual Mode press 2 If finished press 5 9 System Management Either Press 1 for Monolingual Mode The system plays System is in Monolingual Mode To program Language Mode press 1 To program System Language press 2 If finished press Press 2 for Bilingual Mode The system plays System is in Bilingual Mode To program Language Mode press 1 To program System Language press 2 If finished
227. nd Music F 19 Music Call Forwarding Call Follow Me F 11 XX XX CF XX XX Call Park I XX Park 1 Requires 7 Pickup XX Auto Dial Call Pickup I 6 XX ickup EURF Or Conference Drop F 06 Drop each f g 1 extension Contact Closure 1 F 41 cel Button with Contact Closure 2 F 42 cc2 lights is CR reg rar DLPA recom Direct cine Pickup Active Line I 68 mended but Direct Line Pickup Idle Line I 8 DLPI not required Exclusive Hold F 02 ExHold 3 cet tot number can Fax Management I XX FAX XX be pro Group Calling Ring Page I7 G or 1 7 G GCall g grammed i Group Hunt Ring Signal l 77 G or 1 77 G button Group Pickup I66 G P U Grp g 4 You can Intercom Autodial I XX or I XX Ext XX program the origination Last Number Redial F 05 LNR extension Loudspeaker Paging I 70 Loudspk A or both Manual Signaling F 13 XX or F 13 XX MS XX origination i 5 MsgOff XX and Message Light Off F 10 XX g destination Message Light On F 09 XX MsgOn XX extension Recall F 03 Recall 5 You can SNR program the extension Simultaneous Paging 70 SPage number Station Lock F 21 Lock Touch Tone Enable F 08 TT EN Voice Mail Messages Button 1 777 VMMsgs 777 Voice Mailbox Transfer F 14 VMBox Specify Automatic Line Selection Identify extensions programmed as shown F Feature button G Group I Left Intercom button XX Extension Form C2 Intercom Autodialer Make as many copies as you need
228. ne Coverage After assigning Extension Line Coverage make sure VMS coverage is on for the extension See Automatic VMS Cover Jearlier in this chapter or VMS Cover later in this chapter Use this procedure to modify the assignment of outside lines for Extension Line Coverage To assign VMS MAIL lines specified on Form A Page 1 Line Coverage to specific extensions 1 AA OU PY Press Feature o 0 System Program System Program Enter System Password if required Press 2 o a Atthe Line prompt enter the first VMS MAIL line to be programmed as indicated by the extension number in the Line Coverage column of Form A Page 1 Atthe Data prompt enter the number of the extension in the VMS MAIL column To program another line press Next Item or Prev item until the appropriate line number displays Then repeat Step 5 Press Feature 0 0 to exit programming This feature is not available on all systems Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system System Management Telephone Button Programming Update Form Clof the System Planner for the communications system if you change button programming for a subscriber s extension It is recommended that the following features be programmed on buttons on each subscriber s system phone a VMS Cover allows the subscriber to manually turn on and off voice mail c
229. ned 2 Not Assigned 3 Select button then PRESS a programmable button to assign Night Service to that button If you use option 3 after a Night Service button has been assigned the Night Service button moves from the old button to the new button you select AUTOMATIC EXTENSION PRIVACY DIAL 304 DIAL the extension number DIAL 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned PRESS _Next Item to program another extension Some systems allow programming from extension 11 Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system t In some countries the procedure code for Transfer Return Extension is 309 Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system tt In some countries the procedure code for Group Call Distribution is 205 Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system Kk system Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system Line Coverage Extension 208 VMS Cover Rings 117 and option 3 of the Night Service Button 503 procedure may not be available on your PARTNER MAIL VS System Programming Reference To Program the Communications System for PARTNER MAIL VS Place the Programming Overlay on the dial pad of the system display phone at extension 10 TO START CENTRALIZED TELEPHONE PROGRAMMING PRESS Feature 0 0 PRESS System Program System Program PRESS _ Central Tel Program DIAL the extension number to be programmed
230. nfusing the caller Completing this Form Write the message that you want callers to hear when they call during normal business hours including the instructions to the caller for selecting menu options Suggested options include m Remain on the line for assistance Dial 0 for assistance To hear this menu again dial 4 Recording the Day Menu Prompt To record the Day Menu Prompt dial 3 from the Programming Main Menu Form 5 Night Menu Prompt System Language or Primary Language Required if VMS Hunt Schedule is set to Night Only or Always General Information The Night Menu Prompt plays to callers when the VMS Hunt Schedule is set to Night Only or Always and Night Service is on The Night Menu Prompt and the Day Menu Prompt use the same Menu Definition m The Night Menu Prompt should contain a welcome and a list of menu options m The welcome should introduce the company For example You have reached the Any Travel Agency Our hours are 9 AM to 5 PM Monday through Friday m lf the system is set for Bilingual Mode let callers know they can switch the language they hear while on the call For example Para espanol marque 1 m The menu options should contain instructions that correspond to the Menu Definition set up on Form 3 If callers can dial extension numbers Direct Extension Transfer the prompt should instruct callers to dial the extension
231. ng overview Guest mailboxes creating deleting for receptionist overview E H Helpline Hunt Group I Immediate call handing 1 9 _____ Installation guidelines Mailbox Expansion Card voice messaging system module EE K Key sequences ki SSS E L Line Ownership and Group Call Distribution and mailbox deletion assigning changing checking deleting initial programming Login for voice messaging system 3 5 IN 2 M Mailbox Expansion Card description I id Mailboxes assigning Outcalling privileges capacity checking the status of creating deleting dial plan for 5 39 for guests initial programming 4 15 4 16 ___ overview 5 36 S60 re initializing Main menu 3 6 Manual VMS Cover 1 12 Cd Menu definition changing the description N Night Menu Prompt changing the description factory set prompt 1 7 initial programming 4 10 4 13 _ S listening to sample message 5 21__ o Night Service initial programming overview D O Outcalling guidelines 5 3 verfying operation Outcalling privileges assigning removing Outcalling Call Restriction Index P PARTNER MAIL VS Release 4 features Password for subscribers forthe System Manager 5 2 iY reinitializing 5 45 ooo O Personal greeting 1 13 o SSS O Planning forms communication
232. ng I 70 Loudspk only or both econ Ay eee Manual Signaling F 13 XX or F 13 XX MS XX A o ae Message Light Off F 10 XX MsgOff XX and 5 destination Message Light On F 09 XX MsgOn XX Saon Recall F 03 Recall You can Save Number Redial F 04 SNR program the Specify Automatic Line Selection Simultaneous Paging I 70 SPage nn or Identify extensions programmed as shown Station Lock F 21 Lock Touch Tone Enable F 08 TT EN Voice Mail Message Button I 777 VMMsgs 777 Voice Mailbox Transfer F 14 VMBox F Feature button G Group I Left Intercom button XX Extension Form C6 MLS 18D Phone Lucent Technologies Bell Labs Innovations Make as many copies as you need Use template and or checklist For additional instructions see pages 8 through 13 Check Desired Features Also write in extension or group number SAMPLE Night Se e Button 50 OCR T late I Outgoing Call Restriction Button 114 enka instructions Wake Up Service Button 115 Wake m e f desired write in line number dial code feature or auto dial number ID Inspect oO if desired write in Line Ringi Del No f F BD Caller ID Inspect F 17 D Bale write i ine inging Imm el or No from Form B2 Caller ID Name Display F 16 ID Name fA e If desired write in Line Access Restriction Do Not Disturb F 01 DND Out In or No from Priv amp
233. ng up to quit Modifying the System Language Update Form 1 for the voice messaging system to show the change in the System Language selected for Monolingual Mode When you change the System Language the system uses any recorded messages already associated with the new System Language After changing the System Language listen to the Automated Attendant Service Day and Night Menu Prompts to make sure they are still relevant and re record them if necessary gt NOTE When you change the System Language the Mailbox Language for any mailboxes that were left at the factory setting also change to reflect the new System Language Any mailboxes that were assigned a different language do not change To change the System Language 1 Access the Programming Main Menu a Press intercom Z Z Zz or the programmed VMMsgs button b Press 2 9 c Enter the Password and press d Press 9 The system plays the system programming options 2 Press 1 for Language The system plays To program Language Mode press 1 TO program System Language press 2 If finished press 3 Press 2 for System Language The system plays To play System Language press 2 To modify System Language press 6 If finished press 5 11 System Managemen 5 12 Press 6 The system plays the current System Language then prompts you to enter the number corresponding to the desired language Press the
234. ngs and deletes any messages that were in the mailbox f you want to reassign a mailbox move a mailbox from the current extension to a different one first use Deleting a Mailbox then use Creating a Mailbox You may also need to perform these procedures when you increase the number of mailboxes as the result of upgrading the PARTNER MAIL VS configuration Keep in mind that you should always delete mailboxes from extensions to which you connect auxiliary equipment such as doorphones and fax machines to keep the maximum number of mailboxes available for subscribers a f a subscriber forgets his or her password use Reinitializing a Password to return the password to the factory setting 1234 a lf a subscriber would like to interact with Voice Mail Service using a language different from the one assigned to his or her mailbox use Modifying a Mailbox s Language f you want to activate or deactivate Outcalling for a subscriber s mailbox refer to As the default setting Outcalling privileges are denied Even after you activate Outcalling for a subscriber s mailbox the subscriber must also turn on this feature and specify an Outcalling number by following the procedure in Using the PARTNER MAIL VS Voice Messaging System Before you change mailbox assignments you should review the next two sections Hardware Considerations and Guest Mailboxes System Management Hardware Considerations
235. nished press 4 Press 2 for Secondary Language The system plays To play Secondary Language press 2 To modify Secondary Language press 6 If finished press 5 15 System Management 5 Press 2 The system plays Secondary language is LANGUAGE where LANGUAGE is the current language To play Secondary Language press 2 To modify Secondary Language press 6 If finished press 6 At this point do one of the following To change the Secondary Language go to Step 5 of Modifying the Secondary Language Press x z to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit Modifying the Secondary Language Update Form 1 for the voice messaging system to show the change in the Secondary Language selected for Bilingual Mode When you change the Secondary Language the system uses any recorded messages already associated with the new Secondary Language After changing the Secondary Language listen to the Automated Attendant Service Day and Night Menu Prompts to make sure they are still relevant re record them if necessary To change the Secondary Language 1 Access the Programming Main Menu a Press intercom z Zz z or the programmed VMMsgs button b Press 9 9 c Enter the Password and press d Press 9 The system plays the system programming options 2 Press 1 for Language The system plays To program Language Mode press 1 T
236. nished press 5 23 System Management 4 Press 2 The system plays To play the menu prompt press 1 To play the Menu Definition press 2 If finished press 5 To play the Menu Prompt press 1 The system plays the Day or Night Menu Prompt depending on your choice in Step 3 6 Press x Zz to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit Modifying the Menu Definition Day Menu Prompt and Announcements Update Forms 3 and 4 for the voice messaging system to show modifications to the Menu Definition and or Day Menu Prompt update Forms 3 and 3A for the voice messaging system to show modifications to the Announcements if any Then use the updated forms while performing the following procedure A CAUTION It is important to understand that you must approve each element that is the Menu Definition the Day Menu Prompt and any Announcements as well as save all of these entries in Step 15 If you exit at any point before saving your approved entries your entries will be lost This procedure is designed to ensure that callers do not hear the incomplete menu while you are in the process of modifying it To change the Menu Definition Day Menu Prompt and or Announcements 1 Access the Programming Main Menu a Press intercom Z Z zZ or the programmed VMMsgs button b Press 9 2 c Enter the Password and press d Press 9 The system plays the system programming opt
237. ns system is set up Menu Definition lets you specify the extensions or groups to which outside callers are transferred or the Announcements that callers hear The voice messaging system uses the Menu Definition for both day and night operation To set up the menu you define digits 1 through 9 called Selector Codes for the following types of call transfer Direct Extension Transfer This is the factory setting for selector codes 1 through 8 If you use the factory setting callers can enter an extension number directly from the menu For direct extension transfer the selector code represents a range of extensions For example selector code 1 allows outside callers to transfer directly to any extension that begins with a 1 extensions 10 19 For selector code 2 outside callers can transfer directly to any extension that begins with a 2 extensions 20 29 and so on Selector code 9 is different from selector codes 1 through 8 If you leave selector code 9 at the factory setting outside callers are transferred directly to the receptionist s mailbox where they can leave a message This is especially useful for night operation If you use it callers are routed directly to the receptionists mailbox the system does not ring the extension first Selector Code Transfer You can assign any of the selector codes to one specific extension or group Then when a caller presses the single digit selector code the system transfers the call
238. ntinue without programming Selector Codes PRESS to approve all changes TO CHANGE SELECTOR CODE TRANSFER TO DIRECT EXTENSION TRANSFER MONOLINGUAL MODE PRESS 1 for Day Menu PRESS 6 to modify ENTER a Selector Code 1 through 9 PRESS 9 to modify PRESS 5 for Direct Extension Transfer To program another Selector Code for Direct Extension Transfer repeat PRESS x L to approve PRESS _1 to record the Day Menu Prompt PRESS 1 after recording PRESS x to approve all change TO CHANGE SELECTOR CODE TRANSFER TO ANNOUNCEMENT MONOLINGUAL MODE PRESS 1 for Day Menu PRESS 6 to modify ENTER a Selector Code 1 through 9 PRESS 9 to modify PRESS 3 for Announcement ENTER an Announcement number PRESS 1 to record the Announcement PRESS _1 after recording PRESS x L to approve PRESS x 4 to continue without programming another Selector Code or To program another Selector Code repeat PRESS 1 to record the Day Menu Prompt PRESS 1 after recording PRESS x to approve all changes PARTNER MAIL VS System Programming Reference TO START PROGRAMMING PRESS Intercom Z Z Z PRESS 9 9 and L ENTER your Password factory setting is 1234 and L PRESS 9 to access the Programming Main Menu Automated Attendant REFER to Forms and 5A PRESS 3 to program Automated Attendant Service TO MODIFY THE MENU DEFINITION AND DAY MENU PROMPT
239. o program System Language press 2 If finished press 3 Press 2 for System Language The system plays To program Primary Language press 1 To program Secondary Language press 2 If finished press 4 Press 2 for Secondary Language The system plays To play Secondary Language press 2 To modify Secondary Language press 6 If finished press 5 16 System Management 5 Press 6 The system plays the current Secondary Language then prompts you to enter the number corresponding to the desired language 6 Press the number for the language you want to use The system plays For LANGUAGE where LANGUAGE is the current language press 9 to confirm or 6 to cancel 7 Either Press 6 to cancel your selection The system plays Secondary Language has not been changed Press 9 to confirm your selection The system plays Secondary Language has been changed 8 Press x z to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit 5 17 System Management a se ee Automated Attendant Service Automated Attendant Service see Figure 5 2 can provide both day and night operation so callers can hear an appropriate prompt in either the System or Primary Language when they call your company The voice messaging system switches to day or night operation depending on the setting of the Night Service button at extension 10 the receptionist s extension You can cu
240. o the voice messaging system GL 3 Glossary SS System Manager The person responsible for managing both the communications and voice messaging systems System phone A telephone that is specifically designed for use with PARTNER systems Models include the PARTNER 34D PARTNER 18D PARTNER 18 PARTNER 6 MLS 34D MLS 18D MLS 12 MLS 12D MLS 6 MDC 9000 and MDW 9000 phones System programming Procedures that allow you to customize the communications system settings System programming requires a system display phone and is done from extension 10 or 11 if available E T Telephone programming Customizes extensions to meet the needs of individual users including the assignment of features to programmable buttons Telephone Programming can be done either centrally or from the user s own extension See also Centralized Telephone Programming and Tutor A voice messaging system feature that lets any communications system user access and listen to information about their phone and commonly used communications system features 206 module A system module that contains jacks for connecting up to two outside lines and up to six extensions Me V VMS Cover button A button on a system phone that allows a subscriber to turn voice mail coverage on and off manually at that extension See also VMS Hunt Delay A communications system feature that lets you set the Automated Attendant to handle calls using either Immediate Call H
241. on announcement or group identified in below Ext or Group for Selector Code Transfer Write the extension announcement or group number to receive the transfer For Announcement A Description Write Announcement Range of Extensions for Direct Extension Transfer Cross out the factory default if you want the caller to dial the corresponding Selector Code to hear the Announcement identified in below Announcement Write the Announcement number 1 or 2 Form 3 Menu Definition TC E ee Programming the Menu m To program the menu definition dial 3 from the Programming Main Menu and select the Day Menu After defining the menu the system will prompt you to record the menu prompt See Form 4 for the Day Menu Prompt and Form 5 for the Night Menu Prompt for Bilingual Mode also see Forms 4A and 5A See Form 3A for Automated Attendant Announcement s for Bilingual Mode also see Form 3B Form 3A Automated Attendant Announcement System Language or Primary Language Required if Selector Code Transfer is set to Announcement Announcement Announcement General Information After the Announcement plays you can program the system to hang up or to offer callers the option of pressing 4 to repeat this Announcement 7 to return to the Main Menu 8 to transfer to an extension or 0 If the system is set for Bilingual Mode let callers know they can switch the language
242. on to verify system operation If your system allows programming from extension 11 you should perform these tests from extension 11 to keep extension 10 free for the receptionist to handle calls Voice Mail Service Make a call to the VMS Hunt Group by pressing Intercom z z z or the programmed VMMsgs button You should hear the Voice Mail Service greeting Welcome to PARTNER MAIL VS Pleas nter extension and Otherwise to access PARTNER Tutor press 4 Automated Attendant Service Day Menu If the VMS Hunt Schedule is set for Day Only or Always follow the procedure for Day Menu If the VMS Hunt Schedule is set for Night Only follow the procedure for Night Menu Make sure the Night Service button at extension 10 is off 2 Call in on a line answered by the Automated Attendant Service 3 If the system is set for Immediate Automated Attendant Service should answer the call on the second ring Delayed Automated Attendant Service should answer the call after the fourth ring Listen for the Day Menu Prompt 5 After the prompt choose an option from the day menu Make sure your call is transferred to the appropriate extension or group or the correct Announcement is played Repeat Steps 2 through 6 for each option on the day menu If the system is set for Bilingual Mode press x 1 to check the Day Menu Prompt in the Secondary Language You should also hear any r
243. onist to continue handling calls at extension 10 while you program System Programming changes settings for the system as a whole or for individual lines or extensions Refer to the Programming and Use guide for the communications system for more information about System Programming options On some communications systems a password may be required to enter System Programming mode Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system for more information 3 1 Understanding Programming Planning Forms Refer to the communications system s System Planner when you are changing system settings and be sure to record any changes you make The following forms from the System Planner contain information about the voice messaging system Form A System Configuration Contains basic information about the system including the line number and type of voice messaging service required for each line Form B1 System Extensions Contains basic information about each extension This includes the type of phone or auxiliary equipment at the extension and the name of the user or a description of how the extension is used Form B2 Customized Extension Settings Contains feature settings such as Automatic VMS Cover and Automatic Extension Privacy and group assignments for each extension Form C Button Assignments Specifies which features are programmed on buttons for each extension This includes VMS Cover Do Not Dis
244. ons 5 22 Modifying the Menu Definition Day Menu Prompt and Announcements 5 24 Modifying the Night Menu Prompt 5 26 Contents and Secondary Languages 5 28 Modifying the Menu Definition Day Menu Prompts and Announcements 5 30 Modifying a Mailbox s Language 5 48 z l Line Coverage 5 52 a VMS Line Coverage 5 53 Scanning Line Ownership 5 54 Assigning Line Ownership 5 55 m Deleting Line Ownership 5 57 Group Call Distribution 5 58 Extension Line Coverage 5 59 Modifying Line Ownership 5 56 5 ii System Management This chapter provides the programming procedures you can use to make changes to the voice messaging system to reflect changes in your company Most changes you make will occur because of personnel changes The following list identifies areas of system programming that you are likely to change as you manage the system on an on going basis Language Allows you to change the Language Mode Monolingual or Bilingual and the language s supported by that mode a Automated Attendant Service Allows you to change the prompt that outside callers hear when the Automated Attendant answers calls and to redefine menu options for transferring outside callers to specific destinations and for changing announcements that callers can choose to hear Also allows you to specify new lines for Automated Attendant Service coverage if you add new lines to your system m Allows you to delete and create ma
245. ons system 5 61 Svc Management Voice Mail Messages 5 62 This intercom Auto Dial button allows the subscriber to access the voice messaging system with one touch of a button To program a Voice Mail Messages button 1 2 3 4 5 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program Central Tel Program Enter the number of the extension to be programmed Press a programmable button Press Intercom 7 z Z Program another button for this extension or press Feature a a to exit programming mode Label the button at the user s extension Troubleshooting Contents When You Need Help 6 1 Automated Attendant Service 6 2 Outside Callers Hear Ringing but System Does Not Answer 6 2 Outside Callers Hear Silence Tones or Ringing During Transfer 6 3 m System Does Not Answer Immediately 6 3 System Cuts Off Part of Greeting 6 3 System Transfers Call to Receptionist Before Playing the Menu Prompt 6 3 i 6 6 i 6 6 Call Answer Service Call Answer Service Takes Too Long to Answer Calls Call Answer Service Terminates Message While Caller Is Recording 6 6 Subscriber Cannot Forward Messages to Another Subscriber 6 8 Cannot Switch Between Primary and Secondary Languages 6 11 Cannot Understand Language Prompts 6 11 Troubleshooting When You Need Help If you have a problem with your system you may be able to solve it
246. or Code Transfer to Selector Codes 1 and 2 rather than starting the assignment from 3 you could request callers to press x 8 to allow them to transfer to extensions 10 to 25 m As shown in the sample Day Menu Prompt you can also instruct a caller to stay on the line for assistance If so the voice messaging system automatically transfers the call to the receptionist s extension This option is especially important for callers who have rotary phones As shown in the sample Day Menu Prompt callers can press o at any time to transfer automatically to the receptionist s extension for assistance m f the system is set for Bilingual Mode callers can press 2 to switch between the Primary and Secondary Languages In this case you must record two messages for the Day and Night Menu Prompts and Automated Attendant Announcements one each in the Primary and Secondary Languages Monolingual Mode Playing the Menu Definition and Announcements This procedure lets you listen to the current Menu Definition and any Announcement associated with a Selector Code The Menu Definition is accessed through the Day Menu To play the current menu definition 1 Access the Programming Main Menu a Press Intercom 7 Z 7Z or the programmed VMMsgs button b Press 9 9 c Enter the Password and press d Press 9 The system plays the system programming options 2 Press 3 for Automated Attendant The s
247. or any time the password has been reset You can assign up to four digits for a Password It is recommended that you create a Password from random non sequential digits If you change the Password and forget it you must contact the BCS Technical Service Center at 1 800 628 2888 or call your Lucent Technologies Representative or local Authorized Dealer for instructions on how to reset the Password To change the Password for login 99 1 Press intercom z z z or the programmed VMMsgs button 2 Press 9 9 3 Enter the existing password for example 1234 and press 4 Press 5 to change the password The prompt asks you to enter your new password 5 Enter up to four digits for the new password and press The prompt asks you to re enter your new password 6 Enter your new password again followed by The new password is now active 7 Hang up to quit 5 2 System Management Training Co Workers Language You should let system users know about the following language options Outcalling You can change the language of voice prompts that a subscriber hears when recording a personal greeting retrieving messages and other Voice Mail services This language can be different from the System Language set for Monolingual Mode or the Primary and Secondary Languages set for Bilingual Mode If the system is set for Bilingual Mode subscribers can record two personal greetings one in the Primary Langua
248. or her desk Voice Mail Service This service allows subscribers to manage their own mailboxes With it a subscriber can Listen to messages then save or delete them Record a personal greeting in Bilingual Mode the user may record his or her personal greeting in both the Primary and Secondary Languages a Change the default password for his or her mailbox to ensure that messages are kept confidential Forward messages with comment to another subscriber s mailbox a Have the system outcall a specified telephone or pager number according to a predefined schedule whenever a new message is received Transfer to another extension or to the receptionist s extension A subscriber s extension number and mailbox number are the same When a caller leaves a message the voice messaging system places the message in the subscriber s mailbox and turns on the message light if available at the subscriber s phone If the subscriber has Outcalling privileges the system will call the programmed telephone or pager number if the message is received during the hours specified in the subscriber s Outcalling schedule and Outcalling is turned on Subscribers can retrieve messages at their convenience from any touch tone phone either while on site or from an off site location The system informs subscribers of the number of new and old saved messages in their mailboxes and plays new messages first Subscribers can refer to Using
249. ore the area code for a long distance call Write No if O or 1 is not required System Password 403 By default no password is programmed to override dialing restrictions and to turn Night Service on and off Write 4 digits if password is desired Music on Hold 602 By default the Music on Hold jack on the processor module is active Write No if the jack is deactivated 10 Line Coverage Complete items based on Line Coverage selection on Form A DXD PARTNER II system only If DXD is checked specify the following Direct Extension Dial Delay 112 By default a call rings 2 times before it is answered by the system Write number 0 9 if different from default Direct Extension Dial Record Playback I 892 message of up to 20 seconds that caller hears when call is answered with the Direct Extension Dial feature Write message below and record from extension 10 or 11 VMS AA If VMS AA is checked specify the following VMS Hunt Delay 506 By default VMS answers calls after 2 rings Write Del if calls ring 4 times before VMS answers___ VMS Hunt Schedule 507 By default VMS is on all the time Check if Day only or Night only is desired Q Day only Q Night only ASA PARTNER II system only If ASA is checked specify the following Automatic System Answer Delay 110 By default a call rings 2 times before it is answered by the system Write number 0 9 if
250. orm B1 System Extensions Lucent recnnologies O May be used if Ext Name Display is checked on Form B1 page 1 of 3 or page 2 of 3 Jack Write 2 Digit Code for Each Character To Be Displayed See Table at Right Character Codes A N B O C P D Q E R F S G T H U V J W K X L Y M Z Numbers blank 11 0 00 5 1 10 6 2 20 7 3 30 8 4 40 9 Note Only 12 characters display on MLS model phones Lucent Technologies Bell Labs Innovations x Form B2 Customized Extension Settings Required if you want to change extension settings from defaults For additional instructions see pages 6 and 7 Identify Extension Settings Identify Line Ringing CTP Option Identify Restrictions Permissions Identify if Different than Default If Different than Default If Different than Defaults Group Assignments z re l 3 3 a n I 3 a T Write line numbers in each column to show desired Write line numbers for Line Access Restriction 2 wl S al p g zje l gt 3 LN ET o 9 Fl Sl S Bi A d S E 2 Line Ringing options 302 g Flo g 8 2 F mele Ilg lo EJERE TI EEEE EE 7 2sle SRE ant Oclvoae Ze C2 Su ol 22 2 58 9 82E SS lee eS 8e 221SS 58 35 2 28 BS loVl 2 SL e loslse icti Selas g sjigs2l 2z 215 au x 2 Z5 Ja El JSR len No Restriction oe myOo 2 213 E Eje Pal
251. ot resend the forwarded message until the mailbox has more message space For all subscribers mailboxes can store up to 20 minutes of recorded messages or 40 messages The receptionist s mailbox at extension 10 can store up to 60 minutes of recorded messages or 120 messages Possible Cause 2 The message has been forwarded the maximum of 13 times What to do Verify the number of times the message has been forwarded Subscribers Hear Busy Signal When Calling In to Voice Mail 6 8 Possible Cause 1 This is normal when the PARTNER MAIL VS extensions are busy What to do There are a number of ways to reduce the amount of time a PARTNER MAIL VS extension is busy For example you can recommend that users access the Tutor Service feature during non peak calling hours you can reduce the number options in the Automated Attendant Service menu or you can reduce the length of the Automated Attendant Service menu prompt If you have a 2 port system you may want to consider upgrading to a 4 port system Possible Cause 2 The PARTNER MAIL VS module may not be installed correctly What to do Check the PARTNER MAIL VS module to make sure it is securely mounted in the control unit Also check the module s LEDs the Power LED should be steady green and the Status LED should not be lit If the Power and Status LEDs are lit perform the System Save Reset All procedure by entering 989 RESET 989 73738 after you log in as the System Manager
252. ouch Tone Enable F 08 TT EN Voice Mail Messages Button I 777 VMMsgs 777 Voice Mailbox Transfer F 14 VMBox m zx _ o oO a lt os m J ms Q Q PAGE 5of8 PARTNER ll system only Requires Auto Dial button for each extension Button with lights is recom mended but not required Extension number can be pro grammed as Auto Dial button You can program the origination extension only or both the origination and destination extension You can F Feature button G Group I Left Intercom button XX Extension program the extension number Lucent Technologies Bell Labs Innovations Template Instructions e If desired write in line number pool access code dial code feature or auto dial number e If desired write in Line Ringing Imm Del or No from Form B2 e f desired write in Line Access Restriction or Pool Access Restriction Out In or No from Intercom oe Intercom a For PARTNER II systems in Hybrid mode only it pool 880 is assigned these two buttons are associated with this pool Specify Automatic Line Selection Form C6 MLS 18 Phone Make as many copies as you need Use template and or checklist For additional instructions see page 8 SAMPLE Identify extensions programmed as shown Check Desired Features Also write in extension or g
253. ous Paging is desired E English to extensions In Hybrid Mode use Pool Extension Assignment 314 to put appropriate extensions in Calling Group 1 Also see Form C Simultaneous Paging NA Not Assigned or Not Active remove pools from or assign pools to extensions 9 Write group number 1 6 NR No Restriction 4 Write IN for Inside Only or LOC for Local Only to indicate restrictions for all 10 Check off the same PARTNER MAIL or PARTNER MAIL VS extensions indicated on Form B1 P Pooled outgoing calls on all lines CTP Centralized Telephone Programming Form B2 Customized Extension Setting fz Lucent Technologies Babs ioc Required if you want to change extension settings from defaults for PARTNER II System extensions 34 through 57 For additional instructions see pages 6 and 7 Identify Extension Settings Identify Line Ringing CTP Option Identify Restrictions Permissions Identify if Different than Default If Different than Default If Different than Defaults Group Assignments _ i I a 3 2 eT Write line numbers or pool access codes T g g g g 2 3 co 2 Write line numbers or pool access codes in each farina A Restriction 302 or 8 ea Zk gee B 2 2 15 gt ea S pa a column to show desired Line Ringing options Or INE ACCESS Tesi ici o aw Sic g SE j v 2 g2 J _5 a ee E 23 Pool
254. ovation Check Desired Features Also write in extension or group number SAMPLE Template Instructions e f desired write in line number pool access code dial code feature or auto dial number e If desired write in Line Ringing Imm Del or No from Form B2 e If desired write in Line Access Restriction or Pool Access Restriction Out In or No from Form B2 Do Not Disturb F 01 DND Privacy F 07 Priv VMS Cover F 15 VMSCover Voice Interrupt on Busy Talk Back F 18 VIOB Account Code Entry F 12 ACE Music Cover XX XX pauinbey 037 Direct Line Pickup Active LingI 68 Direct Line Pickup lIdle Line I 8 Intercom Intercom Exclusive Hold F 02 Fax Management I XX Group Calling Ring Page I 7 G or I 7 G Group Hunt Ring SignalI 77 G or 1 77 G For PARTNER II systems in Hybrid mode only if pool 880 is assigned these two Group Pickup tee G Intercom Autodial I XX or I XX buttons are associated with this pool Last Number Redial F 05 Loudspeaker Paging I 70 Manual Signaling F 13 XX or F 13 XX Message Light Off F 10 XX Message Light On F 09 XX Recall F 03 Save Number Redial F 04 Simultaneous Paging I 70 Station Lock F 21 Touch Tone Enable F 08 Voice Mail Messages I 777 Voice Mailbox Transfer F 14 VMBox F Feature button G Group I Left Intercom button L Line XX Extension
255. over Rings 117 is not available on all systems Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system 5 51 System Management Line Coverage This feature lets callers who call in on a covered line leave messages in the mailbox of a specific subscriber Line coverage typically is used for personal lines or outside access to the voice messaging system if Automated Attendant Service is not used There are two ways to set up line coverage a For VMS Line Coverage you must program the voice messaging system s Line Ownership feature and the communication system s Group Call Distribution 206 feature With this method when a call on a covered line is not answered within five rings the voice messaging system routes the caller to the line owner s mailbox The caller then hears the personal greeting for the line owner s mailbox For Extension Line Coverage you only need to program the communication system s Line Coverage Extension 208 feature This method provides flexibility for calls ringing on covered lines You can specify the number of times calls ring at the user s extension before going to the user s mailbox using the communication system s VMS Cover Rings 117 feature In addition if the user s extension has Do Not Disturb on calls on the line can go immediately to coverage For both types of line coverage voice mail coverage must be on at the user s extension gt IMPORTANT
256. overage Do Not Disturb allows the subscriber to send callers to his or her mailbox immediately without first ringing the subscriber s extension a Voice Mailbox Transfer allows the subscriber to transfer callers directly to other subscribers voice mailboxes VM Messages allows the subscriber to access the voice messaging system for message retrieval with the touch of a button The procedures in this section use Centralized Telephone Programming VMS Cover To give a subscriber the ability to turn voice mail coverage on and off you can program a VMS Cover button on the subscribers system phone To program a VMS Cover button 1 Press Feature o 0 System Program System Program Central Tel Program 2 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed 3 Press a programmable button with lights 4 Press Feature 1 5 5 Program another button for this extension or press Feature 0 a to exit programming mode 6 Label the button at the user s extension In some countries the feature code for VMS Cover is 1 6 Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system 5 60 Secu Mata dement Do Not Disturb Used in conjunction with either automatic or manual extension coverage this button lets subscribers send callers immediately to their voice mailbox To program a Do Not Disturb button 1 a fF N Press Feature 0 0 System Program
257. p number Night Service Button 503 NightSvc Outgoing Call Restriction Button 114 OCR Wake Up Service Button 115 Wake PAGE 3of8 Caller ID Inspect F 17 ID Inspect Caller ID Name Display F 16 ID Name Do Not Disturb F 01 DND Privacy F 07 Priv VMS Cover F 15 VMSCover Voice Interrupt on Busy Talk Back F 18 VIOB pauinbay q37 Account Code Entry F 12 ACE Background Music F 19 Music Call Forwarding Call Follow Me F 11 XX XX CF XX XX Call Park I XX Park Call Pickup I6 XX Pickup XX Conference Drop F 06 Drop Contact Closure 1 F 41 CCt Contact Closure 2 F 42 CC2 Direct Line Pickup Active Line I 68 DLPA Direct Line Pickup Idle LindI 8 DLPI Exclusive Hold F 02 ExHold Fax Management I XX FAX XX Group Calling Ring Page I 7 G or I 7 G GCall g Group Hunt Ring Signal I 77 G or 1 77 G Hunt g Group Pickup I 66 G P U Grp g Intercom Autodial I XX or I XX Ext XX Last Number Redial F 05 LNR Loudspeaker Paging 70 Loudspk Manual Signaling F 13 XX or F 13 XX MS XX Message Light Off F 10 XX MsgOff XX Message Light On F 09 XX MsgOn XX Recall F 03 Recall Save Number Redial F 04 SNR Simultaneous Paging I 70 SPage Station Lock F 21 Lock Touch Tone Enable F 08 TT EN Voice Mail Messages Buttor I 777 VMMs
258. pt or go to the section Night Menu Prompt To record the Night Menu Prompt in the Primary and Secondary Languages specified on Form 5 and 1 If necessary access the Programming Main Menu If you are already at the Programming Main Menu skip to Step 2 a Press Intercom Zz z z or the programmed VMMsgs button b Press 9 9 c Enter the Mailbox Password and press d Press 9 Press 3 for Automated Attendant Press 2 for Night Menu Press 6 to modify the Night Menu Prompt At this point do one of the following lf you want to record the Night Menu Prompt in the Primary Language continue with Step 6 To record the Night Menu Prompt in the Secondary Language skip to Step 11 Lift the handset press 1 and record the Menu Prompt from Press 1 after recording Choose an option or skip this step Press 2 1 to immediately re record this Menu Prompt Begin recording immediately after the beep press 1 after recording Repeat if desired Press 2 3 to play back this Menu Prompt Press x 3 to delete this Menu Prompt and return to Step 6 to be prompted for re recording Press x to approve this Night Menu Prompt If you want to record the Night Menu Prompt in the Secondary Language continue with Step 11 otherwise skip to Step 15 Press 2 and record the Menu Prompt from Press 1 after recordin
259. pter 4 to test Automated Attendant Service a f outside calls are not transferred to the correct extension or group follow the instructions for Menu Definition and Day Menu Prompt as appropriate for or Mode in Chapter 4 to reprogram the Menu Definition If outside calls are transferred to the correct extension or group go to Possible Cause 2 Possible Cause 2 A valid destination was not entered by the caller What to do Make sure a valid destination was entered Check the Programming and Use guide for your communications system to determine valid extension and group numbers System Does Not Respond to Entered Digits Possible Cause 1 System is not receiving touchtones What to do The voice messaging system may not be able to interpret touchtones while a greeting plays Wait until the greeting finishes before entering the touchtones If you are using a speakerphone turn off the microphone Possible Cause 2 lf this occurs when the Automated Attendant Service answers calls the Menu Definition may be programmed incorrectly What to do Follow the steps for Verifying System Operation in Chapter 4 to test Automated Attendant Service f outside calls are not transferred to the correct extension or group follow the instructions for Menu Definition and Day Menu Prompt as appropriate for Monolinguall or Mode in Chapter 4 to reprogram the Menu Definition f outside calls are transferred to th
260. r 2 for Bilingual Mode TO MODIFY THE SYSTEM LANGUAGE MONOLINGUAL MODE PRESS 2 for System Language PRESS 6 to modify ENTER the number of the desired System Language PRESS 9 to confirm TO MODIFY THE PRIMARY AND SECONDARY LANGUAGES BILINGUAL MODE PRESS 2 for System Language PRESS _1 for Primary Language PRESS _6 to modify ENTER the number of the desired System Language PRESS _9 to confirm PRESS x PRESS 2 for Secondary Language PRESS _6 to modify ENTER the number of the desired System Language PRESS 9 to confirm TO MODIFY THE MENU DEFINITION AND DAY MENU PROMPT MONOLINGUAL MODE PRESS 1 for Day Menu PRESS 6 to modify ENTER a Selector Code 1 through 9 PRESS 9 to modify PRESS 1 for Selector Code Transfer ENTER an extension Hunt Group or Calling Group number and 4 To program another Selector Code for Selector Code Transfer repeat PRESS x L to approve PRESS _1 to record the Day Menu Prompt PRESS _1 after recording PRESS x to approve all changes TO MODIFY ANNOUNCEMENT MONOLINGUAL MODE PRESS _1 for Day Menu PRESS 6 to modify ENTER a Selector Code 1 through 9 PRESS _9 to confirm PRESS 3 to play the Announcement recorded for the Selector Code ENTER an Announcement number PRESS _1 to rerecord the Announcement PRESS 1 after recording PRESS Lx 4 to move up a menu level PRESS Lx 4 to co
261. r an Announcement number 1 or 2 Go to Step 11 The system plays To record a new announcement press 1 to use existing announcement press 10 Press x to finish modifying the Menu Definition The system plays To record Primary Language prompt press 1 To record Secondary Language prompt press 2 To save Menu Definition changes press 11 If you do not want to record a Day Menu Prompt or Announcement press to approve the Menu Definition and go to Step 21 otherwise continue with Step 12 12 Lift the handset and Press 1 to record the Day Menu Prompt or Announcement in the Primary Language Press 2 to record the Day Menu Prompt or Announcement in the Secondary Language 13 Record the prompt or Announcement up to four minutes in length after the beep gt Press 1 when you are finished recording System Management 15 Choose an option or skip this step Press 2 1 to immediately re record this Day Menu Prompt or Announcement Begin recording immediately after the beep press 1 after recording Repeat if desired Otherwise go to Step 16 Press 2 3 to play back this Day Menu Prompt or Announcement Press x 2 to delete this Day Menu Prompt or Announcement Return to Step 12 16 Press to approve this Day Menu Prompt or Announcement The system plays Approved 17 To record the Day Menu Prompt or Announcement in the other language r
262. re or auto dial number Wake Up Service Button 115 Wake If desired write in Line Ringing Imm Del or No from Form B2 Caller ID Inspect F 17 Pie P e f desired write in Line Access Restriction Caller ID Name Display F 16 ID Name 2 Out In or No from Form B2 Do Not Disturb F 01 DND A Privacy F 07 Priv VMS Cover F 15 VMSCover Voice Interrupt on Busy Talk Back F 18 VIOB Account Code Entry F 12 ACE Background Music F 19 Music 4 Requires Auto Call Forwarding Call Follow Me F 11 XX Xx CF XX XX Dial Button for Call Park I XX Park extension Call Pickup I 6 XX Pickup XX 2 area with Conference Drop F 06 Drop cer Contact Closure 1 F 41 CCI Hey Contact Closure 2 F 42 cc2 3 Extension l Direct Line Pickup Active Line 1 68 DLPA number can Direct Line Pickup Idle Line I 8 mea da Exclusive Hold F 02 ExHold Auto Dial Fax Management I XX FAX XX 4 TA Group Calling Ring Page I 7 G or I 7 G GCall g l program the Group Hunt Ring Signal I 77 G or 1 77 G Hunt g Bench a Group Pickup I 66 G P U Grp g or both the Intercom Autodial I XX or I XX ae e Intercom Last Number Redial F 05 INR tion exten 0 Ext Loudspeaker Paging I 70 Loudspk sion o Manual Signaling F 13 XX or F 13 XX MS XX 5 ae ie Message Light Off F 10 Xx MsgOff Xx extension Message Light On F 09 XX MsgOn XX Bue Specify Automatic Line Selection Recall F 03 T 16 17 Save Number Redial F
263. rea for messages associated with a system subscriber Mailbox Language The language assigned to a subscriber s mailbox Mailbox Password A code of up to four digits that subscribers enter to log in to the voice messaging system A password is used to keep messages confidential Menu Definition A voice messaging system feature that lets you customize the Automated Attendant Service transfer options available to outside callers Menu Prompt The customized day or night message that an outside caller hears after the Automated Attendant Service answers the call Monolingual Mode A Language Mode setting that allows messages and prompts to be played in one of several available languages See also Bilingual_Mode Music On Hold system Equipment that lets you play recorded music or messages to callers who are placed on hold A music on hold audio source must be connected to the processor module in the control unit Do N Night Service A communications system feature that is used in conjunction with Automated Attendant Service to activate the Night Menu Prompt EE O On touch Intercom Calling button See Auto Dial button Outcalling A voice messaging system feature that when assigned to a subscriber allows the subscriber to have the system call a pager or telephone number according to a predefined schedule whenever a new message is received in the subscriber s voice mailbox B o o P Primary Language In Bilingual Mode
264. reach him without having to be transferred by an employee or the PARTNER MAIL VS system so Stan will have a personal line When Stan is not available his callers will be sent directly to his mailbox where they can leave messages m Stan prefers that customers speak with an employee while the center is open so all lines will ring at all phones Although there is no receptionist the clerk and the salespeople will serve the receptionist function by answering calls when they can During business hours calls will go to the Automated Attendant Service of the PARTNER MAIL VS system only when the clerk and salespeople are busy All of Tennis Land s customers and employees speak English so the PARTNER MAIL VS system will be set for Monolingual Mode with U S English as the System Language Potential customers call frequently to inquire about Tennis Land s hours and location as well as tournament and exhibition match schedules Therefore when the Automated Attendant Service answers callers can choose to hear either an announcement that includes Tennis Land s hours of operation and directions to the center or another detailing current and upcoming competitions Callers who receive Automated Attendant Service and want to speak to a salesperson will be able to reach the first available person in the shop F 2 Case Studies o E S The mailbox at extension 10 will be used for general messages Customers who receive Automated A
265. red 3 Press 2 o s 4 Atthe Group prompt press 7 5 Atthe Line prompt enter the first VMS AA line to be programmed as specified in the Line Coverage column of Form A Page 1 6 Press Next Data until the display reads 1 Assigned Be careful not to choose 3 VMS Line Cover because you will assign VMS Line Coverage rather than Automated Attendant Service to the line 7 To program another line press Next Item or Prev item until the appropriate line number displays 8 Press Next Data until the display reads 1 Assigned 9 Repeat Steps 7 and 8 for each VMS AA line 10 Press Feature 0 0 to exit programming VMS Hunt Delay Use this communications system procedure to specify either immediate or delayed call handling Update Form A Page 2 of the System Planner for the communications system to show modifications to the VMS Hunt Delay setting before you begin To change the VMS Hunt Delay setting 1 Press Feature 0 o System Program System Program Enter the System Password if required 2 3 Press 5 o 6 4 Press Next Data until the appropriate value displays 5 Press Feature o 0 to exit programming In some countries the procedure code for Group Call Distribution is 205 Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system 5 34 System Management Automatic Extension Privacy If VMS
266. ress x Zz to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit 5 50 system naini Automatic VMS Cover Use this communications system procedure to assign automatic voice mail coverage to the appropriate extensions Update Form B2 of the System Planner for the communications system before you begin To assign Automatic VMS Cover to extensions 1 Press Feature 0 o System Program System Program Enter the System Password if required Press 3 1 2 Enter the number of the extension to be covered by the voice messaging system A DN o Press Next Data until the display reads 1 Assigned 6 To program another extension press Next Item or Prev item until the extension number shows on the display Then repeat Step 5 7 Press Feature 0 o to exit programming mode VMS Cover Rings Use this communications system procedure to change the number of times calls should ring at the extension before they are sent to the subscriber s mailbox Update Form A Page 2 of the System Planner for the communications system before you begin To change the number of times calls ring before they are sent to the voice messaging system k Press Feature o o System Program System Program Enter the System Password if required Press 1 1 Zz Enter the VMS Cover Rings setting a aN Select another procedure or exit programming mode VMS C
267. ri 1 15 System Security Guidelines 1 15 Security Policy and User Education 1 16 Overview The PARTNER MAIL VS Voice Messaging System is designed to work with the communications system to automate the call handling needs of the business The voice messaging system Expands easily and supports four configurations to accommodate growth and ensure optimal performance The basic system configuration consists of 2 voice channels ports and 10 mailboxes Any one of three optional Mailbox Expansion Cards may be installed to increase the number of ports and or subscribers These configurations include 2 ports and 20 mailboxes 4 ports and 20 mailboxes and 4 ports and 40 mailboxes Handles up to two calls in the 2 port configuration or four calls in the 4 port configuration simultaneously and provides service for a predetermined number of subscribers Answers outside calls plays a customized message prompting the caller to press digits for the party with whom the caller wants to speak and efficiently routes the call to the appropriate party all without the aid of a receptionist Allows outside callers to hear all voice prompts and customized messages in the language selected for the system And in bilingual mode callers can choose between two languages selected for the system Allows you to create up to two Automated Attendant Announcements in each language selected for the system For example you can offer callers
268. rite number 0 9 0 no return if different from a Night only default__ y ASA PARTNER II system only If ASA is checked specify the following e Outside Conference Denial 109 By default a conference call can include 2 outside Automatic System Answer Delay 110 By default a call rings 2 times before it is parties Write No if 2 outside parties are not allowed answered by the system Write number 0 9 if different from default e Call Coverage Rings 116 PARTNER II only By default a covered call rings 2 times Automatic System Answer Mode 121 By default ASA calls are put on hold after the before going to the covering extention Write number 1 9 if different from default greeting plays Check if calls should continue to ring or be disconnected e VMS Cover Rings 117 By default a call rings 3 times before going to the user s mailbox Q Ring Write number 1 9 if different from default Q Disconnect e Ring on Transfer 119 By default the caller hears ringing when the call is transferred ASA Record Playback I 891 message of up to 10 seconds that caller hears Write NA if music on hold or silence is desired when the call is answered by the Automatic System Answer feature Write e Toll Call Prefix 402 By default 0 or 1 must be dialed before the area code for a message below and record from extension 10 or 11 long distance call Write No if 0 or 1 is not required e System Password 4
269. rm or 6 to cancel Press 9 The system plays Reinitialized Press x z to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit System Manageme tt Playing a Mailbox s Language To play the language currently used for a mailbox 1 Access the Programming Main Menu a Press intercom z z z or the programmed VMMsgs button b Press 9 9 c Enter the Password and press d Press 9 The system plays the system programming options Press 4 to program mailboxes The system tells you how many mailboxes exist and how many are allowed then Pleas nter the mailbox number followed by or press for the next mailbox Enter the number of the mailbox whose language you want to play followed by The system plays Mailbox XX exists To reinitialize the password press 3 To reinitialize the mailbox press 4 To administer Outcalling press 5 To program the Mailbox Language press 6 To delete the mailbox press D If finished with this mailbox press or press for the next mailbox Press 6 The system plays To play Mailbox Language press 2 To modify Mailbox Language press 6 If finished press Press 2 The system plays Mailbox language is LANGUAGE where LANGUAGE is the current language Press x z to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit 5 47 Sytem Management Modifying a Mailbox s Language
270. rogram Primary Language press 1 To program Secondary Language press 2 If finished press Press 1 for Primary Language The system plays To play Primary Language press 2 To modify Primary Language press 6 If finished press Press 6 The system plays the current Primary Language then prompts you to enter the number corresponding to the desired language System Management 6 Press the number for the language you want to use The system plays For LANGUAGE where LANGUAGE is the current language press 9 to confirm or 6 to cancel 7 Either Press 6 to cancel your selection The system plays Primary Language has not been changed Press 9 to confirm your selection The system plays Primary Language has been changed 8 Press x Zz to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit Playing the Secondary Language To listen to the current Secondary Language 1 Access the Programming Main Menu a Press Intercom Z Zz z or the programmed VMMsgs button b Press 9 9 c Enter the Password and press d Press 9 The system plays the system programming options 2 Press 1 for Language The system plays To program Language Mode press 1 To program System Language press 2 If finished press 3 Press 2 for System Language The system plays To program Primary Language press 1 To program Secondary Language press 2 If fi
271. roup number Night Service Button 503 Outgoing Call Restriction Button 114 Wake Up Service Button 115 Aug 04 KS Caller ID Inspect F 17 Caller ID Name Display F 16 Do Not Disturb F 01 Privacy F 07 VMS Cover F 15 Voice Interrupt on Busy Talk Back F 18 Account Code Entry F 12 Background Music F 19 Backup Failure Alarm F 58 Call Forwarding Call Follow Me F 11 XX XX F XX XX Call Park I XX Call Pickup I 6 XX Conference Drop F 06 Contact Closure 1 F 41 Direct Line Pickup Active Line I 68 Direct Line Pickup lIdle Line I 8 Exclusive Hold F 02 Fax Management I XX Group Calling Ring Page I7 G or I 7 G Group Hunt Ring Signal l 77 G or1 77 G Group Pickup I 66 G Intercom Autodial I XX or I XX Last Number Redial F 05 Loudspeaker Paging I 70 Manual Signaling F 13 XX or F 13 XX Message Light Off F 10 XX Message Light On F 09 XX Recall F 03 Save Number Redial F 04 Simultaneous Paging I 70 Station Lock F 21 Touch Tone Enable F 08 Voice Mail Messages Button I 777 Voice Mailbox Transfer F 14 PAGE 6 of 8 p smb y 037 PARTNER ll system only Requires Auto Dial button for each extension Button with lights is recom mended but not required Extension number can be pro
272. roup number 1 4 If a loudspeaker is connected and Simultaneous Paging is desired 2 bea all 301 to remove lines from or assign lines to put appropriate extensions in Calling Group 1 Also see Form C Simultaneous Paging R Aire or Active TN al a 8 Write group number 1 6 E i Hee on teat E E a 9 Check off the same PARTNER MAIL or PARTNER MAIL VS extensions indicated on Form BT NA Not Assigned or Not Active 4 Write list number 1 8 Also see Form D Disallowed Phone Number Lists CTP Centralized Telephone Programming 404 5 Write list number 1 8 Also see Form D Allowed Phone Number Lists 407 Form C1 PARTNER 34D Phone Bell Labs Innovations Make as many copies as you need Use template and or checklist For additional instructions see pages 8 through 13 Check Desired Features Also write in extension or group number SAMPLE Night Service Button 503 NightSvc Template Instructions ing Call Restriction Button 114 OCR e If desired write in line number dial code feature or auto dial number ice B H i e If desired write in Line Ringing Imm Del or No from ID Inspect D e f desired write in Line Access Restriction Caller ID Name Display F 16 D Out In or No from Form B2 Do Not Disturb F 01 ra Privacy F 07 a VMSCover VIOB j ACE Backgrou
273. rs of the network interface jacks and a properly grounded electrical outlet not controlled by switch using supplied 7 foot 2 1 meter cords Mount the Expansion Carrier at least 6 15 2 cm and not more than 24 61 cm away from the Primary Carrier Operating temperature 32 to 104 F 0 to 40 C not in direct sunlight Humidity 15 90 noncondensing For proper ventilation and easy replacement of modules provide at least 6 15 2cm clearance at the top and sides and 2 feet 0 6 meters at the front and bottom of the control unit Locate in an area free of excess moisture corrosive gases dust and chemicals U S and Canada 90 130 VAC 50 60 Hz 3 prong outlet separate ground separately fused at 15 Amps Other countries 180 264 VAC 50 60 Hz fused at 10 Amps Outlet must not be controlled by an on off switch Grounding to comply with Underwriters Laboratories UL 1459 1 An insulated grounding conductor that is not smaller in size and equivalent in insulation material and thickness to the grounded and ungrounded branch circuit supply conductors except that it is green with or without one or more yellow stripes is to be installed as part of the circuit that supplies the product or system The grounding conductor mentioned in item A is to be connected to ground at service equipment The attachment plug receptacles in the vicinity of the product or system are all to be of a grounding type and the grounding con
274. rs or exits programming mode Programming Mode To enter programming mode 1 At extension 10 or 11 if available make sure the programming overlay is in place over the system phone s dialpad Press Feature 0 0 Press System Program System Program Ji Enter the System Password if required OT oR GO Enter specific programming procedure codes Understanding Programming a S Voice Messaging System Programming Before you program the voice messaging system obtain completed copies of planning forms for the communications system and the voice messaging system These forms provide the names extensions mailboxes and other information required to program the voice messaging system Planning Forms You need the following forms for the voice messaging system m Form 1 Language Shows the Language Mode Monolingual or Bilingual Also specifies the System Language for Monolingual Mode or the Primary and Secondary Language for Bilingual Mode m Mailbox Assignments Shows factory set mailbox assignments with and without the Mailbox Expansion Card Allows you to change mailbox assignments to indicate whether Outcalling capability is assigned and to identify the language used for each mailbox Form 3 Menu Definition Shows transfer options for Automated Attendant Service Allows you to specify the extension or group number for a selector code transferor announcement number and to provide a description of tha
275. rvice Allows subscribers to Listen to messages Forward messages with comment to other mailboxes Delete messages Set up outcalling to a pager or telephone number Record personal greeting s Change their password Prompts caller to make a choice from a menu of options then transfers the call to the selected destination or announcements Prompts caller to leave a message or transfer to another extension when the called party does not answer VMS Programming VMS Hunt Schedule VMS Extension VMS Line Voice Mailbox Coverage Coverage Transfer Caller hears the line owner s personal greet ing and can leave a message Caller hears the called party s personal greet ing and can leave a message Communications Communications Communications system always system routes system routes routes calls to Calls to Auto calls to Auto Automated mated Attendant mated Attendant Attendant Service when Service when Service Night Service is Night Service is off on System users press a button to transfer callers directly to a voice mailbox without ringing the extension first VMS Hunt Delay CS Programming Automatic WW EVATE Send All Calls VMS Coverage VMS Coverage Immediate Delayed Call Handling Call Handling Subscribers Subscribers can Subscribers can use Do have voice mail turn voice mail Not Disturb in conjunc co
276. s Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system t In some countries the feature code for Voice Mailbox Transfer is 1 6 Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system 4 26 Initial E rogramiming Do Not Disturb Used in conjunction with either automatic VMS cover or manual VMS cover this button lets subscribers send callers immediately to his or her mailbox instead of ringing the extension first To program a Do Not Disturb DND button as specified on Form C 1 Press Feature o 0 System Program System Program Central Tel Program Enter the number of the extension to be programmed 2 3 Press a programmable button with lights 4 Press Feature 0 1 5 At this point do one of the following Go to Step 3 of the next procedure to program another button for this extension Press Central Tel Program and go to Step 2 of any button programming procedure in this section to program a button for a different extension Press Feature o 2 to exit Voice Mailbox Transfer This button lets any system user transfer calls directly to a subscriber s mailbox without ringing the extension first To program a Voice Mailbox Transfer VMBox button as specified on Form C 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program Central Tel Program J Enter the number of the extension to be programmed Pr
277. s and line owners extensions m Asan alternative to VMS Line Coverage you can use Extension Line Coverage See Chapter 5 for more information Completing this Form Line Write the number of the outside line to be covered by the voice mailbox of the line owner m For PARTNER PLUS specify an outside line number from 01 12 m For PARTNER Advanced specify an outside line number from 01 15 m For PARTNER II or PARTNER 48 specify an outside line number from 01 24 Telephone Number Write the telephone number of the outside line to be covered Line Owner Write the name of the person responsible for picking up messages on this line This is a subscriber from Form 2 Mailbox Assignments Mailbox Write the mailbox number assigned to the subscriber Programming Line Ownership To program line ownership dial 6 from the Programming Main Menu Communications System Planning Forms This appendix contains samples of the communications systems Planning Forms These forms identify certain features of the communications system that must be programmed before the voice mail system is installed to ensure that both systems are integrated and function appropriately It is important to keep an accurate up to date record of the programming for the both systems If you change the communications system after installation you should update the forms that were used when the communications system was installed an
278. s de mise a la terre de la source d nergie lectrique des lignes t l phoniques et des canalisations d eau m talliques s il y en a sont raccord s ensemble Cette pr caution est particuligrement importante dans les r gions rurales A AVERTISSEMENT L utilisateur ne doit pas tenter de faire ces raccordements lui m me il doit avoir racours a un service d inspection des installations lectriques ou a un lectricien selon le cas L indice de charge IC assign a chaque dispositif terminal indique pour viter toute surcharge le pourcentage de la charge totale qui peut tre raccord e a un circuit t l phonique bouci utilis par ce dispositif La terminaison du circuit boucl peut tre constitu e de n importe quelle combinaison de dispositifs pourvu que la somme des indices de charge de l ensemble des dispositifs ne d passe pas 100 No d homolagation 230 3756A No de certification CSA LR 60486 L indice de charge 7 Warranty Information Repair Information Outside the continental U S contact your Lucent Technologies Representative or local Authorized Dealer for warranty and repair information applicable to your system In Warranty Repairs If you purchased or leased your system directly from Lucent Technologies Lucent Technologies will repair it free of charge during the one year warranty period Simply call the Lucent Technologies Technical Service Center and ask for service Business D
279. s system 3 2____ Z voice messaging system Problems soving 6 S YO Programming communications system telephone buttons 4 26 voice messaging system 3 4 o Programming Main Menu accessing the description Programming overlays R Receptionist duties extension 10 mailbox Reference materials xv Reinitializing mailbox password Rotary phones System test T Telephone button programming 4 26 Telephone company notification Teminoogybi SES Transfer for Automated Attendant Service callers using 8522 Transfer Return Extension overview 1 Transfer return extensions 4 4 O O22 Tutor Service 1 3 5 5 o labels xv VMS Covers O o oo o o SooS VMS Cover button 4 26 5 60_ __ Z VMS extensions specifying 4 3 _ o VMS Hunt Delay changing the Setting 534 o VMS Hunt Schedule changing the setting initial programming 4 overview Voice mail coverage and groups for CO lines 4 42 oS O for extensions 1 12 4 25 4 26 _ ___ Voice Mail Messages button 4 28 5 62 Voice Mail Service factory set message initial programming 4 15 overview testing the operation of 4 29 si sCisdY Voice Mailbox Transfer description programming a button 4 27 0d Voice Mailbox Transfer button 5 61 ss Voice messaging system features overview Voice messaging system programming AAEE aU com Intercom 7
280. se 2 The PARTNER MAIL VS extensions may be busy What to do There are a number of ways to reduce the amount of time a PARTNER MAIL VS extension is busy For example you can recommend that users access the Tutor Service feature during non peak calling hours you can reduce the number of options in the Automated Attendant Service menu or you can reduce the length of the Automated Attendant Service menu prompt System Cuts Off Part of Greeting Possible Cause 1 You may have begun recording the greeting too soon What to do Re record the greeting After the prompt to record the greeting pause a moment before speaking Possible Cause 2 A touch tone signal may have been recorded accidentally with the greeting What to do Re record the greeting System Transfers Call to Receptionist Before Playing the Menu Prompt Possible Cause The extensions associated with the PARTNER MAIL VS module were not assigned to Hunt Group 7 What to do Refer to Figure 2 1 in Chapter 2 to determine the extension numbers that are associated with the PARTNER MAIL VS module Then use Hunt Group Extensions 505 to verify that the VMS extensions are assigned to Hunt Group 7 Troubleshooting mmm System Does Not Transfer Calls Properly Possible Cause 1 If this occurs when the Automated Attendant Service answers calls the Menu Definition may be programmed incorrectly What to do Follow the steps for Verifying System Operation in Cha
281. sferred calls and outside calls on Cover 310 lines assigned ownership are automatically covered by the VMS Specify the number of times intercom and VMS Cover Rings transferred calls or outside calls on lines assigned 117 ownership ring at extensions before they are sent to the VMS Identify the extension to which a call transferred by Transfer Return the VMS should be routed if the destination Extension 306 extension does not answer and does not have voice mail coverage active The transfer return extension for the VMS is typically ext 10 ee Form A System Configuration eee Required for PARTNER Advanced Communications System For additional instructions see page 2 1 Customer Billing Name 6 Features Customer is most interested in most important first 2 Installation Address 3 Contact Name Phone __ 4 Person to be Trained Phone Alternate Trainee s Name Phone C 5 Soldby Lucent Technologies Sales Force Salesperson s Name Phone Dealer 7 System Lines Line Coverage You can select one per line 1 Line Write the Telephone Numbers AA VMS 1 Hunt Write User s Name for Personal Identify other Local Telephone Jack in order customer desires AA Group j or Owned Line or Identify Equipment Caller ID Company Subscription Services No list personal and dedicated lines last write no for Dedicated Line e g Repeat Call 1 Check
282. show red steady on system phones with those lines for about one minute When the lines become idle the voice messaging system is ready to receive calls 2 6 Understanding Programming Contents Communications System Programming 3 1 a Planning Forms 3 2 Using System Programming 3 2 The Programming Overlays 3 3 Programming Mode 3 3 Voice Messaging System Programming 3 4 Programming Guidelines 3 7 Understanding Programming This chapter provides general programming information for the communications system and the voice messaging system Both systems must be programmed so they can work together as an integrated unit Before you begin any programming you must ensure that all required communications system and voice messaging system planning forms described in this chapter are completed You will refer to these forms during programming Communications System Programming When the communications system is installed it uses factory settings that reflect the most common usage of the equipment You can change these settings as required to customize them for the business You can program the communications system from extension 10 Some systems also allow programming from extension 11 Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system for more information If your system supports programming from both extensions you may find it more convenient to program from extension 11 This capability allows the recepti
283. sk of incurring charges that result from unauthorized use of the system Under the law you the customer are responsible for paying part or all of those unauthorized calls Be aware that criminals called hackers may attempt to gain unauthorized access to your communications system and your voice mail system Hackers often try to trick a company s employees into providing them with access to an outside line or an outside operator They may also concentrate their activities in two areas related to the mail system a They try to dial into a mailbox then execute a transfer by dialing x 8 Then they dial an access code followed by a digit string to either direct dial or access a network operator to complete the call They try to locate unused or unprotected mailboxes and use them as drop off points for their own messages System Security Guidelines To reduce the risk of unauthorized use of your communications and voice mail systems you should a require that the System Manager s Password be changed from the factory setting Use a hard to guess value m delete any unused mailboxes immediately a require all employees who have voice mailboxes to use passwords to protect their mailboxes m permit no Outcalling or permit this privilege only for those with legitimate business need a advise subscribers to change their passwords a 4 digit password is recommended when they log into the Voice Mail Service for the first time and
284. so write in extension or group number Night Service Button 503 NightSvc Outgoing Call Restriction Button 114 OCR Wake Up Service Button 115 Wake Caller ID Inspect F 17 ID Inspect Caller ID Name Display F 16 ID Name Do Not Disturb F 01 DND Privacy F 07 Priv VMS Cover F 15 VMSCover Voice Interrupt on Busy Talk Back F 18 VIOB Account Code Entry F 12 ACE Background Music F 19 Music Backup Failure Alarm F 58 Backup Call Forwarding Call Follow Me F 11 XX XX CF XX XX Call Park I XX Park Call Pickup I 6 XX Pickup XX Conference Drop F 06 Drop Contact Closure 1 F 41 cci Direct Line Pickup Active Line I 68 DLPA Direct Line Pickup Idle Line I 8 DLPI Exclusive Hold F 02 ExHold Fax Management I XX FAX XX Group Calling Ring Page I 7 G or 1 7 G GCall g Group Hunt Ring Signal I 77 G or 1 77 G Hunt g Group Pickup I 66 G P U Grp g Intercom Autodial I XX or I XX Ext XX Last Number Redial F 05 LNR Loudspeaker Paging I 70 Loudspk Manual Signaling F 13 XX or F 13 XX MS XX Message Light Off F 10 XX MsgOff XX Message Light On F 09 XX MsgOn XX Recall F 03 Recall Save Number Redial F 04 SNR Specify Automatic Line Selection Identify extensions programmed as shown SimultaneousPaging I 70 SPage Station Lock F 21 Lock T
285. so your staff has more time to answer other calls and perform other tasks You can customize the menu prompt for use during normal business hours called the Day Menu Prompt and for use after normal business hours called the Night Menu Prompt For example you can set up Automated Attendant Service so that callers hear the following prompt during the day if the system is set for Monolingual Mode and the System Language is U S English Thank you for calling the ANY Travel Agency If you know the extension you want dial it now or press 0 to speak with the receptionist For information on this month s special travel package press 3 For directions to ANY Travel Agency press 4 To speak to an agent about Corporate Travel press 5 Press 4 to replay this message Note that callers who want general information regarding the current discount travel package or agency location can choose to listen to an Announcement For example when callers press 3 they hear the following Announcement Are you tired of battling the ice snow and after Christmas sale crowds Take advantage of our January sunny escape package 3 days and 2 nights in San Juan Puerto Rico for 439 per person including hotel and airfare To speak to an agent about this package or other winter getaways press 8 and extension 13 For after hours callers you can set up Automated Attendant Service to play this prompt You have reached the ANY Travel Agency Our ho
286. ss and explains how the planning forms for the communications system and voice messaging system were filled out You can use these case studies to determine how customer requirements were matched to PARTNER MAIL VS system features Case Studies Case Study 1 About the Customer Tennis Land is a sports center that offers tennis enthusiasts six tennis courts and a large well stocked shop for purchasing a variety of tennis paraphernalia including racquets and tennis wear In addition Tennis Land offers lessons and clinics from staff coaches When the coaches are not giving lessons or clinics hosting tournaments or traveling with the Tennis Land team in exhibition matches they help the sales people in the shop Stan Williams the owner Sally Parker the manager and the coaches all have private offices Stan purchased a PARTNER Advanced Communications System Release 1 0 and a PARTNER MAIL VS Release 4 Voice Messaging System He believes that the systems features will help his employees provide better service to customers Sally is responsible for managing the systems she established these facts The system will have three outside lines and 8 extensions a The clerk will have a PARTNER 18D phone at extension 10 Sally s PARTNER 18D phone will be extension 11 Stans PARTNER 18D phone will be extension 12 The three coaches will have PARTNER 18 phones Two MLS 12 phones will be in the shop a Stan s callers should be able to
287. ssaging system as indicated on Form A Page 2 VMS Cover Rings 1 Press 1 1 z 2 Enter the VMS Cover Rings setting specified on Form A 3 Press Feature 0 0 to exit programming mode 4 Continue with the next section Telephone Button Programming Telephone Button Programming Before you begin locate Form Clof the System Planner for the communications system Be sure you have a version of the form for each subscriber s phone Use this section to program buttons on subscribers phones including the receptionist s phone This section uses Centralized Telephone Programming When you are finished programming be sure to label all buttons on subscribers phones VMS Cover This button allows the subscriber to turn voice mail coverage on and off To program a VMS Cover button as specified on Form C 1 Press Feature 0 0 System Program System Program Central Tel Program Enter the number of the extension to be programmed Press a programmable button with lights Press Feature 1 5 oa A WwW P At this point do one of the following Go to Step 3 of the next procedure to program another button for this extension Press Central Tel Program and go to Step 2 of any button programming procedure in this section to program a button for a different extension Press Feature 0 2 to exit VMS Cover Rings 117 is not available on all system
288. stomize the day and or night menu to welcome the caller and offer the caller a list of options for transferring to a system extension or group or for hearing an Announcement that you record These Announcements can tell callers about your business hours and location emergency cover information and seasonal or special offers You can record up to two Announcements of up to four minutes each If the system is set for Bilingual Mode you can record up to two Announcements in each language Be sure to record the Day and Night Menu Prompts in both the Primary and Secondary Languages as well Then callers can press x 1 to switch between the languages 5 18 System Management me Programming Main Menu Press P Automated Attendant Press E Day Menu Night Menu Press 1 Press 2 Yes Bilingual Mode Bilingual Mode Play Night Modify Night Prompt Prompt Play Day Modify Menu Prompt Definition and or Press 2 11 Press 6 Press 2 1 roan teh Play Menu Definition and Play Primary Announcement Night Prompt Press _2 2 1 Press _2 4 1 Modify Primary Night Prompt Press 6 1 Play Secondary Modify Secondary Night Prompt Night Prompt Play Primary Modify Menu Press 2 1 2 Press 6 2 Day Prompt Definition Press 2 1 1 and or Primary Day Prompt Press 6 Play Secondary Day Prompt Press 2 1 2
289. sy Talk Back F 18 VIOB Account Code Entry F 12 ACE Background Music F 19 Music Backup Failure Alarm F 58 Backup Call Forwarding Call Follow Me F 11 XX XX CF XX XX Call Park I XX t Park Call Pickup I 6 XX Pickup XX Conference Drop F 06 Drop Contact Closure 1 F 41 CC1 Direct Line Pickup Active Line I 68 DLPA Direct Line Pickup Idle Line I 8 DLPI Exclusive Hold F 02 ExHold Fax Management I XX FAX XX Group Calling Ring Page I 7 G or I 7 G GCall g Group Hunt Ring SignalI 77 G or 1 77 G Hunt g Group Pickup I 66 G P U Grp g Intercom Autodial I XX or I XX Ext XX Last Number Redial F 05 LNR Loudspeaker Paging I 70 Loudspk Manual Signaling F 13 XX or F 13 XXj MS XX Message Light Off F 10 XX MsgOff XX Message Light On F 09 XX MsgOn XX Recall F 03 Recall i Save Number Redial F 04 SNR Simultaneous PagingI 70 SPage Station Lock F 21 Lock Touch Tone Enable F 08 TT EN Voice Mail Messages Button I 777 VMMsgs 777 Voice Mailbox Transfer F 14 VMBox m a 5 9 2 rc m Oo D D oO S o a F Feature button G Group I Left Intercom button XX Extension PAGE 1of8 PARTNER ll system only Requires Auto Dial button for each extension Button with lights is recom mended but not required Extension number can be pro grammed as Auto Dial button You can program the origination extension only or both the origination and destinatio
290. t extension or group n Form 3A Automated Attendant Announcement System Language or Primary Language Shows the announcement number s and the script used to record the associated announcement s in the System Language for Monolingual Mode or the Primary Language for Bilingual Mode You can record up to two announcements in Monolingual Mode and in the Primary Language for Bilingual Mode Form 3B Automated Attendant Announcement Secondary Language Used only if the system is set for Bilingual Mode Shows the announcement number s and the script used to record the associated announcemenit s in the Secondary Language for Bilingual Mode You can record up to two announcements in Bilingual Mode Form 4 Day Menu Prompt System Language or Primary Language Shows the script used to record the Day Menu Prompt in the System Language for Monolingual Mode or the Primary Language for Bilingual Mode a Day Menu Prompt Secondary Language Used only if the system is set for Bilingual Mode Shows the script used to record the Day Menu Prompt in the Secondary Language m Night Menu Prompt System Language or Primary Language Shows the script used to record the Night Menu Prompt in the System Language for Monolingual Mode or the Primary Language for Bilingual Mode 3 4 Siscleseuulle Programing Form 5A Night Menu Prompt Secondary Language Used only if the system is set for Bilingual Mode Shows the script used to record the N
291. t language press 9 to confirm or 6 to cancel m Man men 7 Either Press 9 to confirm The system plays Mailbox Language has been changed Press 6 to cancel The system plays Mailbox Language has not been changed 8 Press x z to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit Administering Outcalling for a Mailbox The Outcalling feature dials a telephone or pager number to notify a subscriber that a new message has arrived in the subscriber s voice mailbox With this feature subscribers can be alerted to the arrival of new messages whether they re at their desks on the road or at an alternate work location And subscribers can determine the schedule for when Outcalling begins and ends Before subscribers can turn on Outcalling specify the Outcalling number and establish an Outcalling schedule optional you must assign Outcalling privileges for their mailboxes You may also remove Outcalling privileges by following the instructions below Be sure to update Form 2 to indicate the current status of Outcalling privileges for each mailbox A CAUTION Before you assign mailboxes Outcalling privileges you should review the system performance and security issues discussed in detail in Chapter 1 There are no restrictions on the Outcalling Numbers entered by subscribers Therefore it is strongly recommended that you limit the number of subscribers who have the Outcalling privilege And call
292. t to do Let the caller know the recording time limit Also let the caller know that he or she can press x 8 and the appropriate extension number to transfer to the extension again this avoids making another outside call to finish the message if necessary Messages Cannot Be Deposited in Mailbox Possible Cause The mailbox is full What to do Old messages must be deleted regularly from mailboxes When a subscriber s mailbox is full the caller cannot leave a message in that mailbox but is given the option of transferring to another extension For all subscribers mailboxes can store up to 20 minutes of recorded messages or 40 messages whichever is reached first The receptionist s mailbox at extension 10 can store up to 60 minutes of recorded messages or 120 messages 6 6 Troubleshooting I ee Voice Mail Service Subscriber Unable to Log In to Voice Mail Possible Cause 1 A subscriber entered the number of a mailbox that does not exist What to do Make sure the subscriber enters an existing mailbox number Use Playing a Mailbox s Status in Chapter 5 to check the status of existing mailboxes If the subscriber tries again and succeeds the problem is solved f the subscriber still cannot log in go to Possible Cause 2 Possible Cause 2 The subscriber forgot his or her password or entered it incorrectly What to do The subscriber should try entering the password again a f the subscrib
293. te call handling only during the day If Delayed and Day Only are checked this site uses delayed call handling only during the day No If Immediate and Night Only are checked this site uses immediate call handling only during the night No If Delayed and Night Only are checked this site uses delayed call handling only during the night In some countries the procedure code for Group Call Distribution is 205 Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system Yes Yes Yes Leave VMS Hunt Delay 506 at factory setting Immediate Leave VMS Hunt Schedule 507 at factory setting Always Program a Night Service Button 503 at extension 10 Set Automatic Extension Privacy 304 to Assigned for the VMS extensions Set VMS Hunt Delay 506 at Delayed Leave VMS Hunt Schedule 507 at factory setting Always Program a Night Service Button 503 at extension 10 Leave VMS Hunt Delay 506 at factory setting Immediate Set VMS Hunt Schedule 507 Day Only Program a Night Service Button 503 at extension 10 Set Automatic Extension Privacy 304 to Assigned for the VMS extensions e Set VMS Hunt Delay 506 to Delayed c6 e Set VMS Hunt Schedule 507 to Day Only cg e Program a Night Service Button 503 at extension 10 emule e Leave VMS Hunt Delay 506 at factory setting Immediate e Set VMS Hunt Schedule 507 to Day Only c6 e Program a Night S
294. te a mailbox 1 Access the Programming Main Menu a Press Intercom z z z or the programmed VMMsgs button b Press 9 9 c Enter the Password and press d Press 9 The system plays the system programming options Press 4 to program mailboxes The system tells you how many mailboxes exist and how many are allowed then Pleas nter the mailbox number followed by or press for the next mailbox Enter the number of the mailbox you want to delete followed by The system says whether or not the mailbox exists then To reinitialize the password press 3 To reinitialize the mailbox press 4 To administer Outcalling press 5 To program the Mailbox Language press 6 To delete the mailbox press D Press x 3 The system plays Mailbox XX has YY new messages and ZZ old messages Do you want to delete Press 9 to confirm or 6 to cancel Press 9 to confirm mailbox deletion The system plays Deleted Press x z to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit 5 43 System Management Creating a Mailbox Update Form 2 for the voice messaging system to show mailboxes to be created then use the updated form while performing the following procedure The system is shipped with mailboxes for a predetermined number of extensions If you already have the maximum amount of mailboxes you must delete an unused mailbox before you can create a new
295. tem hardware 1 3 Overview Languages The voice messaging system supports multiple languages You can choose to have outside callers hear all voice prompts and customized messages in one of the supported languages Monolingual Mode or you can let outside callers choose between two languages preselected for the system by the System Manager Bilingual Mode When the system operates in Monolingual Mode the language you choose for voice prompts is referred to as the System Language When the system operates in Bilingual Mode the language you choose for voice prompts when calls are first answered is referred to as the Primary Language Outside callers then have the option of switching to the Secondary Language for the remainder of the call Voice Messaging Services The voice messaging system provides three types of service a Automated Attendant Service Answers outside calls and transfers them to the destination selected by the caller or plays an Announcement selected by the caller Call Answer Service Allows the caller to leave a message or to transfer to another extension if the called party is busy or does not answer a Voice Mail Service Allows subscribers to listen to messages and manage their own mailbox Figure 1 1 provides an overview of the features associated with each service 1 4 Overview PARTNER MAIL VS Voice Messaging System Automated Attendant Service Call Answer Service Voice Mail Se
296. tem phone To access the Tutor menu users simply call the voice messaging system by dialing intercom Z Zz z and enter x 4 after they hear the Please enter extension prompt Voice prompts request the user to enter topic and subtopic numbers The available topics are 1 Autodial Features 3 Fixed Features 1 Last Number Redial 1 Transfer 2 Save Number Redial 2 Conference 3 Personal Speed Dial 4 About Your Phone 4 Intercom Auto Dial 1 Buttons and Lights 5 Outside Auto Dial 2 Display 2 Internal Calls 3 Speakerphone 1 Hands Free Answer on Intercom 4 Volume 2 Voice Interrupt On Busy 5 Ring Patterns 3 Group Paging Information about each subtopic is presented in short easy to understand segments After a segment plays the user hears one beep or two beeps a One beep means that there is more information about the subtopic The user can press x 4 to replay the previous segment or to play the next segment Two beeps indicate the end of the information about the subtopic The user can press x 4 to replay the previous segment or to return to the Tutor Main Menu NOTE Tutor s prompts play in either the System Language selected for Monolingual Mode or the Primary Language selected for Bilingual Mode This cannot be changed Syl Managameni Receptionist s Responsibilities 5 6 After the voice messaging system is installed the receptionist at extension 10 should be aware of certain intera
297. ternative to Extension Programming Control Unit Hardware that connects lines coming into the building to the extensions in the system and also provides system features Communications system The control unit and system phones plus all other telecommunications devices that are connected to the control unit Certain releases of PARTNER Plus PARTNER II PARTNER 48 and PARTNER Advanced communications systems can be used with the PARTNER MAIL VS system D Delayed Call Handling A communications system feature that allows the communications system to send incoming outside calls to the Automated Attendant Service if the receptionist does not answer by the third ring See sisollnamediate Call Dial plan The range of extensions provided for a specific system The PARTNER Plus system includes extensions 10 33 the PARTNER ACS includes extensions 10 41 the PARTNER II and PARTNER 48 systems include extensions 10 57 Do Not Disturb A communications system feature that can be used in conjunction with automatic or manual voice coverage to send callers immediately to a subscriber s mailbox rather than ringing the extension first GL 1 Glossary Extension An endpoint in the system numbered 10 33 for PARTNER Plus system 10 41 for PARTNER ACS 10 57 for PARTNER II and PARTNER 48 systems that connects telephones or standard devices which can be dialed using the Intercom button See also Extension number and Programming extension Ext
298. tify Telephone Attached to this Extension Stan Williams Jean Coach Vito Coach Bill Coach Shop Shop E EE Aa 34 Button Display l a IF I l g S S i l 2 l I 2 F gall a cj le a F 1 fe e 2els el lee ak sl p lal o l2 gS 8 2 5 Transfer elzista a 8 Slelus Ielz zlelgels sa Wetein Retum Ext 13 21212 a l l Sss 3 s PEO 8lZ one gl 2 fee ere Slo gZ g Seale HBE 2 Other Smi Jack i s 8 S 5 2 8 3 s 2 2 S e 5s8le E18 Equipment _ 306 N Write Name Descripti 2 8 8 2 8 8 8la S E 2 53 ele Sig jgi 2g pmen 0 ite Name Description 3 B G 1a 3 2 3 S st S 1812 5 81 S 2 S 2 e Sle s 2l8 amp sl5 225 zlz E Siz8id1 jS 6 Sje ejeje ia aa M Sally Parker l HA a lgantity Auxiliary Equipment Attached to this Extension i Passageway BEHE Answering Machine HHHH Modem IMPORTANT A system display phone is required for programming at extension 10 or 11 Extension 10 typically is the receptionist s extension Extension 11 is recommended as a second programming extension typically the System Manager s extension 6 1 If checked see Form B1 Page 3 of 3 2 If there is a mix of PARTNER model and MLS model phones write P for PARTNER and M for MLS 3 Write T for touch tone or R for rotary If Call waiting is des
299. to reach an extension a Hunt Group or for PARTNER II systems a Calling Group by pressing a single digit or by dialing an extension or group number Auxiliary equipment Telecommunications equipment other than system phones that can be connected to the control unit Auxiliary equipment includes industry standard devices that can connect directly to the public telephone network such as doorphones or fax machines as well as devices that require the interface provided by the control unit such as a loudspeaker paging system Automatic VMS Cover A communications system feature that provides voice mail coverage for a subscriber s unanswered transferred and intercom calls EE B Bilingual Mode A Language Mode setting that allows messages and prompts to be played in either of two languages See also Monolingual Mode BA n E C Call Answer Service A component of the voice messaging system that lets callers leave a message at an unanswered extension or transfer to another extension Calling Group A group of extensions that can be called simultaneously by dialing a group calling code This feature may not be available on your system check your Programming and Use guide See also Hunt Group Centralized Telephone Programming A method of telephone programming that lets you program individual extensions in the system from a system display phone at extension 10 or 11 if available Centralized Telephone Programming is an al
300. to the specific extension or Calling Group or Hunt Group that you assigned to that digit System Management Announcement You can assign any of the selector codes to an Announcement number When a caller presses the single digit selector code the system plays an Announcement primary or secondary that you assigned to that digit Each Announcement can be up to four minutes in length You can set the system to play the Announcement and hang up or prompt the caller to press x 8 and an extension number gt NOTE Voice mail coverage is not provided for group calls See Group Calling Tips earlier in this chapter for more information Depending on your business you can define the menu so that some options accommodate callers during normal business hours and other options accommodate after hours callers For example the ANY Travel Agency wants to give outside callers the ability to transfer directly to any employee in their system by dialing the employee s 2 digit extension number The company has employees assigned at extensions 10 through 25 Therefore the company leaves Selector Codes 1 and 2 at the factory setting Direct Extension Transfer This leaves Selector Codes 3 through 9 available for Selector Code Transfer In this case ANY Travel Agency assigns Selector Code 3 to extension 21 and Selector Codes 4 and 5 to Hunt Groups 1 and 2 respectively A sample Day Menu Prompt for the ANY Travel Agency follows Thank you
301. tomer Software Mexico is a small company that develops PC based software in Tijuana Mexico The company prides itself on personalized service and customer satisfaction The owner Jose Ramirez employs a staff of nine including a receptionist a system administrator five programmers a customer service representative and a bookkeeper Jose and his employees speak both English and Spanish Sixty percent of Software Mexico s customers speak Spanish the other 40 percent speak English Jose purchased a PARTNER Plus Release 4 1 Communications System and a PARTNER MAIL VS Release 4 Voice Messaging System because the integrated system can answer outside calls and offer callers the option of listening to prompts and transferring to extensions in either English or Spanish Receptionist Vera Gonzalez is responsible for managing the systems she established these facts a The system will have four outside lines and 12 extensions a Jose and Vera will have PARTNER 34D phones the other eight employees will have PARTNER 18D phones In addition two standard phones will be installed in the waiting room so customers can make local calls a Jose prefers that Vera help with various office tasks so all lines will ring delayed at extension 10 and the PARTNER MAIL VS system will answer them Vera will act as backup she will answer calls from customers who press 0 or stay on the line for assistance as well as transfer returned calls Also Vera will be
302. ttendant Service and stay on the line or press 0 for assistance will be routed to this extension which is at the clerk s desk Customers who call after business hours will have the option of leaving a message in this mailbox Stan Sally and each coach will have a mailbox and Automatic VMS Cover Callers will be routed automatically to the appropriate mailbox where they can leave a message when the person they called is not available a Stan Sally and each coach will also have Outcalling privileges so that when they are moving around the club during tournaments or traveling with the team they can be alerted via their pagers to the arrival of messages being left in their voice mailboxes Stan especially wants customers to be able to leave messages for the coaches when they are away from their offices This capability will help prevent missed appointments and lost income when customers call about lessons and clinics Case Studies Filling Out the Planning Forms This section explains how the System Planner for the PARTNER Advanced Communications System Release 1 0 and the forms for the PARTNER MAIL VS Release 4 Voice Messaging System are filled out based on the facts in the Tennis Land case For brevity CS refers to the System Planner forms for the communications system and VMS refers to the forms for the voice messaging system CS Form A Page 1 of 2 a Write the Telephone Numbers in order customer desires Telephone
303. turb Voice Mailbox Transfer and Voice Mail Messages buttons Samples of these forms and instructions for completing them are included in Using System Programmin System Programming requires a system display phone at extension 10 or 11 if available with a programming overlay placed over the phone s dialpad System Programming procedures are identified by and a 3 digit code for example the procedure code for System Date is 101 You can program the system in one of two ways Direct Method You access a programming procedure directly by dialing the code for that procedure This method works best when you are using only a few procedures during the programming session and you know the codes For example press 1 2 41 to change the system date Cycle Method You cycle through a sequence of procedures in numerical order by pressing Next Procedure Or Prev Procedure You should use this method when programming the communications system for the first time or when you are changing a series of related settings However procedures 399 609 and 728 are skipped when you cycle through procedures NOTE You can talk on the telephone while you program This is useful if you need to call for support while programming However you must place the call before you enter programming mode and you must use the handset not the speakerphone to talk Understanding Programming TO ee hm The Programming Overlays
304. u Prompt System Language or Primary Language ee Required if VMS Hunt Schedule is set to Day Only or Always General Information The Day Menu Prompt plays to callers when the VMS Hunt Schedule is set to Day Only or Always and Night Service is off The Day Menu Prompt and the Night Menu Prompt use the same Menu Definition m The Day Menu Prompt should contain a welcome and a list of menu options m The welcome should introduce the company For example Thank you for calling the Any Travel Agency m Ifthe system is set for Bilingual Mode let callers know they can switch the language they hear while on the call For example Para espanol marque 1 m The menu options should contain instructions that correspond to the Menu Definition set up on Form 3 If callers can dial extension numbers Direct Extension Transfer the prompt should instruct callers to dial the extension number For example If you know the extension of the person you want to reach dial it now If callers can dial a single digit to transfer to an extension or group Selector Code Transfer the prompt should provide instructions such as To speak to someone in sales press 6 If callers can can choose an Announcement include that information For example For directions to our office press 4 It is recommended that you keep the number of menu options to 5 or less to avoid confusing the caller Completin
305. u Prompt or Announcement and return to Step 12 to be prompted for re recording Press x to approve and save the Menu Definition the Day Menu Prompt and any Announcements Press x z to return to the Programming Main Menu Continue with Night Menu Prompt or go to the section 4 9 Initial Programming Night Menu Prompt To record the Night Menu Prompt specified on 1 If necessary access the Programming Main Menu if you are already at the Programming Main Menu skip to Step 2 a Press Intercom Z Z zZ or the programmed VMMsgs button b Press 9 2 c Enter the Mailbox Password and press d Press 9 Press 3 for Automated Attendant Press 2 for Night Menu Press 6 to modify the Night Menu Prompt Lift the handset press 1 and record the Menu Prompt from Press 1 after recording N O 9 e WO DN Choose an option or skip this step Press 2 12 to immediately re record this Menu Prompt Begin recording immediately after the beep press 1 after recording Repeat if desired Press 2 2 to play back this Menu Prompt Press x 3 to delete this Menu Prompt and return to Step 5 to be prompted for re recording 8 Press x to approve the Night Menu Prompt 9 Press x z to return to the Programming Main Menu 10 Continue with the section Voice Mail Service Initial Programming Bilingual Mode Menu Definit
306. ual Signaling F 13 XX or F 13 Xx buttons are associated with this pool Message Light Off F 10 XX Message Light On F 09 XX Recall F 03 Save Number Redial F 04 Simultaneous Paging I 70 SPage Station Lock F 21 Lock Touch Tone Enable F 08 TT EN Voice Mail Messages I 777 VMMsgs 777 Voice Mailbox Transfer F 14 VMBox F Feature button G Group I Left Intercom button L Line XX Extension 1 Button with lights is recommended but not required 2 PARTNER II system only 3 You can program the origination extension only or both the origination os i and destination extension Specify Automatic Line Selection 4 Extension number can be programmed as Auto Dial button Identify extensions programmed as shown 5 You can program the extension number Lucent Technologies Bell Labs Innovations S Template Instructions e If desired write in line number pool access code dial code feature or auto dial number e If desired write in Line Ringing Imm Del or No from Form B2 If desired write in Line Access Restriction or Pool Access Restriction Out In or No from For PARTNER II systems in Hybrid mode only if pool 880 is assigned these two buttons are associated with this pool Form C5 MLS 34D Phone Make as many copies as you need Use template and or checklist For additional instructions see page 8 SAMPLE Check Desired Features Al
307. ucent Technologies Bell Labs Innovations SS Required if you want to change extension settings from defaults For additional instructions see pages 6 and 7 te eer Identify Restrictions Permissions Identify Identify Extension Settings Identify Line Ringing CTP Option if Different than Defaults Group Assignments lf Different than Default If Different than Default ey a 2 Write line numbers for Line Access Restriction S B BS ax g 3 os Write line numbers in each column to show desired 5 0 Fl 2 g 8 a is l 8 Line Ringing options 302 Zl SaR og a g 2 _S Si elIpE B5loelfel Se B 8 5 Ea 2 2 an Si i7215 65 65 2S zles J3 Frl 3 S S glz gijas oa o als B osli MBelvlBQriae gt 2 22 ik 2 josie Sls g ecie 1 Pal 5 log e Fle gpl sE No Restriction lva zle 2l 2 2 52 Sia lS8 8 8s8 s s3 sa gl1 8 1 4 1 4 1 617 z 2 Ss2 8 5 8 4 28 25 Lines Outgoing Incoming Noa NRY NAY lt a F RF RV NAY NAY Immediate Delayed No Ring Not Assigned only only dii NA bald Nas NAV 28 i 29 30 31 m A 32 ES ES A E a 33 T E E 34 m A SESE RA DN ee 35 a ee ee 36 ee ee 37 aa aS EE SES Se ee es a es ae Pe 38 m A SO ON 39 M es QQ GO QO 40 I A 41 CO EE SS e a E a ee a E Assignments 6 Write group number 1 4 1 Write S for Spanish or F for French A i PARONA v Default A oe a a 7 Write g
308. upply SMDR If checked specify the following if appropriate e SMDR Record Type 608 By default all calls are included on call reports Write Out if only outgoing calls are reported e SMDR Output Format 610 By default up to 15 digits are printed for dialed numbers in the Number field of the call report Write 24 if a maximum of 24 digits is desired PARTNER Contact Closure Adjunct If checked write in the number 1 4 below to specify Operation Type for each Contact Closure as appropriate Contact Closure 1 Contact Closure 1 OperationType 613 1 1 second on 2 3 seconds on vw 3 5 seconds on 4 Toggle Backup Restore PC Card If checked write Active if Automatic System Programming Backup 123 is desired 11 Notes Write any additional information that you want to communicate to the installer Telephone No Form B1 System Extensions Lucent Eechnologies el AEU Required for PARTNER Advanced Communications System For additional instructions see page 5 ently Telephone Identify Auxiliary Equipment Attached to this Extension Attached to thi ension IZ l 1 l 1 amp l 5 i p 2 l l g eo El Wisse Ve al 1a a HAE 218 2 3 Write lA Ils N w szig ligos Sls xs slo N Sel 1 o gt E S Jo e Transfer ala z E 2 Igala 2 2 5 Z Ela ex S gL o 15 3 23 8 SaS 33 segejo 88 5 3 Write in b
309. ures allow you to access and program the voice messaging system you must perform these procedures first for every installation The next set of procedures covers voice messaging system programming The last section covers how to program the communications system The order of the procedures in this chapter enables you to program the Menu Definition and to record the Day and or Night Prompts and Automated Attendant Announcements before the voice messaging system begins to handle calls this order is recommended for voice messaging systems that are being added to existing communications systems If this is a new installation however you can program the communications system first then the voice messaging system if you prefer In addition you can either follow the step by step instructions or use the flowchart at the end of this manual as a quick guide If you use the step by step instructions note that Step 1 of each procedure for the voice messaging system is logging in However if you are already logged in you can skip Step 1 Finally some features and procedures in this chapter may not be available on your communications system If you are not sure check the Programming and Use guide for that system 4 1 Initial Programming Voice Mail System Configurations The PARTNER Mail VS supports the following configurations m 2 voice channels ports 10 mailboxes standard 2 ports 20 mailboxes requires a Mailbox Expansion Card
310. urn to Step 5 Press x to approve the Night Menu Prompt The system plays Approved Press x z to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit Bilingual Mode Playing the Menu Definition and Announcements This procedure lets you listen to the current Menu Definition and any Announcement associated with a Selector Code The Menu Definition is accessed through the Day Menu To play the current Menu Definition 1 Access the Programming Main Menu a Press Intercom z z z or the programmed VMMsgs button b Press 9 9 c Enter the Password and press d Press 9 The system plays the system programming options Press 3 for Automated Attendant The system plays To program the Day Menu press 1 For the Night Menu press 2 If finished press Press 1 for the Day Menu The system plays To play the menu press 2 to modify the menu press 6 If finished press System Management 4 Press 2 The system plays To play the menu prompt press 1 To play the Menu Definition press 2 If finished press 5 Press 2 to play the Menu Definition The system plays the current Menu Definition If an Announcement is recorded the system plays the Selector Code and associated Announcement number 6 Either Press if you do not want to listen to the Announcement and go to the next Selector Code Press 1 to play the Primary L
311. urs are 8 to 5 Monday through Friday Please press 9 to leave a message and we will return your call when the office opens Overview For a system set for Bilingual Mode the Day Menu Prompt should let callers know that they can switch from the Primary Language to the Secondary Language Note that callers can also press x 1 while listening to an Automated Attendant Announcement to switch between the Primary and Secondary Languages In the following example the Primary Language is Latin American Spanish and the Secondary Language is U S English Gracias por llamar a Software M xico For English press 1 Si usted tiene tel fono de tonos y conoce 1 n mero d xtensi n marquelo ahora De lo contrario spere a ser atendido por nuestra operadora For after hours callers you can set up Automated Attendant Service to play this prompt Gracias por llamar a Software M xico For English press 1 Nuestro horario de oficina es de 9 a 14 30 horas y de 16 a 18 horas Si usted tiene tel fono de tonos y conoc 1 n mero de la extensi n a la que desea llamar marquelo ahora De lo contrario espere y deje un mensaje con la operadora gt NOTE When the system is installed initially Automated Attendant Service has this factory set Day Menu Prompt Hello welcome to PARTNER MAIL VS Pleas nter th extension number of the person you wish to reach or press 0 to reach the receptionist In addition A
312. utcalling PRESS 9 to assign Outcalling or PRESS 6 to remove Outcalling To assign remove Outcalling for anothe mailbox repeat PRESS x 7 TO EXIT PROGRAMMING PRESS x 9 Line Ownership REFER to Form 6 PRESS 6 to program Line Ownership TO SCAN LINE OWNERSHIP PRESS 2 to scan ENTER the line number and _ or PRESS _ to scan the first line number that has an owner LISTEN to the line owner s name and mailbox number PRESS to scan the next line TO ASSIGN LINE OWNERSHIP PRESS 4 to assign ENTER the line number and _ ENTER the mailbox number and _ TO MODIFY LINE OWNERSHIP PRESS 6 to modify ENTER the line number and _ ENTER the new owner s mailbox number and TO DELETE LINE OWNERSHIP PRESS x 3 to delete ENTER the line number and _ PRESS 9 to confirm PARTNER MAIL VS System Programming Reference To Program the Communications System for PARTNER MAIL VS Place the Programming Overlay on the dial pad of the system display phone at extension 10 TO START SYSTEM PROGRAMMING PRESS _Feature 0 0 PRESS _System Program PRESS System Program ENTER System Password if required TO END SYSTEM PROGRAMMING PRESS Feature 0 0 HUNT GROUP EXTENSIONS DIAL 505 PRESS _Z for the VMS Hunt Group DIAL the extension number DIAL 1 Assigned to group 2 Not assigned to group PRESS Next Item to program the next extension
313. utomated Attendant Service has this factory set Night Menu Prompt Good Evening Welcome to PARTNER MAIL VS Please enter the extension number of the person you wish to reach or press 9 to leave a message with the receptionist Automated Attendant Service is useful for many businesses such as car dealerships insurance agencies and stores For example a car dealership can use Automated Attendant Service to allow its customers to reach the customer service department directly This frees sales people to handle customer transactions while the Automated Attendant Service transfers service calls to the appropriate department In this case the Automated Attendant Service can be programmed to prompt the caller to enter a single digit to reach any available customer service representative Overview Communications System Features Affecting Automated Attendant Service When planning Automated Attendant Service you must choose settings for the following communications system features Group Call Distribution Specifies the outside lines that are to be answered by Automated Attendant Service VMS Hunt Schedule Specifies when the communications system is to route calls to the Automated Attendant Service VMS Hunt Delay Specifies whether the Automated Attendant Service is to provide immediate or delayed call handling Transfer Return Extension Specifies how unanswered calls are transferred by the voice mail system
314. verage on all coverage on and tion with automatic or the time at their off at their manual VMS coverage Extension Extension Doing so enables callers to receive Call Answer Service immediately Automated Attendant The receptionist answers Service answers outside outside calls Calls not calls immediately The answered by the third ring receptionist acts as a back go to the Automated up for unanswered calls Attendant Service calls do not ring the extension first Figure 1 1 Voice Messaging Services Overview Automated Attendant Service The Automated Attendant Service can answer and route outside calls without assistance from a receptionist After an outside call is answered the Automated Attendant Service plays a customized message called the menu prompt Typically the message welcomes callers to let them know they have reached the correct number then offers callers a menu of options for transferring to the desired party or listening to an Announcement It is recommended that the menu offer not more than five options to avoid confusing callers You can record up to two Announcements in Monolingual Mode or up to two Announcements for each language in Bilingual Mode Announcements are often used to answer frequently asked questions such as business hours and location emergency service special offers etc Each Announcement can be up to four minutes in length Callers can choose to listen to these Announcements
315. x on an immediate basis _ If the remaining two extensions are used calls are routed to the subscriber s mailbox after four rings or after the number of rings programmed in the VMS Cover Ring Interval A 2 port voice messaging system uses the bottom two extension numbers associated with the slot in which the module is installed see Figures 2 1 and 2 2 in Chapter 2 For example if the module is installed in the last slot on a PARTNER Plus see it uses extensions 32 and 33 In this case you can use extensions 28 through 33 for guest mailboxes A 4 port system uses the bottom four extensions for example 30 31 32 and 33 In this case you can use extensions 28 through 33 for guest mailboxes 5 41 System Management Checking a Mailbox s Status Use this procedure to determine if a mailbox exists 1 Access the Programming Main Menu a Press Intercom z Zz z or the programmed VMMsgs button b Press 9 9 c Enter the Password and press d Press 9 The system plays the system programming options 2 Press 4 to program mailboxes The system tells you how many mailboxes currently exist and how many are allowed then Pleas nter the mailbox number followed by or press for the next mailbox 3 Enter the number of the mailbox whose status you want to check followed by or simply press The system responds as follows If you entered a mailbox number followed
316. xt Data until the appropriate value displays a fF ON Press Feature o 0 to exit programming System Management ee Modifying Mailboxes The voice messaging system is shipped with mailboxes already created for a predetermined number of extensions If a Mailbox Expansion Card is installed mailbox capacity is increased The characteristics of mailboxes are as follows a Receptionist s Extension Extension 10 has a maximum storage capacity of 60 minutes or 120 messages Each message has a maximum length of four minutes All Other Extensions Other extensions each have a maximum storage capacity of 20 minutes or 40 messages System Management Programming Main Menu GESER J Mailboxes Press 4 Mailbox Number Enter Number L Mailbox Number Exists Yes No Reinitialize Create Main Menu Mailbox Press 3 Press 4 Reinitialize Mailbox Press 4 Administer Outcalling Press 5 Program Mailbox Language Press 6 Delete Mailbox Press L3 Figure 5 3 Modifying Mailboxes System Management If you need to change current mailbox programming you can use the instructions presented in this section For example f an employee leaves the company you can set up the previously assigned mailbox number for a new employee To do so use Reinitializing a Mailbox which returns the mailbox to its factory setti
317. y damage if the hazard is not avoided A WARNING Indicates the presence of a hazard that can cause severe or fatal personal injury if the hazard is not avoided How to Comment on This Guide A feedback form is located at the end of this guide after the appendixes If the form is missing send your comments and recommendations for changes to Publications Manager Lucent Technologies 211 Mount Airy Road Room 2W 226 Basking Ridge NJ 07920 FAX 1 908 953 6912 Xiv About This Guide Reference Materials In addition to this guide the following materials are available the order numbers are in parentheses for the voice messaging system m Using the PARTNER MAIL VS Voice Messaging System 585 322 523 m Tutor Labels 585 322 510 To order these materials call the Lucent Technologies BCS Publications Center at 1 800 457 1235 in the continental U S or at 1 317 361 5353 Some of these materials also are available in other languages For more information about these materials or about communications system materials contact the BCS Publications Center your Lucent Technologies Representative or local Authorized Dealer XV Overview Contents Tutor Feature 1 3 Languages 1 4 Voice Messaging Services 1 4 Automated Attendant Service 1 6 Communications System Features Affecting Automated Attendant Service 1 8 Call Answer Service 1 11 Communications System Features Affecting Call Answer Service 1 12 Secu
318. y or Night only is desired Q Day only Q Night only 12 Installation Date 13 Order Nos 14 Sales Support Representative s Name 10 Auxiliary Equipment System Check if applicable m Ocoocoo Q Battery Backup Caller ID Devices Loudspeaker Paging Number of zones Magic on Hold Music on Hold 602 must be active Uninterruptible Power Supply SMDR If checked specify the following if appropriate SMDR Record Type 608 By default all calls are included on call reports Write Out if only outgoing calls are reported e SMDR Output Format 610 By default up to 15 digits are printed for dialed numbers in the Number field of the call report Write 24 if a maximum of 24 digits is desired PARTNER Contact Closure Adjunct If checked write in the number 1 4 below to specify Operation Type for each Contact Closure as appropriate Contact Closure 1 Contact Closure 1 OperationType 613 1 1 second on 2 3 seconds on w 3 5 seconds on 4 Toggle Backup Restore PC Card If checked write Active if Automatic System Programming Backup 123 is desired 11 Notes Write any additional information that you want to communicate to the installer Telephone No O Lucent Technologies Bell Labs Innovations Form B1 System Extensions PAGE 1of3 Required for PARTNER Advanced Communications System For additional instructions see page 5 Iden
319. ymbol m This Menu Definition applies to both the Day and Night Menu prompts m The Selector Code is the first digit dialed by the caller in response to the menu prompts a In Direct Extension Transfer Selector Codes 1 5 and 7 represent the first digit for a range of extensions These Selector Codes let callers dial extension numbers directly m n Selector Code Transfer Selector Codes 1 9 represent a specific extension Group Calling number if available or Hunt Group number to which the caller will be transferred Use the following values PARTNER Plus 10 33 or 771 776 PARTNER Advanced 11 41 71 74 or 771 776 PARTNER II 10 57 71 74 or 771 776 PARTNER 48 10 57 71 or 771 776 Selector Code Transfer lets callers dial a single digit to reach a single extension or group such as the VP of Sales at extension 37 or the order processing operators assigned to Hunt Group 774 m Selector Code 9 lets callers transfer directly to mailbox 10 receptionist mailbox where they can leave a message The Description and Selector Code number from this form will be used to complete the Day and Night Menu Prompts Forms 4 4A 5 Jand 5A m For Announcement entries in Description Selector Code and Announcement of this form will be used to complete Forms 3A and 3B Completing this Form For Direct Extension Transfer Description Write Direct Extension Transfer Range of Extensions for Direct Extension Trans
320. ystem plays To program the Day Menu press 1 For the Night Menu press 2 System Management 3 Press 1 for the Day Menu The system plays To play the menu press 2 to modify the menu press 6 If finished press 4 Press 2 The system plays To play the menu prompt press 1 To play the Menu Definition press 2 If finished press 5 Press 2 to play the Menu Definition The system plays the current Menu Definition If an Announcement is recorded the system plays the Selector Code number and associated Announcement number 6 Press 1 to play or to skip the recorded Announcement assigned to the Selector Code The system plays the recorded Announcement and goes to the next Selector Code 7 Press x Zz to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit Playing the Day or Night Menu Prompt To listen to the current Day or Night Menu Prompt 1 Access the Programming Main Menu a Press Intercom Z z Zz or the programmed VMMsgs button b Press 9 9 c Enter the Password and press d Press 9 The system plays the system programming options 2 Press 3 for Automated Attendant The system plays To program the Day Menu press 1 For the Night Menu press 2 If finished press 3 Either Press i for the Day Menu Press 2 for the Night Menu The system plays To play the menu press 2 to modify the menu press 6 If fi

Lucent Technologies Answering Machine 107970212 User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents